AT&T | Merlin | Installation guide | AT&T Merlin Installation guide

AT&T Merlin Installation guide
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
®
MERLIN
Plus
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Release 2
System Manual
999-507-148
Issue 3
August 1990
© 1990 AT&T
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
999-507-148
Issue 3
August 1990
NOTICE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Lucent
Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
MERLIN is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies.
To order copies of this document, call the Lucent Technologies Customer Information
Center, 1-888-582-3688 and refer to document number 999-507-148 with your order.
Intellectual property related to this product (including trademarks) and registered to
AT&T Corporation has been transferred to Lucent Technologies Incorporated.
Any references within this text to American Telephone and Telegraph Corporation
or AT&T should be interpreted as references to Lucent Technologies Incorporated.
The exception is cross references to books published prior to December 31, 1996,
which retain their original AT&T titles.
Lucent Technologies – formed as a result of AT&T’s planned restructuring –
designs, builds, and delivers a wide range of public and private networks,
communication systems and software, consumer and business telephone systems,
and microelectronic components. The world-renowned Bell Laboratories is the
research and development arm for the company.
Contents
Section 1: Introduction
FCC Notification and Repair Information
Quick Start Procedure
What’s in This Manual
How to Use This Manual
The MERLIN Plus Communications System
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-6
1-7
Section 2: Planning the System
Introduction
System Configuration Form
Line Assignments Form
Call Restrictions Forms
System Speed Dial Forms
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-1
2-2
2-9
2-18
2-23
2-25
Section 3: Administering the System
Introduction
Administration Preview
Basic Administration
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
Systemwide Options
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes
3-1
3-2
3-10
3-24
3-33
3-37
3-48
Section 4: Using The Attendant Console
Overview
Handling Calls
4-1
4-4
Section 5: Reference
MERLIN Plus System Features
Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features
Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features
Quick Reference Guide to Using the Programming Codes
5-1
5-166
5-170
5-171
Section 6: Accessory Equipment
Answering Machines
Basic Telephones
Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2
Data Collector and Printer
Doorphone Controller
General Purpose Adapter (GPA)
Headset and Headset Adapter
Loudspeaker Paging System
Music-on-Hold (MOH) and Background Music
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA)
6-2
6-4
6-7
6-9
6-11
6-13
6-15
6-17
6-21
6-23
Section 7: Troubleshooting the System
Troubleshooting Procedures
System Test
Section 8: Installation
Index
7-1
7-13
Section 1: Introduction
FCC Notification and Repair Information
INTERFERENCE
INFORMATION NOTICE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. The equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to
Subpart J or Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. Operating this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause interference, in which case the user, at his or her own expense, will be
required to do whatever is necessary to correct the interference.
FCC REGISTRATION AND
REPAIR INFORMATION
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its
rules. In compliance with the rules, you are to be advised of the following:
1
2
Means of Connection: Connection of this equipment to the telephone
network must be through a standard network interface jack: USOC RJ11C or
RJ14C, or a multiline network interface cable and connector USOC R121.
●
Connection to off-premises stations requires a USOC RJ2GX.
●
This equipment must be ordered from your local telephone company.
●
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.
Notification of the Local Telephone Company: Before connecting this
equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone
company’s business office of the following:
●
●
The telephone numbers you will be using with this equipment.
The registration number for the MERLIN® Plus system:
AS593M-13529-KF-E
●
The ringer equivalent number (REN) for the MERLIN Plus system:
0.8A
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this
equipment is permanently disconnected from the lines.
3
Installation and Operational Procedures: The System Manual and the
MERLIN Plus Installation Guide contain information about installation and
operational procedures.
4
Repair Instructions: If you experience trouble because your equipment is
malfunctioning, the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it
be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected.
Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturers, their
authorized agents, or by others who may be authorized by the FCC.
FCC Notification and Repair Information
1-1
5
Rights of the Local Telephone Company: If this equipment causes harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service
temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. If advance notice is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will also be
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment.
If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to
maintain uninterrupted service.
6
Hearing Aid Compatibility: The custom telephone sets for this system are
compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids.
1-2 FCC Notification and Repair Information
Quick Start Procedure
IF YOU’RE IN A HURRY
If you need to make and receive calls the moment your MERLIN Plus system is
installed, and before you’ve had time to learn how to implement the entire
system, this “Quick Start” information is for you. Follow this short procedure and
in a few minutes you’ll hear the familiar sound of a dial tone, enabling you to
make and receive calls, so that your business can continue uninterrupted while
the rest of the system is being planned.
1
Connect the system to a grounded ac power outlet.
2
Connect the system to the Central Office line in jack A.
3
Plug a voice terminal into Intercom #10.
4
Turn on the system power switch.
You now can make unrestricted calls on Touch-Tone lines only
from the voice terminal.
Quick Start Procedure
1-3
What's in This Manual
You’ll find the information in this MERLIN Plus Communications System
manual conveniently divided into eight sections, as described below.
You’ll also find ten copies of the MERLIN Plus System User’s Guide enclosed.
SECTION 1.
INTRODUCTION
This section tells you what’s in this manual and how to use it. It also offers a
brief introduction to the system’s control unit and the voice terminals
(telephones).
SECTION 2.
PLANNING THE SYSTEM
Use the information in this section to make some key decisions about how you
want the system to operate. This section includes planning forms to record your
decisions. If someone else will be system administrator, have that person fill out
the planning forms.
SECTION 3.
ADMINISTERING THE
SYSTEM
This section tells you how to use the information on the planning forms to
customize the system to meet your business needs. If someone else will be
system administrator, have that person administer the system following the steps
in this section.
SECTION 4.
USING THE ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
If your system will have an attendant manage incoming call traffic, that person
can find helpful information in this section on using the administrator/attendant
telephone.
SECTION 5.
REFERENCE
This section contains a detailed discussion of every component, option, and
feature in the MERLIN Plus system. The entries are organized alphabetically to
help you find the information you need quickly. As you become familiar with
the system, you’ll probably go to this section first when you want to change a
system setting or a voice terminal feature, or when you simply want to find out
more about some aspect of the system.
SECTION 6.
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
Accessory Equipment includes the additional hardware that can be used with the
MERLIN Plus system. The accessories are listed alphabetically.
SECTION 7.
TROUBLESHOOTING
THE SYSTEM
The tables in this section can help you isolate and solve any of the technical
problems that may cause your system to malfunction.
SECTION 8.
INSTALLATION
Insert your MERLIN Plus Release 2 Installation Manual in this section
for future reference.
1-4 What’s in This Manual
USER’S GUIDE
This guide is a handy reference for anyone who uses a MERLIN Plus system
voice terminal on the job. Give one to everyone in your business who uses a
voice terminal.
CF/RLA CARD
This card should be given to anyone in your company who works at home or
travels frequently but still needs to make or receive business calls. It contains
instructions for using Call Forwarding and Remote Line Access, convenient
features for people who spend a lot of time out of the office. (Refer to
Section 5, “Reference,” for more details about these two features.)
DOCUMENT LIST
Call the AT&T Customer Information Center at 1-800-432-6600 to order any of
the following documents for the MERLIN Plus system:
Document
Order No.
System Manual
CF/RLA Card
Installation Manual
User’s Guide
Customization Chart
Customer Training Video Tape
999-507-148
999-502-148
518-600-008
999-500-148
999-503-148
775-358
What’s in This Manual
1-5
How to Use This Manual
How you should use this manual at any particular time depends on what you
want to do, as the following information suggests.
ADMINISTERING
A NEW SYSTEM?
Use the information in Section 2, “Planning the System,” to decide which options
and features you want for your system, then follow the instructions in Section 3,
“Administering the System,” and in Section 5, “Reference,” to set up the system
with the options and features you‘ve selected.
NEED TO USE THE PHONE
BEFORE THE SYSTEM IS
RUNNING?
Refer to the “Quick Start Procedure” at the beginning of this section.
MAKING CHANGES TO A
RUNNING SYSTEM?
Change the planning forms to reflect the changes you want to make, then see the
relevant entries in Section 5, “Reference,” and Section 6, “Quick Reference
Guides,” to make the changes.
MANAGING INCOMING
CALL TRAFFIC AS
SYSTEM ATTENDANT?
See Section 4, “Using the Attendant Console,” for information on how to use the
attendant’s telephone to handle incoming calls.
USING A VOICE TERMINAL
FOR THE FIRST TIME?
See the relevant entries and quick reference guides in Section 5, “Reference,”
and keep the MERLIN Plus System User’s Guide handy.
HAVING TROUBLE WITH
THE SYSTEM?
Find the symptom in Section 7, “Troubleshooting,” then follow the suggestions
for solving the problem.
1-6 How to Use This Manual
The MERLIN Plus Communications System
The basic MERLIN Plus system provides connections to up to four outside
telephone lines and ten voice terminals. We use the term “voice terminal”
instead of “telephone” because a basic telephone only lets you make and receive
calls, while a voice terminal can be programmed to do a whole lot more, which
you will soon discover as you read this manual.
To accommodate your growing communications needs, the system expands
easily and economically to support up to eight outside lines and 20 voice
terminals. If your business eventually outgrows even the fully expanded
MERLIN Plus system, you can protect your investment in voice terminals,
accessory equipment, and training time with the purchase of a larger MERLIN
system.
The paragraphs that follow offer a brief introduction to the system’s control unit
and voice terminals. The optional equipment you can add to your system is
described under the heading “Accessory Equipment” in Section 5, “Reference.”
THE CONTROL UNIT
The control unit is the system’s brain. It manages all incoming, outgoing, and
intercom call traffic. It makes all of the system’s decisions and controls all of the
system’s responses. For an illustration of the control unit with its major
components labeled, see “Administration Preview” in Section 3,
“Administering the System.”
THE VOICE TERMINALS
A voice terminal is a MERLIN system telephone that provides basic telephone
functions and allows you to take advantage of the special MERLIN system
features. All voice terminals have buttons for fixed features such as Conference,
Drop, Transfer, and Hold. They differ from one another in the number of buttons
above and to the right of the dial pad that can be used for outside lines and
programmable features. The 10-button voice terminal with the “HFAI”
designation has the hands-free intercom feature. Voice terminals with “SP” or
“BIS” designations also have the hands-free answer on intercom feature and a
built-in speakerphone. For more information on using basic telephones with the
MERLIN Plus system, see “Basic Telephones” in Section 5, “Reference.”
Your MERLIN Plus system works best with the following voice terminals:
●
BIS-10 Voice Terminal
●
BIS-22 Voice Terminal
●
BIS-22D Voice Terminal with Display
●
BIS-34 Voice Terminal
●
BIS-34D Voice Terminal with Display
●
5-Button Voice Terminal
●
10-Button Voice Terminal
●
10-Button Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI-10) Voice Terminal
●
34-Button Voice Terminal
●
34-Button (SP-34) Voice Terminal with Speakerphone
●
34-Button (SP-34D) Voice Terminal with Speakerphone and Display
●
34-Button Deluxe Voice Terminal
The MERLIN Plus Communications System
1-7
BIS-10, BIS-22, BIS-34, and BIS-34D Voice Terminals
The BIS-10 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom
calls without lifting the handset. There are two columns of five buttons above
the dial pad for incoming lines, auto intercom, and programmable features.
The dual lights next to each button indicate the current status of selected features
and lines.
BIS 10
The BIS-22 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom
calls without lifting the handset. There are two columns of five buttons above the
dial pad and one column of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad, each with dual
lights that indicate the current status of selected features and lines. You can use
the buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines, auto intercom, and
programmable features. You can also use the 12 buttons to the right of
the dial pad for programmable features.
BIS 22
The BIS-22D Voice Terminal with Display allows you to make and receive
outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset. There are two columns of
five buttons above the dial pad and one column of 12 buttons to the right of the
dial pad, each with dual lights that indicate the current status of selected features
and lines. You can use the buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines, auto
intercom, and programmable features. You can also use the 12 buttons to the
right of the dial pad for programmable features. The display, located in the top
portion of the voice terminal, offers a variety of visual aids for most features.
BIS 22D
The BIS-34 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom
calls without lifting the handset. There are two columns of five buttons above the
dial pad for outside lines, auto intercom, and programmable features and two
columns of 12 buttons to the right for programmable features. The dual lights
next to each button indicate the status of the selected features and lines.
BIS 34
1-8 The MERLIN Plus Communications System
The BIS-34D Voice Terminal with Display allows you to make and receive
outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset. There are two columns of
five buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines, auto intercom, and
programmable features and two columns of 12 buttons to the right for
programmable features. The dual lights next to each button indicate the status of
the selected features and lines. The display, located in the top portion of the
voice terminal, offers a variety of visual aids for most features.
BIS 34D
5-Button Voice Terminal
The 5-button voice terminal has one column of five buttons (an Intercom button
and four additional buttons above the dial pad) that you can use for outside lines
and/or programmable features.
5-Button
10-Button Voice Terminals
The 10-Button Voice Terminal has two columns of five buttons
(an Intercom button and nine additional buttons above the dial pad) for outside
lines and programmable features.
10-Button
The 10-Button (HFAI-10) Voice Terminal has a built-in speaker that allows you
to answer intercom calls without lifting the handset. It also has two columns of
five buttons (an Intercom button and nine additional buttons above the dial pad)
for outside lines and programmable features.
HFAI-10
The MERLIN Plus Communications System
1-9
34-Button Voice Terminal
The 34-Button Voice Terminal is a basic voice terminal that provides two
columns of five buttons above the dial pad for outside lines and programmable
features. The two columns of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad can
be used for Auto Intercom buttons and other programmable features that do not
require lights.
34-Button
The 34-Button Deluxe Voice Terminal has two columns of five buttons located
above the dial pad and two columns of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad.
You can use the buttons above the dial pad for lines and programmable features.
You can use the 24 buttons, with two lights per button, located to the right of the
dial pad for programmable features.
34-Button
Deluxe
The 34-Button (SP-34) Voice Terminal with Speakerphone has a built-in
speakerphone that allows you to initiate and answer both outside and intercom
calls without using the handset. Above the dial pad are two columns of five
buttons (an Intercom button and nine additional buttons) for outside lines and
Auto Intercom buttons and programmable features. The two columns of
12 buttons located to the right of the dial pad can be used for programmable
features that do not require lights.
SP 34
The 34-Button (SP-34D) Voice Terminal with Speakerphone and Display has all
the features of the SP-34 voice terminal combined with a display in the top
portion.
SP-34D
1-10 The MERLiN Plus Communications System
Summary
Voice terminal models BIS-34 and BIS-34D are ideal for the system
administrator/attendant console because their features allow you to easily use all
the system’s features. You can also use the BIS-22 and the 34-Button Deluxe
models as the console. However, the SP-34, SP-34D, BIS-10, HFAI-10,
10-Button, and 5-Button voice terminals are not recommended for use as an
adrninister/attendant console because the administrator would be unable to see
which buttons were being assigned special features during system
administration. In addition, 10- and 22-Button voice terminals cannot be
used to program certain system features.
The MERLIN Plus Communications System
1-11
Section 2: Planning the System
Introduction
YOU can begin making and receiving calls as soon as your MERLIN Plus
Communications System is installed. But to take full advantage of the system’s
power, you should customize it to fit your business needs. Customizing the
system is called administering the system throughout this manual.
Administering the system involves entering information into the system’s
memory about how you want the system to operate. You enter this information
by touching buttons and dialing numbers on the telephone referred to in this
manual as the administrator/attendant console.
This section of the manual helps you decide what information you want to enter
into the system’s memory and shows you how to record that information on
forms. A checklist of the forms appears below. You can find copies at the end
of this section. Remove them now, make a photocopy of each, and put the
originals back in this binder. Keep the copies on hand so you can fill them out as
you plan your system.
NOTE:
❑
System Configuration Form
❑
Line Assignments Form
❑
Call Restrictions Forms
❑
System Speed Dial Forms
In this section of the manual, the information that appears before the
boxes helps you make important decisions about your system.
Then the instructions in the boxes tell you whereto enter these
decisions on the forms.
Introduction
2-1
System Configuration Form
Use the System Configuration Form to record information about the following:
●
Dial Signals
●
Long Distance Dialing
●
Transfer Return Interval
●
Call Report
●
Music-on-Hold
●
Background
●
Outside Telephone Lines
●
Voice
Music
Terminals
The following information should help you make the appropriate entries for your
system on the System Configuration Form.
DIAL SIGNALS
The MERLIN Plus system comes set to generate Touch-Tones when you dial an
outside call. This means that if one or more of your outside telephone lines
transmits rotary (pulse) signals, you have to administer the system for rotary
dialing. Otherwise you won’t be able to dial out over the rotary lines.
NOTE:
If some of your outside lines are Touch-Tone and some rotary, you may
want to ask your local telephone company to replace the rotary lines
with Touch-Tone lines.
Under “Dial Signals” on the form . . .
Check the box next to “Touch-Tone” if all the outside telephone lines
connected to your system are Touch-Tone lines.
Check the box next to “Rotary (Pulse)” if one or more of the outside lines
connected to your system are rotary lines.
LONG DISTANCE DIALING
Under “Long Distance Dialing”. . .
Check the box next to “Toll-Prefix” if you have to dial atoll prefix (1 or 0)
before the area code when you dial the telephone number for a
long distance call.
Check the box next to “Area Code Only” if you do not have to dial a toll
prefix (1 or 0) before the area code when you dial the telephone number for a
long distance call.
2-2 System Configuration Form
TRANSFER RETURN
INTERVAL
Initially, when someone in the MERLIN Plus system transfers a call and it is not
answered in four rings, the call returns to the sender. You can change that
setting so that calls don’t return, or return after up to nine rings.
Under “Transfer Return Interval” . . .
Check “No Return” if you don’t want transferred calls to return to the
originator, if the call is unanswered.
Check “___ Rings” then fill in a number between 1 and 9, depending on the
number of times you want a transferred call to ring before it’s returned
to the originator.
The following three features, Call Report, Music-on-Hold, and Background
Music require optional equipment. If your business is not using these features,
skip these discussions and continue with “Outside Telephone Lines.”
CALL REPORT
Call Report, also called Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), enables
businesses to keep records of incoming and outgoing calls. This optional feature
requires a MERLIN PLUS system data collector and an AT&T 475/476 or
572/573 printer or its equivalent.
The Call Report feature gives you information in a report that is printed
automatically as calls occur. The report includes the date and time of each call,
its duration, the number dialed (if the call is outgoing), and the line and voice
terminal on which the call is made. An account code is printed if the
user enters one when the call is made. (See “Account Code Entry” in
Section 5, “Reference.”)
During system administration you can set the system to generate call records for
outgoing calls only or for both incoming and outgoing calls. The minimum call
duration, when calls begin to be recorded, can be set as short as 10 seconds or as
long as nine minutes. The default setting is 0 which represents ten seconds — the
time it takes to connect a call and to avoid recording busy or unanswered calls.
The other durations that can be selected are given in minutes (1 to 9).
Under “Call Report”. . .
Check “Outgoing Calls Only” if you want only outgoing calls reported.
Check “Incoming and Outgoing Calls” if you want both incoming and
outgoing calls reported.
Write in the time you’ve selected as the minimum length for a call to be
reported (0-9).
System Configuration Form
2-3
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
If you have an optional audio system, you can connect it with an RCA-type
phonograph jack to the Music-on-Hold jack provided at the top of the Control
Unit. Then when callers are placed on hold, they hear background music while
they’re waiting.
You can control the music volume or turn off the music from the
administrator/attendant console.
Under “Music-on-Hold” . . .
If you have the optional audio equipment connected to the Music-on-Hold
jack, check that volume selection you desire.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
If you have an optional audio source connected to the Music-on-Hold jack and
an optional loudspeaker paging system connected to the paging jack or a CO line
jack, you can provide background music throughout your building.
You can control the background music volume either at the audio source or at
the administrator/attendant console.
Under “Background Music” . . .
If you want to adjust the volume of the background music at the
administrator/attendant console check that volume selection you desire.
OUTSIDE TELEPHONE
LINES
Your local telephone company gives you the telephone numbers for your outside
lines. The control unit jacks where the outside lines connect to the system are
labeled alphabetically: A through D for a system with four or fewer outside lines,
and A through H for a system with five to eight outside lines.
To simplify system administration, plan to assign your outside lines to an
unbroken sequence of jacks beginning with jack A. Begin with the lines
for your local published telephone numbers. Group special line types such as
WATS lines together in the sequence, and place any personal lines at the end of
the sequence.
Under “Outside Telephone Lines” . . .
Write in the telephone number and the line type for each of your outside lines
next to the appropriate letter.
If you have an optional loudspeaker paging system that you are planning to
connect to a CO line instead of the Paging jack on the Control Unit, write
“CO Paging” under line type for the CO line you plan to use for paging.
2-4 System Configuration Form
HOLD DISCONNECT
INTERVAL
The MERLIN Plus system comes set for a long (450 milliseconds) hold
disconnect interval because most telephone company switching systems use the
long interval. If your telephone company uses a short (50 millisecond) interval,
you’ll need to reset your system to prevent calls from remaining on hold after
callers have hung up. Refer to “Hold Disconnect Interval” in Section 5,
“Reference,” for more information on how to detect the hold disconnect interval.
Under “Hold Disconnect Interval” on the “Outside Telephone Lines” form . . .
Check the column under “Long” if you want the 450 millisecond Hold
Disconnect Interval.
Check the column under “Short” if you want the 50 millisecond Hold
Disconnect Interval.
VOICE TERMINALS
Each MERLIN Plus system voice terminal (telephone) in your system will have
a 2-digit intercom number corresponding to the number of the voice terminal
jack on the control unit where the voice terminal connects to the system.
The valid intercom numbers for a control unit with 10 voice terminal jacks are
10 through 19. For a control unit with 20 voice terminal jacks, the valid
intercom numbers are 10 through 29. The jack locations are illustrated on a label
to the left of the modules in the control unit.
Intercom Number 10
By design, the intercom 10 position is the primary call-handling position in the
system, and it is also the system administration point. If your system will have
an attendant, you should assign intercom number 10 to the voice terminal at the
system attendant’s location. For complete system administration, the voice
terminal assigned intercom 10 should be either a BIS-22 or a BIS-34 model.
If you have 10 or fewer voice terminals, you may prefer to use a BIS-22 voice
terminal.
Under “Voice Terminals” . . .
Write in the name of the system attendant/administrator and that person’s
location on the line next to number 10.
Intercom Number 18
Notice on the form that “ASA” appears in the “Name” column next to intercom
number 18. ASA stands for Automatic System Access, a group of features that
includes Call Forwarding, Direct Extension Dialing, System Answer, and
Remote Line Access. These features allow you to take advantage of the
economy and efficiency of your MERLIN Plus system and its long-distance
service lines when you’re away from the office on business, or even when you’re
at home.
System Configuration Form
2-5
Activation of the ASA features requires a dedicated voice terminal jack on the
control unit. At startup, the system automatically reserves jack (intercom
number) 18 for the ASA features. But you can choose another voice terminal
jack for ASA during system administration, or you may decide not to use any of
the ASA features and assign intercom number 18 to a voice terminal. (To find
out more about the Automatic System Access features— Call Forwarding, Direct
Extension Dialing, System Answer, and Remote Line Access—see the entries
for them in Section 5, “Reference.”)
Under “Voice Terminals” . . .
Do not write in a name next to intercom number 18 if you plan to use any of
the Automatic System Access features (unless you plan to assign an intercom
number other than 18 to ASA during system administration).
Cross out “(ASA)” next to intercom number 18 if you do not plan to use any
of the ASA features or you are assigning the ASA features to a different
intercom number. You can then treat intercom number 18 just like any other
intercom number as you assign them. If you are assigning the ASA features
to a different intercom number, write “ASA” next to the intercom number you
plan to use instead of intercom number 18.
Intercom Number 19
Notice on the form that “BB” and “Reports” appear in parentheses in the “Name”
column next to intercom number 19. The Busy Buster feature automatically
redials the last number you dialed up to 10 times and signals you if and when the
line begins to ring.
Operation of the BB feature requires a dedicated voice terminal jack on the
control unit. At startup, the system automatically reserves jack (intercom
number) 19 for Busy Buster. You can choose another voice terminal jack for
Busy Buster during system administration, or you may choose not to use
the BB feature and assign intercom number 19 to a voice terminal.
(For more information on Busy Buster, see the entry for “Busy Buster” in
Section 5, “Reference.”)
Under “Voice Terminals” . . .
Do not write in a name next to intercom number 19 if you plan to use the
Busy Buster feature.
Cross out “BB” next to intercom number 19 if you plan to deactivate Busy
Buster during system administration or if you plan to assign it to a different
intercom number. (Intercom number 19 will still be reserved for the data
collector and printer which are used to print reports.) You can then treat
intercom number 19 just like any other intercom number when you assign
intercom numbers to voice terminals at the appropriate point in this planning
sequence. If you are assigning BB to a different intercom number, write BB
next to the intercom number you plan to use instead of intercom number 19.
2-6 System Configuration Form
Notice that “Reports” also appears in parentheses in the “Name” column next to
intercom 19 on the form. If your system has the Call Report option, intercom 19
is automatically reserved for the data collector and printer required to print this
report. If your system also has BB, both features can share the same port with
the use of the adapter supplied with the data collector. You can designate an
intercom number other than 19 for the Call Report or System Feature Report
equipment when you administer the system, but you cannot assign both the
Call Report and System Feature Report equipment and a voice terminal to the
same intercom number. If you change the voice terminal jack assignment for the
data collector and printer, you should administer the new jack assignment for
both report features. (For more information on the Call Report and System
Feature Report options and equipment, see the appropriate entries in
Section 5, “Reference.”)
Under “Voice Terminals” . . .
Do not write in a name next to intercom “number 19 if your system has the
Call Report and/or System Feature Report option (unless you plan to assign
an intercom number other than 19 to the Call Report or System Feature
Report equipment when you administer the system).
Cross out “(Reports)” next to intercom 19 if your system does not have the
Call Report or the System Feature Report option or if you want to assign them
to a different intercom number. Then you can treat intercom 19 just like any
other intercom number as you assign intercom numbers below. If you are
assigning Reports to a different intercom number, write Reports next to the
intercom number you plan to use instead of intercom number 19.
Intercom Numbers 11 through 29
To simplify system administration, you should assign consecutive intercom
numbers, beginning with 11, to the remaining voice terminals in your system.
(As explained earlier, intercom number 10 goes to the administrator/attendant
voice terminal, and intercom numbers 18 and 19 are reserved for system features
unless reassigned.)
If you are using the ASA feature, Direct Extension Dialing, you can assign an
alternate attendant to handle returning DXD calls that are busy, misdialed, or
unanswered. All other calls are directed to the main attendant. For more
information, see “Alternate Attendant” in Section 5, “Reference.”
Under “Voice Terminals” . . .
Next to intercom numbers that areas yet unassigned, write in the names and
work locations of the people to be assigned voice terminals.
If assigning an alternate attendant to handle returning Direct Extension
Dialing calls, write “Alt. Attendant” and the name of the person next to the
appropriate intercom number.
Paging Groups
The MERLIN Plus system lets you page the people in your business through the
speakers on their voice terminals. You don’t need an external paging system for
this feature.
System Configuration Form
2-7
The system automatically assigns all voice terminals to a single paging group,
called the Page-All Group. You can’t change the makeup of the Page-All Group.
(See the “Group Page” entry in Section 5, “Reference,” for more information on
the Page-All feature.) The system also assigns intercoms 10 through 19 to
Paging Group 1 and intercoms 20 through 29 to Paging Group 2. You can keep
these groups as they are or you can change the makeup of Paging Groups 1 and
2 during system administration to fit the needs of your business.
You can assign as few or as many voice terminals as you want to Groups 1 and 2.
You can also assign the same voice terminal to both groups.
Under “Paging Groups” . . .
Check the appropriate column(s) next to the intercom number, name, and
location of each person to indicate the Paging Group(s) you plan to assign the
person to.
Templates
There are four voice terminal templates designed to make administration of
voice terminal features easier. The four templates are the Clear Template, Dialer
Template, Feature Template, and the Receptionist/Secretary Template.
The Clear Template is used to erase previous voice terminal features so that new
features can be assigned. The Dialer Template is for personnel who do not
require special phone features and aren’t likely to need to make toll calls. The
Feature Template is for managers and owners who need unrestricted phone use
along with special additional features. The Receptionist/Secretary Template is
for receptionists, secretaries, and backup call handlers who process several calls.
See “Voice Terminal Templates” in Section 5, “Reference” for more details.
Under “Template” on the “Voice Terminal” form . . .
Write a “1” if you want to assign the Clear Template to a voice terminal and
erase any features currently assigned to that voice terminal.
Write a “2” if you want to assign the Dialer Template to a voice terminal.
Write a “3” if you want to assign the Feature Template to a voice terminal.
Write a “4” if you want to assign the Secretary/Receptionist Template to a
voice terminal.
PROGRAM MODE LOCK
The Program Mode Lock feature allows you to lock specified voice terminals so
that individuals cannot change the features assigned to their voice terminals.
Under “Lock” on the “Voice Terminals” form . . .
Put a check mark next to each voice terminal you want to assign Program
Mode Lock.
You should now have a completed System Configuration Form.
2-8 System Configuration Form
Line Assignments Form
NAME AND INTERCOM
NUMBER
You can use the information already entered on your System Configuration Form
to complete this part of the Line Assignments Form.
In the “Name” column on the form . . .
Write the names of the people in your business next to their intercom
numbers.
LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR
VOICE TERMINALS
When your system is first installed all your outside telephone lines appear on the
same buttons on every voice terminal in the system. These are the voice
terminals’ original line assignments. Figure 2-1 shows the original line
assignments for 5-, 10-, 22-, and 34-button voice terminals. A voice terminal
retains its original line assignments until someone administer it differently.
Line Assignments Form
2-9
FIGURE 2-1 Original Line Assignments.
34-Button
22-Button
10-Button
5-Button
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line D
Line C
Line B
Line A
Intercom
Conference
Drop
2-10
Line Assignments Form
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line H
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line G
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line F
Line E
Transfer
Hold
MERLIN Plus system line administration offers you these options:
●
Customize the line assignments on some or all of your voice terminals.
●
Keep the original line assignments on some or all of your voice terminals.
The following paragraphs offer guidelines for choosing a line assignment option
for each voice terminal and recording your choices on the form.
Guidelines for Choosing Line Assignment Options
As you decide whether to keep the original line assignments or customize the
line assignments on one or more voice terminal, review your business calling
patterns and each person’s telephoning responsibilities. You may find that by
customizing line assignments, you can help control costs and increase the
efficiency of your communications system.
Let’s say, for example, that you are the MERLIN Plus system administrator for a
branch office of a large company. Your system has six outside telephone lines:
●
Lines A, B, and C are local, general purpose lines with your office’s
published telephone numbers. They’re listed first, second, and third
respectively in directories and advertisements.
●
Line D is a WATS line to the distant area where most of your company’s
suppliers are located.
●
Line E is a foreign exchange (FX) line to the distant city where the
company’s headquarters are located.
●
Line F is a general purpose line with an unpublished telephone number that
the branch manager wants as a personal line.
Figure 2-1 shows how these lines appear on all voice terminals before you
customize line assignments.
Now let’s consider the following facts about the calling requirements of three
people in the office: the buyer, the branch manager, and the clerk.
●
●
●
Most of the buyer’s outgoing calls are to suppliers in the area served by the
WATS line and to the purchasing and accounting departments at company
headquarters. The buyer receives relatively few incoming calls, but they are
usually important.
The branch manager calls company headquarters often and wants a personal
line for other calls.
The clerk handles most of the incoming calls from customers and prospective
customers, and has no need to call suppliers or the headquarters offices.
Line Assignments Form
2-11
Figure 2-2 shows how you might customize the line assignments on the buyer’s,
the manager’s, and the clerk’s voice terminals to best meet their individual needs
and responsibilities.
FIGURE 2-2 Customized Line Assignments.
❑
❑
Line B
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line C
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line C
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line B
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line A
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Intercom
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line E
Line D
❑
❑
Intercom
❑
❑
Conference
Transfer
Conference
Transfer
Drop
Hold
Hold
Hold
CLERK
BUYER
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line A = Primary listed telephone number
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line C = Third listed telephone number
Line E = FX line
❑
❑
Line E
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line F
❑
❑
❑
❑
Intercom
❑
❑
Line D = WATS line
Line F = Manager’s personal line
Transfer
Conference
Hold
Drop
MANAGER
2-12 Line Assignments Form
Line B = Second listed telephone number
Original Line Assignments
You can keep the original line assignments on the voice terminals of those
people who need access to every outside line in the system.
In the “Line” columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number . . .
On the top row work 1 under Line A, 2 under Line B, and soon for as many
lines as you have in your system.
Customized Line Assignments
After you’ve reviewed the responsibilities of the people in your business, you can
determine who needs customized line assignments.
In the “Line” columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number. . .
On the top row write a “1” for the line you want to appear on the first button,
a “2” for the line to appear on the second button, and so on up to eight.
RINGING OPTIONS
For each line that is assigned to a voice terminal, you can select one of three
ringing options:
Immediate Ring
People who have primary responsibility for answering calls or handling a
particular line should have that line administered for immediate ring.
Delayed Ring
People who are providing secondary coverage for a line should have that line
assigned for delayed ring so that the line rings only after ringing first at the
person’s voice terminal who has primary responsibility for that line.
No Ring
In places like office lobbies, conference rooms, and public places, the no ring
option may be appropriate.
In the “Line” columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number. . .
In the bottom row for every line that is being assigned to a voice terminal,
write an “I” if the line should ring immediately, a “D” if it should ring only
after ringing at another voice terminal first, or an “N” if the line should not
ring at this voice terminal.
Line Assignments Form
2-13
BUTTON-FREE LINE
OPERATION
You can use this option to assign outside lines to a voice terminal without
assigning them to specific line buttons. This feature is useful for 5-Button and
10-Button voice terminals so that buttons are available for programmable
features. You can also select either the immediate ring or no ring option with
Button-Free Line Operation.
Immediate Ring
Those people with primary responsibility for answering calls coming in on a
shared line should have that line administered for immediate ring.
No Ring
For voice terminals located in public places, such as lobbies and conference
rooms, so they do not ring for outside calls.
In the bottom row for ringing options of each appropriate intercom number. . .
Circle the “I” or “N” if the line will be Button-Free, assigned to the voice
terminal but not to a specific line button.
AUTOMATIC LINE
SELECTION SEQUENCE
When you touch Speakerphone or lift the voice terminal handset to make an
outside call, the system automatically scans the outside telephone lines in the
order in which they appear on your voice terminal’s line buttons until it finds a
free line for your call. For example, if your voice terminal has the original line
assignments, the system gives you Line A, if it’s free, when you touch
Speakerphone or lift the handset. If Line A is busy, the system tries Line B,
and so on in alphabetical order until it finds a free line for your call. Likewise, if
your voice terminal has customized line assignments, the system will search for
a free line following the customized sequence.
In most cases, you probably want a voice terminal’s automatic line selection
sequence to be the same as the sequence in which the lines appear on the voice
terminal’s line buttons. If, however, you want a special automatic line selection
sequence for a voice terminal, you can program that sequence when you
administer the system’s outside lines.
NOTE:
LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR
ASA FEATURES
A special automatic line selection sequence for a voice terminal can
contain any or all of the lines that appear on the voice terminal’s
line buttons.
Four ASA features require the assignment of at least one incoming line on which
you want to use the feature. These features are: Call Forwarding (CF), Direct
Extension Dialing (DXD), Remote Line Access (RLA), and System Answer
(SA). Call Forwarding also requires the assignment of at least one outgoing line.
Call Forwarding (CF)
This ASA feature connects incoming calls on assigned lines to the Voice
Synthesis Processor (VSP) so that callers hear a prerecorded message before
calls are forwarded to the designated number. The CF feature requires the
assignment of at least one incoming line and one outgoing line. They cannot be
the same line.
2-14 Line Assignments Form
In the “CF’ row under the “Line Assignments for ASA Features” . . .
Write an “I” in the column of the line(s) where incoming calls are being
forwarded.
Write an “O” in the column of the line where you want to send the outgoing
forwarded calls.
The system is factory set to answer CF calls after two rings. You can change the
number of rings from 0 to 9. If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal
will not ring, and calls will be forwarded immediately.
Under “Ring Interval” in the “CF” row . . .
Write the number of rings (0-9) before incoming calls will be answered by the
VSP and forwarded.
When in CF mode, callers hear the message:
“Your call is being forwarded. Please hold.”
You can modify this message to include the incoming phone number:
“You have reached [number]. Your call is being forwarded.
Please hold.”
You can modify the message for all incoming CF lines or just for some of the
incoming CF lines. You can also turn off the message so that calls are forwarded
immediately without notifying the caller.
Under “Modify Message” in the row for “CF” . . .
Write the incoming phone number if you want it added to the VSP message,
or write a “0” if you want to turn off the VSP message.
Direct Extension Dialing (DXD)
This ASA feature allows incoming callers using Touch-Tone phones to direct
their calls to specific extensions. Direct Extension Dialing can be assigned to
one or more lines so that incoming calls are answered by the Voice Synthesis
Processor (VSP) which prompts callers to dial the desired extension number.
In the “DXD” row under “Line Assignments for ASA Features” . . .
Write an “I” in the column of the line(s) where incoming calls are being
directed to specific extensions.
The system is factory set to answer DXD calls after two rings. You can change
the number of rings from 0 to 9. If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice
terminal will not ring, and calls are answered immediately by the VSP.
Line Assignments Form
2-15
Under “Ring Intend” in the “DXD” row . . .
Write the number of rings (0-9) before DXD calls are answered.
Callers on DXD incoming lines are prompted with the following message:
“Please dial desired extension number.”
Once the caller dials the two-digit extension number (which is the two-digit
intercom number), the call is transferred to the extension and the caller hears the
following message:
“Please hold.”
You can also modify the voice message so that callers first hear the number
they’ve reached, followed by the request for the extension number
“You have reached [number]. Please dial desired extension
number.”
Under “Modify Message” in the “DXD” row . . .
Write in the incoming phone number if you want it added to the VSP
message.
Remote Line Access (RLA)
This ASA feature allows you to call in from outside and use a password to gain
access to one of the system’s outside lines. Remote Line Access can also be
used from a remote location to change the call forwarding number. This feature
requires the assignment of at least one incoming line.
In the “RLA” row under “Line Assignments for ASA Features” . . .
Write an “I” in the column of the line(s) where incoming lines can be
used for RLA.
The system is factory set to answer RLA calls after two rings. You can change
the number of rings from 0 to 9. If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice
terminal will not ring, and calls are answered immediately by the VSP.
Under “Ring Interval” in the “RLA” row . . .
Write the number of rings (0-9) before RLA calls are answered.
2-16 Line Assignments Form
System Answer (SA)
System Answer can be used as an automated attendant to answer a call and
provide a brief message before placing the caller on hold until someone is
available to take the call. System Answer can have up to eight incoming lines
assigned to it.
In the “SA” row under “Line Assignments for ASA Features” . . .
Write an “I” in the column of the line(s) where incoming calls are being
answered and placed on hold by System Answer.
The system is factory set to answer SA calls after two rings. You can change the
number of rings from 0 to 9. If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal
will not ring, and calls will be forwarded immediately.
Under “Ring Interval” in the “SA” row on the “Line Assignments for ASA
Features” form . . .
Write the number of rings (0-9) before CF calls are answered.
You can select one of four ways to have incoming SA calls answered. You can
choose the default voice message, a shortened version of it, or a longer version
of it. The default message says:
“Please hold. Your call will be handled momentarily.”
The shorter message says:
“Please hold.”
The longer message says:
“You have reached [number]. Please hold. Your call will be handled momentarily.”
You can also elect to have no voice message so that incoming SA calls are
immediately placed on hold.
Under “Modify Message” in the “SA” row . . .
Write a “0” if you do not want the voice message.
Write a “1” if you want the message just to say, “Please hold.”
Write a “2” if you want the message to say, “Please hold. Your call will be
handled momentarily.”
Write the incoming phone number if you want the longer message preceded
with the phrase, “You have reached [number].”
You should now have a completed Line Assignments Form. Keep it in a place
where you can find it when you want to administer the system or program
individual voice terminals.
Line Assignments Form
2-17
Call Restrictions Forms
You can use call restrictions to prevent some or all voice terminals from making
outside calls (both local and long distance). You can also use the Disallowed List
to prevent some or all voice terminals from making billable calls to 900 numbers,
the 976 exchange, or other numbers as desired.
NOTE:
System Speed Dial with Restriction Override, which can be used as a
password to access an otherwise restricted number, takes precedence
over Disallowed List. Disallowed List takes precedence over
everything else.
You can use Allowed Lists of numbers and/or specia1 Speed Dial codes to permit
call restricted voice terminals to call specified telephone numbers, local
exchanges, or area codes. By combining call restrictions with selected
exceptions, you can control your outgoing call traffic and associated costs
without placing unreasonable constraints on the people in your business.
(Disallowed List, Allowed Lists, and System Speed Dial codes are explained in
detail in this section of the manual.)
NOTE:
DISALLOWED LIST
Call restrictions do not affect a voice terminal’s ability to receive
incoming calls nor to make intercom calls.
When you assign a Disallowed List of numbers to a voice terminal, the person
trying to dial a number on this list will not be able to place the call.
The system can store up to 20 disallowed numbers with up to 16 digits for a
given number. You can also use “wild card” digits to prevent calls to certain
exchanges within any area code, or similar combinations. Here are some
examples of how to use wild card digits:
●
Disallowing calls to the 976 exchange in any area code:
1Hold 976 or 0Hold 976 where the wild card digits are entered by pressing
Hold three times.
●
Disallowing calls to any area code:
1Hold or 0Hold where the wild card digits are entered by pressing Hold
three times.
For many restrictions, you don’t have to use wild card digits. Here are some
examples:
●
Disallowing calls to any 976 number in the 201 area code:
1201976
●
Disallowing calls to the 201 area code:
1201
●
Disallowing calls to a specific number in the 201 area code; 555-9876 for
example:
12015559876.
●
Disallowing local calls to a specific number such as 555-5432:
555-5432
2-18 Call Restrictions Forms
Creating the Disallowed List
Once you’ve decided how many billable numbes you want to disallow, you
write each entry next to a separate item (labeled 01 through 20) on the
Disallowed List Entry Form located at the beginning of the Call Restrictions
Form.
On the “Disallowed List Entry Form— List 09” . . .
Write billable numbers, area codes, etc., in the “Number” column to create
your Disallowed List.
Assigning the Disallowed List
Now that you have created your Disallowed List, you should decide to which
voice terminals it is to be assigned when you administer the system. Enter this
information on the of the Call Restrictions Assignment Form.
In the “Disallowed Lists” column of the Call Restrictions Assignment
Form . . .
Put a check mark next to the intercom number of each voice terminal to
which the list is to be assigned when you administer the system.
UNRESTRICTED
When your system is first installed, all voice terminals are unrestricted, that is,
there are no limitations on outgoing call traffic including long distance and local
toll calls.
In the “Unrestricted” column on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form . . .
Put a check mark for each voice terminal that will not have either outward or
toll restrictions.
TOLL RESTRICTED
Some people in your business may need to be able to call any local telephone
number but have little need to make long distance calls. You can place a toll
call restriction on their voice terminals. The system will allow local calls from
those voice terminals but will ignore attempts to dial long distance numbers.
Then, if there are certain areas of the country these people have to call on
business, you can set up an Allowed List of those long distance area codes and
assign the list to the toll restricted voice terminals when you administer the
system. You can also mark selected long distance telephone numbers for
Restriction Override and store them under Speed Dial codes in the system’s
memory. Then anyone in your system, including those with toll restricted voice
terminals, can use the Speed Dial codes to dial those long distance numbers.
Under “Toll Restricted” on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form . . .
Put a check mark next to the intercom number of each voice terminal that will
be restricted from making long distance calls.
Call Restrictions Forms
2-19
Some people in your business may have little need to make any outside calls,
either local or long distance. During system administration you can place an
outward call restriction on their voice terminals, and the system will ignore
attempts to dial outside telephone numbers from those voice terminals. Then if
you want these people to be able to make local calls in business or personal
emergencies, you can assign them an Allowed List of local exchanges and,
perhaps, emergency numbers such as 911 when you assign the call restrictions.
OUTWARD RESTRICTED
You can also use System Speed Dial codes (called passwords in some telephone
systems) with Restriction Override to allow restricted voice terminals to call
selected local or long distance telephone numbers. You simply mark the
numbers for Restriction Override and store them in the system’s memory under
Speed Dial codes when you administer the system. Then anyone in your system,
including those with restricted voice terminals, can use the Speed Dial codes to
call the stored numbers.
On the Call Restrictions Assignment Form . . .
Put a check mark in the “Outward Restricted” column next to the intercom
numbers for the voice terminals you want to place outward restrictions on
when you administer the system.
ALLOWED LISTS
When you assign an Allowed List of numbers to a voice terminal, the person
using the voice terminal can call the numbers on the list regardless of any call
restriction placed on the voice terminal.
The system can store up to eight Allowed Lists of numbers with up to 10 entries
in each list. Each entry can have up to eight digits. You might, therefore, want
to create one or more Allowed Lists with entries such as the following:
●
Local exchange codes
A local exchange code is the first three digits in a 7-digit telephone number.
●
Long distance area codes
●
Area codes plus local exchange codes
●
Emergency numbers with eight or fewer digits
For example, 911 is a multipurpose emergency number in many areas.
2-20 Call Restrictions Forms
Naming Allowed Lists
Once you’ve decided how many Allowed Lists you want and what numbers
should be included in each, you may want to identify each list by name
(for example, “New England Customers” or “Local Emergency Numbers”) in
addition to the numbers that already appear on the form (List 01, List 02, etc.).
On the “Allowed Lists Entry Form” . . .
Write the name, if any, that you want to use to identify each list on the line
next to the list’s code number (List 01, List 02, List 03, etc.)
Creating Allowed Lists
Under “Number” on the appropriate “Allowed Lists Entry Form” . . .
Write area codes, local exchange codes, emergency or other telephone
numbers, on the lines next to the “Item” numbers.
Assigning Allowed Lists
Now that you’ve created some Allowed Lists, you should decide how you want
to assign them to restricted voice terminals when you administer the system.
You’ll need to refer to the “Call Restrictions Assignment Form”.
Under “Allowed Lists Assigned” on the Call Restrictions Assignment
Form . . .
Put a check mark in the appropriate box representing the allowed lists that
you want to assign to each voice terminal when you administer the system.
Keep your completed Call Restrictions Forms in a place where you can find it
easily for system administration.
Call Restrictions Flow Chart
The following flowchart shows how the MERLIN Plus system processes
outgoing calls. For example, if a call is dialed manually or with Personal Speed
Dial, the system first checks to see if the voice terminal is toll or outward call
restricted. If the voice terminal is unrestricted, the number dialed is checked
against the Disallowed List. If the number is not on the Disallowed List,
the call goes through.
Call Restrictions Forms
2-21
FIGURE 2-3 MERLIN Plus System Processing Flowchart.
Number dialed:
System Speed Dial number
Personal Speed Dial number
Manually dialed number
Does
voice terminal
have Restriction
Override?
Yes
No
Is
number outward or
toll restricted?
Yes
No
No
Is
number on the Disallowed
List?
No
Number dialed
2-22 Call Restrictions Forms
Is
number on an Allowed
List?
Yes
Number will not go through
Yes
System Speed Dial Forms
You can assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently called telephone
numbers. Then, people in your business can call any of these telephone numbers
by dialing its 3- or 4-character System Speed Dial code. You can also assign
these codes to account numbers that you want printed on Call Reports if your
system has the Call Report (also referred to as the Station Message Detail
Recording [SMDR]) feature. People can then dial an account’s code during a
call to add the account number to the information on the Call Report.
You can store up to 130 telephone and/or account numbers under System Speed
Dial codes. The available codes are #60 through #89 and #900 through #999.
Each stored number can have up to 16 characters, including any of the following
special characters:
●
P for pause
●
R for a switchhook flash (Recall)
●
S for stop
●
T for Touch-Tone enable
See the “Special Characters in Dialing Sequences” entry in Section 5,
“Reference,” to find out how to use these special characters.
PRIVATE
You can identify private numbers that you do not want to appear on displays or
print on Call Reports by entering a * before the number on the System Speed
Dial Form. Then, voice terminal displays and Call Report printouts will show the
System Speed Dial code instead of the number.
In the “Private” column on the System Speed Dial form . .
Put a star (*) in front of those numbers you want to mark for privacy when
you administer the system. When you enter a star (*), before the telephone
number, the number will not appear on displays or print on Call Reports.
See “System Speed Dial” in Section 5 “Reference” for more information on
Call Reports.
System Speed Dial Forms
2-23
NUMBER AND
IDENTIFICATION
In the “Number” column on the System Speed Dial form . . .
Write the telephone numbers or account numbers you want to encode on the
line containing the dial codes (#60, #61, #62, etc.) of your choice. Put a check
mark in the telephone column if the number is a telephone number or put a
check mark in the account column if the number is an account number.
NOTE:
Do not assign the same System Speed Dial code to both a telephone
number and an account number.
To prevent confusion when entering both account numbers and telephone
numbers, reserve codes #60 through #89 for telephone numbers and #900
through #949 for account numbers or vice versa. Also, it may be helpful to
use the last four digits of a firm’s telephone number to create an account
number, so the account number can be easily identified.
In the “Name” column. . .
Write the name of the person or organization to identify each number.
RESTRICTION OVERRIDE
When you encode the telephone numbers during system administration, you can
mark some or all of them for Restriction Override. Then people with restricted
voice terminals or voice terminals that have been assigned a Disallowed List can
call these marked numbers by dialing the System Speed Dial codes.
In the “Restriction Override” column . . .
Put a check mark on the line for each telephone number you want to mark for
Restriction Override when you administer the system.
You should now have a complete set of planning forms. Keep them together in a
safe place until you are ready to install and administer your system.
2-24 System Speed Dial Forms
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
The following forms are shown in this section:
●
System
Configuration
●
Line
Assignments
●
Call
Restrictions
●
System Speed Dial
Please make copies of these forms for use with your system.
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-25
2-26 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
System Configuration Form
Required Settings:
Dial Signals
❑ Touch-Tone
❑ Rotary (Pulse)
Long Distance Dialing
Toll Prefix
❑ Area Code Only
Transfer Return Interval
No Return
Rings
❑
Music-on-Hold
Low Volume
Medium Volume
❑ High Volume
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Optional Settings:
Call Report
Outgoing Calls Only
Incoming and Outgoing
Calls
Minimum Duration for
Recorded Calls
❑
❑
Background Music
Low Volume
Medium Volume
High Volume
❑
❑
Outside Telephone Lines
Control Unit
Jack/Line
Telephone Number
Hold Disconnect
Interval
Long
Short
Line Type
(Local, WATS, FX, etc.)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
(continued)
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-27
Voice Terminals
Intercom
Number
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Name
(Attendant)
(ASA)
(BB & Reports)
2-28 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
Location
Paging Groups
2
1
Template
Lock
Line Assignments Form
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
Name
Icom
No.
Line A
Ring
Line B
Ring
Line C
Ring
Line D
Ring
Line E
Ring
Line F
Ring
Line G
Ring
Line H
Ring
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
I=Immediate Ring; D=Delayed Ring; N=No Ring; Circled=Button-Free
(continued)
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-29
Line Assignments for ASA Features
ASA
Feature
Line
A
Line
B
Line
C
Line
D
Line
E
Line
F
Line
G
Line
H
Ring
Interval
Modify
Message
CF
DXD
RLA
SA
CF=Call Forwarding; DXD=Direct Extension Dialing; RLA=Remote Line Access; SA=System Answer
2-30
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
Call Restrictions Form
Disallowed List Entry Form
List 09
Item
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Allowed Lists Entry Form
List 01
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
List 02
Number
Item
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
(continued)
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-31
List 04
List 03
Number
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
List 06
List 05
Item
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Number
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
List 07
Item
Number
Item
List 08
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Item
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
(continued)
2-32 MERLIN PIus System Planning Form
Call Restrictions Assignment Form
Toll
Outward
Intercom Disallowed
List
Unrestricted Restricted Restricted
Number
01
02
Allowed Lists Assigned
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-33
2-34 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
System Speed Dial Form
Dial
Code
(Check one)
Private
Number
Telephone
Account
Name
Restriction
Override
#60
#61
#62
#63
#64
#65
#66
#67
#68
#69
#70
#71
#72
#73
#74
#75
#76
#77
#78
#79
#80
#81
#82
#83
#84
#85
#86
#87
#88
#89
#900
#901
#902
#903
#904
#905
#906
#907
#908
#909
(continued)
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-35
Dial
Code
(Check one)
Private
Number
Telephone
Account
Name
Restriction
Override
#910
#911
#912
#913
#914
#915
#916
#917
#918
#919
#920
#921
#922
#923
#924
#925
#926
#927
#928
#929
#930
#931
#932
#933
#934
#935
#936
#937
#938
#939
#940
#941
#942
#943
#944
#945
#946
#947
#948
#949
(continued)
2-36 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
Dial
Code
(Check one)
Private
Number
Telephone
Account
Name
Restriction
Override
#950
#951
#952
#953
#954
#955
#956
#957
#958
#959
#960
#961
#962
#963
#964
##65
#966
#967
#968
#969
#970
#971
#972
#973
#974
#975
#976
#977
#978
#979
#980
#981
#982
#983
#984
#985
#986
#987
#988
#989
(continued)
MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
2-37
1
Dial
Code
(Check one)
Private
Number
#990
#991
#992
#993
#994
#995
#996
#997
#998
#999
2-38 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms
Telephone
Account
Name
Restriction
Override
Section 3: Administering the System
Introduction
You can begin using your MERLIN Plus Communications System right now.
Just make sure the system is set to generate the right dial signals for your outside
telephone lines and to recognize the long distance dialing procedure for your
area. To make these simple checks, see “Dial Signals” and “Long Distance
Dialing” under “Basic Administration” later in this section.
To take full advantage of your system’s advanced features you should plan to
customize it to fit the needs of your business. However, you do not need to
customize it all at once. Look through this section for options and features that
best suit the way your business operates, and make the most important settings
first. You can always change these or add others later.
Before you begin to customize your system, you should understand the meaning
of the terms “administer” and “program” as they are used in this manual:
●
●
INITIAL ADMINISTRATION
ONGOING
ADMINISTRATION
Administer means to establish options and features that have systemwide
impact, such as assigning the outside lines that each voice terminal can
access or defining System Speed Dial codes for everyone to use.
Program means to assign features to an individual voice terminal.
Most people will probably program their own voice terminals. But you may
want to program certain features that can affect the calling patterns of your
business.
Although an AT&T technician may perform the initial administration of your
system, you can assist with the setup by familiarizing yourself with the
time-saving instructions located under the following headings:
●
Administration Preview
●
Basic Administration
●
Customized Line Assignments
●
Systemwide Options
Use the “Quick Reference Guide to System Administration” and the
“Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes” at the end of this section to
make changes to the system once it has been setup and administered. If you
need more information on an administration procedure than is provided in the
Quick Reference Guides, see Section 5, “Reference.”
Introduction
3-1
Administration Preview
The information about your system recorded on the planning forms listed below
is important to both initial and ongoing system administration.
PLANNING FORMS
●
System Configuration Form
●
Line Assignments Form
●
Call Restrictions Forms
●
System Speed Dial Form
If you haven’t filled out any planning forms yet, you should do so now. It won’t
take long, and it will save you time later. Section 2, “Planning the System,”
contains copies of the forms and instructions for completing them. When you’ve
completed the forms, go on to “Key System Components.”
Read the following to get acquainted with the system’s control unit and the
administrator/attendant console.
KEY SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
Control Unit
The control unit is the vital core of the system. It provides the power and
intelligence for all voice terminals, and it directs all incoming and outgoing call
traffic. All the system’s memory, including systemwide administration and voice
terminal programming, resides in the control unit. Figure 3-1 shows the control
unit with the front cover removed.
FIGURE 3-1 MERLIN Plus system Control Unit.
Top cover
removed
Busy Buster jack
Power light
Warning light
Automatic
System
Access jack
MOH jack
Paging jack
Top
cover
Power and
warning
lights
Control
unit
label
Line
module
Station
module
On/Off
switch
3-2 Administration Preview
Administrator/Attendant Console
A BIS-34 voice terminal or a BIS-34D voice terminal with display, both of
which have lights for every outside line and voice terminal button, are ideal
administrator/attendant consoles for MERLIN Plus systems with more than
10 voice terminals. Figure 3-2 shows a BIS-34D with display used as a console.
The line buttons above the dial pad and the Auto Intercom buttons to the right of
the dial pad give you one-touch access to each line and voice terminal. The
lights allow you to keep track of administration procedures as well as changes in
the status of the voice terminals and the outside lines during normal call
handling.
A BIS-22 voice terminal or a BIS-22D voice terminal is a good selection for an
administrator/attendant console if you have 10 voice terminals or less. When
using a BIS-22 voice terminal with more than 10 voice terminals on the system,
some features require that you enter the intercom numbers of the voice terminals
that do not have Auto Intercom buttons at the console. Also the following
features are administered using a dial code (see “The BIS-22 Voice Terminal as
an Administrator Console” in this section) instead of an intercom number:
●
●
Change the makeup of paging groups
(See the “Group Page” entry in Section 5, “Reference,” for details.)
Assign Disallowed List systemwide or to selected voice terminals
(See the “Disallowed Lists” entry in Section 5, “Reference,” for details.)
●
Assign Allowed Lists to restricted phones
(See the “Allowed Lists” entry in Section 5, “Reference,” for details.)
●
Lock voice terminals so that individuals cannot reprogram them.
(See the “Program Mode Lock” entry in Section 5, “Reference,” for details.)
The position of the T/P switch on the left side of the administrator/attendant
console depends on the task you are performing. There are three positions and
four functions as follows:
Position
Function
T (up)
Tests lights and ringing
Center
Normal call-handling mode
P (down)
Programming mode for the voice terminal
Administration mode for the system after
touching Administer or dialing #49
The functions of some buttons on the administrator/attendant console change as
you switch from one mode to the other. The double entries on some of the button
labels shown in Figures 3-2 and 3-3 indicate these changes in function. The
button’s function in the normal call-handling mode is shown above the line on
the label, and its function in administration mode is shown below the line.
Administration Preview
3-3
.
FIGURE 3-2 BIS-34D with Display as Administrator/Attendant Console.
Display
buttons
AT&T
Display
contrast
control
Display
BIS-34D
Call
appearance
buttons
Test/Program
switch
Feature
buttons
Dial
pad
Ringer
volume
control
Speakerphone
volume control
3-4 Administration Preview
Message light
Speakerphone light
HFAI light
Microphone light
FIGURE 3-3 BIS-22 as Administrator/Attendant Console.
Call Appearance/
Feature buttons
AT&T
BIS-22
Test/Program
switch
Dial
pad
Ringer Volume
control
Speakerphone
volume control
Message light
Speakerphone light
HFAI light
Microphone light
Administration Preview
3-5
THE BIS-34, BIS-34D, OR
34-BUTTON DELUXE
VOICE TERMINAL USED
AS AN ADMINISTRATOR
CONSOLE
If you are using a BIS-34, BIS-34D, or 34-Button deluxe voice terminal as the
administrator/attendant console, you have the ideal arrangement for your
MERLIN Plus system. You can administer all the features, including
Disallowed and Allowed Lists, Busy Buster, and Group Page, for all the voice
terminals on your system by using the Auto Intercom buttons (intercom numbers
10 through 29.) The lights next to each button indicate the status of the voice
terminal as you administer each feature. The administrator console is
automatically assigned the following features when you initially set up your
MERLIN Plus system:
●
●
●
●
THE BIS-22 OR BIS-22D
VOICE TERMINAL USED
AS AN ADMINISTRATOR
CONSOLE
Lines are assigned to 4 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit
has one line module.
Lines are assigned to 8 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit
has two line modules.
Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 10 through 19 are assigned to
the top 10 buttons in the first-column of buttons to the right of the dial pad.
Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 20 through 29 are assigned to
the top 10 buttons in the second column of buttons to the right of the dial pad.
If you are using a BIS-22 or BIS-22D voice terminal as the
administrator/attendant console, the voice terminal is automatically y assigned the
following features when you initially set up the MERLIN Plus system:
●
Lines are assigned to 4 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit
has one line module.
●
Lines are assigned to 8 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit
has two line modules.
●
Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 10 through 19 are assigned to
the top 10 buttons in the column of buttons to the right of the dial pad.
●
If your system has more than 10 voice terminals (intercom numbers
20 through 29), you will not have buttons at the console for these voice
terminals. Therefore, when you administer Group Page, Program Mode
Lock, or program the Allowed and Disallowed Lists, you need to dial a code
from the Dial Code Chart that corresponds with the voice terminal. When
using the dial codes, you do not touch an Auto Intercom button.
Dial codes are not the same as intercom numbers.
Dial Code Chart
If the Intercom
number k:
3-6 Administration Preview
Dial this
code:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this
code:
Intercom 20
#03
Intercom 25
#08
Intercom 21
#04
Intercom 26
#09
Intercom 22
#05
Intercom 27
#10
Intercom 23
#06
Intercom 28
#11
Intercom 24
#07
Intercom 29
#12
For example, if you want to assign voice terminal 21 to a Group Page group or
add the voice terminal to an Allowed List, use the dial code, #04, that
corresponds with intercom number 21.
NOTE:
THE BIS-10 VOICE
TERMINAL USED AS AN
ADMINISTRATOR
CONSOLE
ADMINISTRATION MODE
It is important that you record your decisions about Allowed and
Disallowed Lists on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form; record
decisions about your Call Report and/or System Feature Report jack
assignment and Group Page on the System Configuration Form.
Keep these forms handy in case you decide to make changes.
The BIS-10 voice terminal is not recommended to be used as the
administrator/attendant console because the administrator cannot see the buttons
being administered. Furthemore, some features cannot be programmed from
this voice terminal. However, if you are using a BIS-10 voice terminal as an
administrator/attendant console to perform the administration procedures for
many of the special features, follow the instructions provided for the BIS-22
voice terminal, which generally require that you enter the dial codes
(see chart below) directly without touching an Auto Intercom button.
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
Intercom 10
#22
Intercom 20
#03
Intercom 11
#21
intercom 21
#04
Intercom 12
#20
Intercom 22
#05
Intercom 13
#19
Intercom 23
#06
Intercom 14
#18
Intercom 24
#07
Intercom 15
#17
Intercom 25
#08
Intercom 16
#16
Intercom 26
#09
Intercom 17
#15
Intercom 27
#l0
Intercom 18
#14
Intercom 28
#11
Intercom 19
#13
Intercom 29
#12
The information under the next three headings tells you how to do the following:
●
Make button label sheets for the administrator/attendant console
●
Enter administration mode
●
Leave administration mode
Labeling Buttons
The button label sheets on your administrator/attendant console have to show
how the functions of certain buttons change when you shift from the normal
call-handling mode to the administration mode. Figure 3-2 shows you what the
button labels should look like for a BIS-34D voice terminal with Display. Figure
3-3 shows the button labels for a BIS-22 voice terminal.
Administration Preview
3-7
To make button labels for the voice terminal you plan to use as your
administrator/attendant console, do the following:
1
Remove the blank button labels from the voice terminal according to the
instructions that came with the voice terminal.
2
Fill in the button labels with pencil or ballpoint pen since either can be erased
if you make changes later.
>
For any BIS-34 and 34-button voice terminals, follow the button labeling
shown in Figure 3-2.
>
For any BIS-22 voice terminal, follow the button labeling shown in
Figure 3-3.
On the button labels divided by a horizontal line, the term above the
line identifies the button’s function when the console is in the
normal call-handling mode. The term below the line identifies the
button’s function in administration mode.
NOTE:
Reinsert the labels following the instructions that came with the
voice terminal.
3
Entering Administration Mode
You have to enter administration mode to set up the system initially and any time
you use the attendant console to administer the system. Follow the boxed
instructions below whenever you have to enter administration mode.
Entering Administration Mode
To enter administration mode:
1
Slide the T/P switch on the left side of the console to P (down).
The green lights next to the line buttons begin flashing.
The console rings every 5 seconds to remind you that it’s in programming mode.
2
Touch Administer, or dial #49.
The green lights go off.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
T
P
Administer
3-8 Administration Preview
Leaving Administration Mode
Follow the boxed instructions below when you’ve finished an administration
session.
Leaving Administration Mode
To leave administration mode:
1
Slide the T/P switch on the left side of the console to the center position.
The red light goes off next to Administer and Restrict.
The red light goes on next to a line button.
T
CONFIRMATION AND
ERROR SIGNALS
P
Many of the administration and programming procedures described in this
manual require you to enter a star code (that is, dial * plus one or more digits).
Many procedures also require you to enter intercom numbers or other sequences
of digits.
Confirmation Signal
If you enter a star code that the system recognizes, the console beeps twice when
you touch Administer to conclude the procedure. The two beeps confirm
allowable input.
Error Signal
You will hear only one beep from the attendant console if you make one of the
following errors:
●
You enter an unrecognized star code.
●
You enter a nonexistent intercom number.
●
●
●
You enter one or more digits that are inconsistent with the administration
procedure.
You attempt to administer a voice terminal that is active on a call or in
program mode.
You attempt to assign an alternate attendant position with the System Answer
feature on.
To recover from the error, touch Administer and begin the procedure again.
Administration Preview
3-9
Basic Administration
Basic administration should take no more than a few minutes. All the
information you need should be on the System Configuration Form.
OUTSIDE TELEPHONE
LINES
This simple procedure tells the control unit how many outside telephone lines
your system has. But it works only if your outside lines are plugged into an
unbroken sequence of line jacks on the control unit beginning with line jack A.
The System Configuration Form shows the number of lines you have and the
control unit line jack for each line under the heading “Outside Telephone Lines.”
To set the systemwide line assignments, do the following:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *4 plus the number of outside lines in the system.
(For example, dial *43 for a system with three lines.)
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
GHOST LINES
When you first turn on the system, the control unit thinks there are the same
number of outside lines in the system as there are line jacks on the control unit.
This causes the control unit to create “ghost” lines in a system that has fewer
lines than line jacks. Since ghost lines can interfere with some system features,
you should eliminate them using the procedure described above for designating
the number of lines in the system.
DIAL SIGNALS
Locate the column headed “Dial Signals” on the System Configuration Form.
Is the box next to “Touch-Tone” checked? If so, you don’t have to do anything
here. Your system is factory set to generate Touch-Tones when you dial an
outside call on any of your outside telephone lines.
But if the box next to “Rotary (Pulse)” is checked, you have to set the system to
generate rotary (pulse) signals when you dial outside calls. Set the system for
pulse dialing as follows:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *39.
NOTE:
3
If you ever have to reset the system for Touch-Tone dialing,
dial *38 instead of *39 in step 2.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
3-10 Basic Administration
Continue with administration, or leave administration mode.
LONG DISTANCE DIALING
Locate the column headed “Long Distance Dialing” on the System Configuration
Form. Is the box next to “Toll Prefix” checked? If so, you don’t have to do
anything here. Your system is factory set for this type of long-distance dialing:
toll prefix (1 or 0) + area code + telephone number.
But if the box next to “Area Code Only” has a check, you have to set the system
for this type of long-distance dialing (area code + telephone number) as follows:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *37.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Reversing the Procedure
If you ever have to reset your system to toll-prefix dialing, follow the above
procedure but dial *36 instead of *37 in step 2.
TRANSFER RETURN
INTERVAL
Locate the column headed “Transfer Return Interval” on the System
Configuration Form. If the box next to “___ Rings” is checked and the number 4
is filled in, the system is factory set to return unanswered transferred calls after
four rings. You don’t have to do anything.
But if the “No Rings” box is checked, or the “___ Rings” box is filled in with a
number other than 4, then you have to change the system as follows:
1
Enter administration mode.
2
Dial *2 plus the number of rings (0 through 9) you want before a call returns.
NOTE:
3
For use with answering machines, set the transfer return interval to
six rings or more. If 0 is selected, calls will not be transferred back
to the originator.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode.
Basic Administration
3-11
CALL REPORT
If you have the optional data collector and printer necessary to generate
Call Reports, you can keep records of incoming and outgoing calls. YOU will
first need to set the date using the following procedure:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *80.
3
Dial two digits for the month (01 through 12).
4
Dial two digits for the day (01 through 31).
5
Dial two digits for the year (00 through 99).
6
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
7
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Now set the time:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *81.
3
Dial two digits for the hour (00 through 23) using 24-hour time.
4
Dial two digits for the minute (00 through 59).
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Since the system is factory set to have no calls reported, you must now select the
type of calls you want reported. Locate the column headed “Call Report” on the
System Configuration Form and follow the procedures below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *84.
3
Dial a number code 0 through 2 to specify the kind of calls to be reported:
> If you do not want any calls reported, dial 0.
> If you only want outgoing calls reported, dial 1.
> If you want outgoing and incoming calls reported, dial 2.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Once you’ve selected the type of report, you need to specify the duration of the
calls reported. If you filled in “1” next to “Minimum Duration of Recorded
Calls,” you don’t have to do anything here since the system is set for one minute.
3-12 Basic Administration
If you specified another duration (0, or 2 through 9) follow this procedure:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *83.
3
Dial one digit from 0 to 9 for the number of minutes.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you have an optional audio source and want to control the volume through
system administration, locate the column headed “Music-on-Hold” on the
System Configuration Form, then dial the appropriate code given in the
procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer:
> Dial *12 to turn off Music-on-Hold.
> Dial *13 to set the volume to low.
> Dial *14 to set the volume to medium.
> Dial *15 to set the volume to high.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
BACKGROUND MUSIC
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you have an optional audio source connected to the Music-on-Hold jack and
an optional loudspeaker paging system, you can regulate the volume of
background music with a dial code in system administration. Locate the column
headed “Background Music” on the System Configuration Form, then dial the
appropriate code given in the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer:
> Dial *16 to turn off the background music.
> Dial *17 to set the volume to low.
> Dial *18 to set the volume to medium.
> Dial *19 to set the volume to high.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Basic Administration
3-13
If you placed a check mark in the column marked “Short” under “Hold
Disconnect Interval” on the System Configuration Form, then your local
telephone company uses the 50 millisecond disconnect interval instead of the
450 millisecond interval. If your local telephone company uses a short interval,
you must administer this setting for each incoming line in the system.
HOLD DISCONNECT
INTERVAL
Follow the procedure below to administer a short hold disconnect interval:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *69.
3
Touch each incoming line button to change the disconnect interval.
Green light on = line assigned the long disconnect interval
Green light off = line assigned the short disconnect interval
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
VOICE TERMINAL JACK
ASSIGNMENTS
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Your MERLIN Plus system has twenty jacks for voice terminals and special
features. If you are using the ASA features (CF, DXD, RLA, or SA),
Busy Buster (BB), Call Report, or System Feature Report (Reports), you need to
assign a jack for them. The “Voice Terminal” form indicates the default jack
assignments for these features and the main attendants, if you have changed
these assignments on your form, use the appropriate procedure below to change
the jack assignments accordingly:
NOTE:
You cannot reassign any of the following features to jack 10 since it is
reserved for the main attendant.
Changing the Automatic System Access (ASA) jack assignment:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *59.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to ASA.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
> Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to ASA.
The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button, and the green light goes on
next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button.
> Dial the intercom number of jack you’re assigning to ASA.
NOTE:
4
If you hear a denial tone, the feature is on or the VSP port is
active. You can either wait or turn off the feature.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
3-14 Basic Administration
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Changing the Busy Buster (BB) jack assignment:
NOTE:
1
If you are going to use the Call Report or System Feature Report option,
you can assign BB to the same jack as ASA by using the adapter
provided with the optional data collector or memory module.
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *35.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to BB.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to BB.
The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button, and the green light goes on
next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button.
>
4
Dial the intercom number of jack you’re assigning to BB.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Changing the Reports jack assignment for Call Report:
NOTE:
1
If you are using the same printer and data collector for producing
Call Reports and System Feature Reports, you must administer the new
jack assignment for both features.
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *82.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to Call Report.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign
to Call Report.
The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button, and the green light goes on
next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button.
>
4
Dial the intercom number of jack you’re assigning to Call Report.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Basic Administration
3-15
Changing the Reports jack assignment for System Feature Report:
NOTE:
1
If you are using the same printer and data collector for producing
Call Reports and System Feature Reports, you must administer the new
jack assignment for both features.
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *85.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to System
Feature Report.
3
Perform one of the following procedure:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to System
Feature Report.
The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button, and the green light goes on
next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button.
>
4
Dial the intercom number of jack you’re assigning to
System Feature Report.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Assigning an Alternate Attendant position:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *79.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
4
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you want to assign
as the Alternate Attendant position.
>
Dial the intercom number of voice terminal you’re assigning for the
Alternate Attendant.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
3-16 Basic Administration
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
PAGING GROUPS
When you filled in the “Paging Groups” columns on the System Configuration
Form, you learned the following about paging groups:
●
●
●
●
All voice terminals are automatically assigned to a single paging group,
the Page-All Group, which you cannot change.
Intercoms 10 through 19 are automatically assigned to Page Group 1;
intercoms 20 through 29 are automatically assigned to Page Group 2.
You can assign the same voice terminal to both paging groups.
If you are using a BIS-10 or a BIS-22 voice terminal, you must administer the
Group Page feature in a slightly different way.
Look at the “Paging Groups” columns on the System Configuration Form.
If you plan to keep intercoms 10 through 19 in Page Group 1 and the remaining
intercoms in Page Group 2, you don’t have to do anything here. If you plan to
change the makeup of the paging groups, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *71 for Page Group 1 or *72 for Page Group 2.
If you have the corresponding Auto Intercom buttons, a green light goes on next to each one
that already is assigned to that paging group.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the appropriate Auto Intercom button(s).
The green light goes on.
>
4
Dial a code from the Dial Code chart (located earlier in this section under
“Using the BIS-22 Voice Terminal as an Administrator Console”) that
corresponds with the voice terminal.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Follow steps 2 through 4 for each paging group you want to administer.
6
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Basic Administration
3-17
VOICE TERMINAL
TEMPLATES
If you have entered a number 1 through 4 under the “Template” column of your
“Voice Terminal” form, use the following procedure to assign the template to the
voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *10 followed by the option number of the template:
1
2
3
4
3
= Clear Template
= Dialer Template
= Feature Template
= Receptionist/Secretary Template
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the source
voice terminal(s).
The console beeps twice after each voice terminal is administered a template.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Label the target voice terminal buttons with the corresponding features as
shown in Figures 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, and 3-7.
NOTE:
6
3-18 Basic Administration
Features previously administered on a voice terminal that do not
appear on the template still apply, such as Voice Announcement
Enable/Disable and Personalized Ring.
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Option 1: Clear Template
This template is used to erase previously programmed features on a voice
terminal so that new features can be assigned. The Clear Template removes any
features assigned to a voice terminal, but does not erase line assignments.
see Figure 3-4.
FIGURE 3-4 The Clear Template.
34-Button
22-Button
10-Button
5-Button
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line D
Line C
Line B
Line A
Intercom
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line H
Line G
Line F
Line E
Conference
Transfer
Drop
Hold
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
SND
LND
❑
❑
❑
❑
Basic Administration
3-19
Option 2: Dialer Template
This template is for personnel who do not require special features, and who are
likely to have no need to make toll calls. This template can be assigned to even
the smallest voice terminals, including the 5-button voice terminals.
See Figure 3-5 for button assignments.
FIGURE 3-5 The Dialer Template.
34-Button
22-Button
10-Button
❑
❑
Line D
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line c
Line B
Line A
Intercom
Conference
Drop
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line H
Line G
Line F
Line E
BB
Transfer
Hold
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
3-20
Basic Administration
Al 10
SND
LND
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Option 3: Feature Template
This template is designed for managers, owners, and personnel who need
unrestricted phone use along with several additional features. This template is
for 22-button or larger voice terminals. See Figure 3-6 for button assignments.
FIGURE 3-6 The Feature Template.
34-Button
22-Button
10-Button
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line D
Line C
Line B
Line A
Intercom
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line H
Line G
Line F
Line E
BB
Conference
Transfer
Drop
Hold
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Do Not
Disturb
Privacy
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
ROVRD
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑ Page 1
❑
❑
❑ Page All
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Al 10
❑
❑
❑
❑
SND1
❑
❑
SND2
❑
❑
LND
❑
❑
CF/DXD
Basic Administration
3-21
Option 4: Receptionist/Secretary Template
This template is for receptionists, secretaries, and backup call handlers,
including the system attendant, and is designed for use with 22-button or larger
voice terminals. See Figure 3-7 for button assignments.
FIGURE 3-7 The Receptionist/Secretary Template.
34-Button
22-Button
10-Button
❑
❑
Line D
❑
❑
Line H
❑
❑
Line C
❑
❑
Line G
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line B
Line A
Intercom
Conference
Drop
3-22 Basic Administration
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Line F
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Al 19
Al 18
Al 17
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Al 29
Al 28
Al 27
Line E
❑
❑
Al 16
❑
❑
Al 26
BB
❑
❑
Al 15
❑
❑
Al 25
❑
❑
Al 14
❑
❑
Al 24
❑
❑
Al 13
❑
❑
Al 23
Transfer
Hold
❑
❑
❑
❑
Al 11
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Al 10
❑
❑
Al 20
❑
❑
SND
❑
❑
TCP10
❑
❑
LND
❑
❑
Page All
Al 12
Al 22
Al 21
PROGRAM MODE LOCK
If you placed a check mark in the “Lock” column of the “Voice Terminal” form
you want to prevent the voice terminal from reprogramming any of the features
assigned to it. Use the procedure below to prevent the user of a voice terminal
from reprogramming any of the features assigned to it:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *89.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
4
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you are
administering.
>
Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you are administering.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
This concludes basic administration. You can use your system now, just as it is,
and leave further administration until later, or you can go on and customize the
outside telephone line assignments to individual voice terminals.
Basic Administration
3-23
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
As you filled out the Line Assignments Form, you learned that customizing line
assignments to voice terminals can help control costs and increase the efficiency
of your communications system. All the information you need to customize line
assignments should be on the Line Assignments Form.
When you enter administration mode and touch the Auto Intercom button for a
voice terminal, the green lights next to the line buttons on the console show you
which outside lines are currently assigned to that voice terminal.
Green light on = line is resigned to the voice terminal
Green light off = line is not assigned to the voice terminal
Your system comes from the factory configured so that all your outside lines
appear on the same line buttons on every voice terminal. These are the system’s
original line assignments. A voice terminal retains its original line assignments
until someone administers it differently. If this is the first time anyone has
administered your system, all your voice terminals should have their original line
assignments.
NOTE:
If you have not performed the procedure under the heading “Outside
Telephone Lines” earlier in this section, the green lights next to the line
buttons on your administrator/attendant console may show that your
system has more outside lines than it really has. If this is the case, go
back now to “Basic Administration” and enter the correct number of
outside lines following the instructions under the heading,
“Outside Telephone Lines.”
MERLIN Plus system line administration offers two choices:
ORIGINAL LINE
ASSIGNMENTS
●
You can keep the original line assignments on some or all of your voice
terminals.
●
You can customize the line assignments to some or all of your voice
terminals to suit the needs of your business and voice terminal users.
On the Line Assignments Form, find the voice terminals that are keeping their
original line assignments, then do the following:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
One after another, touch the Auto Intercom buttons for each of these voice
terminals.
The green lights next to the line buttons should show that all of your outside
lines appear on each of these voice terminals. If you discover that one or
more lines do not appear on a voice terminal designated to keep the original
line assignments, you can use the procedure in the entry for “Customized
Line Assignments” in Section 5, “Reference,” to give that voice terminal the
original line assignments.
3
Leave administration mode.
3-24 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
CUSTOMIZED LINE
ASSIGNMENTS
On the Line Assignments form, the numbers 1 through 8 on the top row to the
right of the intercom numbers should show how you plan to customize the line
assignments to voice terminals.
Customizing a voice terminal’s line assignments is simply a matter of removing
and adding lines. But keep the following points in mind:
●
●
●
●
On every voice terminal (except a 5-button model), the button directly above
Conference is always the Intercom button. You can’t assign a line
or feature to it.
On every voice terminal (except a 5-button model), the button above
Transfer is always a programmable feature button. You can’t assign
a line to it.
When you assign lines to a voice terminal, the system assigns them to line
buttons in the order shown in Figure 3-8 below. This sequence is also the
voice terminal’s automatic line selection sequence—the order in which the
system selects lines for the voice terminal’s outgoing calls—unless you
program a different automatic line selection sequence.
On any voice terminal, line buttons without lines assigned to them can have
feature buttons programmed on them.
FIGURE 3-8 The order in which the system assigns lines to buttons.
❑
❑
4
❑
❑
8
❑
❑
3
❑
❑
7
❑
❑
2
❑
❑
6
❑
❑
1
❑
❑
5
❑
❑
Intercom
❑
❑
Conference
Transfer
Drop
Hold
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
3-25
To assign lines to a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you’re
administering.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button. Green lights also go on next to
the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
>
Dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you are administering.
Green lights go on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
3
Touch all the line buttons that have a green light on next to them.
The green light next to each line button goes off.
4
In the order that you want lines to appear on the voice terminal, touch all the
line buttons again. If you want to reserve a button(s) for feature
programming, touch that button(s) last.
The green light goes on next to the button you touch.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
RINGING OPTIONS
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Perform the following procedure to select the ringing option for each line
assigned to your voice terminals:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
2
Touch the line button you want to program.
3
Dial one of the codes for the type of ringing you have indicated on the
Line Assignments Form:
>
Dial *35 for no ring (N).
The red light next to the button goes off.
>
Dial *36 for delayed ring (D).
The red light next to the button flashes.
>
Dial *37 for immediate ring (I).
The red light next to the button goes on steady.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each line button.
5
When you’ve finished programming, slide the T/P switch to the center
position.
3-26 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
BUTTON-FREE LINE
OPERATION
If you selected Button-Free Line Operation, so that incoming lines on a voice
terminal are not assigned to buttons, you can administer whether or not calls
should ring at the voice terminal. If the voice terminal is in a public place,
such as a building lobby, you can select the no ring option.
If you circled “I” for Immediate Ring or “N” for No Ring on the Line
Assignments for Voice Terminals form, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Follow the appropriate procedure:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you’re
administering.
The green light goes on.
>
3
Dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you’re administering.
Touch the line button until the green light shows the assignment you want:
Green light on =
Green light off =
4
the line is assigned to the voice terminal
the line is not assigned to the voice terminal
To make the line Button Free, dial one of these two codes:
>
Dial *31 if you want the voice terminal to ring.
The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flahes rapidly.
>
Dial *32 if you do not want the voice terminal to ring.
The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flashes slowly.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Continue with administration, or leave administration mode.
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
3-27
LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR
ASA FEATURES
The four Automatic System Access (ASA) features require the assignment of
incoming lines and one requires the additional assignment of outgoing lines.
Call Forwarding (CF)
If there is an “I” and an “O” entered under two lines in this row, perform the
following procedure to administer the incoming and outgoing
call forwarding lines:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial the code for the type of line group you want to administer
> Dial *51 for a Call Forwarding incoming line group.
> Dial *52 for a Call Forwarding outgoing line group.
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you want
to each line group.
Green light on =
Green light off =
4
line is assigned to the group
line is not assigned to the group
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you entered a number other than 2 in the “Ring Interval” column for call
forwarding, follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for
incoming CF calls:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *762 plus the number of rings (0 through 9).
NOTE:
3
If 0 is selected, the voice terminal will not ring, and calls will be
forwarded immediately.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you put a telephone number in the column headed “Modify Message” for
Call Forwarding, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button for the line on which you want to hear the
modified message.
The green !ight goes on.
3-28 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
NOTE:
For special phone numbers, such as 800 numbers, you may prefer to
have the recorded voice pronounce the number as “Eight hundred”
followed by the number, instead of “Eight, zero, zero.” To do this,
touch Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix and again after the
800 area code and then again after the exchange. For example,
1-800-555-1212 would be entered as:
1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212
5
Repeat the procedure for each line you are administering.
6
Touch Administer.
7
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you put a “0” in the column headed “Modify Message” for CF, follow this
procedure to turn off the voice message:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *30.
3
Dial 0 to turn off the message.
NOTE:
4
To turn on the message, dial 1 instead of 0 in step 3.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
To enter or change the call forwarding destination number from the
administrator console, use the following procedure:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *53.
3
Dial the destination number.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
3-29
Direct Extension Dialing (DXD)
If there is an “I” entered in this row, perform the following procedure to
administer the incoming Direct Extension Dialing line(s):
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *58 for the Direct Extension Dialing incoming line group.
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments
you want.
Green light on =
Green light off =
4
line is assigned to DXD
line is not assigned to DXD
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you entered a number other than 2 in the “Ring Interval” column for
Direct Extension Dialing, follow the procedure below to change the ring
interval for incoming DXD calls:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *761 plus the number of rings (0 through 9).
If 0 is selected, the voice terminal will not ring, and calls will be
answered immediately.
NOTE:
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you put a telephone number in the column headed “Modify Message” for
DXD, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode...
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button for the line on which you want to hear the
modified message.
The green light goes on.
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
NOTE:
3-30 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
For special phone numbers, such as 800 numbers, you may
prefer to have the recorded voice pronounce the number as
“Eight hundred” followed by the number, instead of “Eight, zero,
zero.” To do this, touch Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix
and again after the 800 area code and then again after the
exchange. For example, 1-800-555-1212 would be entered as:
1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212.
5
Repeat the procedure for each line you are administering.
6
Touch Administer.
7
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Remote Line Access (RLA)
If there is an “I” entered in this row, perform the following procedure to
administer the incoming Remote Line Access line group:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *54 for the Remote Line Access incoming line group.
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you
want.
Green light on =
Green light off =
4
line is assigned to RLA
line is not assigned to RLA
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you entered a number other than 2 in the “Ring Interval” column for RLA,
follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for
incoming RLA calls:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *763 plus the number of rings (0 through 9).
NOTE:
3
If 0 is selected, the voice terminal will not ring, and calls will be
answered immediately.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
To use RLA, you must assign a 5-digit password (the first two digits are the
caller’s intercom number) to gain access to the system from a remote
location. You also need this password when changing the call forwarding
destination number when off-site.
To assign the password, follow this procedure:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict
2
To create a password for a particular intercom number, dial the intercom
number plus any three digits except 000.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
3-31
System Answer (SA)
If there is an “I” entered in this row, perform the following procedure to
administer the incoming System Answer line(s):
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *75 for the System Answer incoming line group.
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments
you want.
Green light on =
Green light off =
4
line is assigned to SA
line is not assigned to SA
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you entered a number other than 2 in the “Ring Interval” column for SA,
follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for
incoming SA calls:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *764 plus the number of rings (0 through 9).
NOTE:
3
If 0 is selected, the voice terminal will not ring, and calls will be
answered immediately.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you put an entry in the column headed “Modify Message” for SA, follow
the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *77 and the message number desired:
0
1
2
=
=
=
No voice message; call is placed on hold immediately
Message says, "Please hold"
Message says, "Please hold. Your call
will be handled momentarily."
3
Touch Administer.
4
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
This concludes outside line administration. You can go on now to
“Systemwide Options,” or you can leave further administration for another
time.
3-32 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
Systemwide Options
Now that your MERLIN Plus system is up and running, you can continue with
system administration at a pace that best suits your work schedule. Under this
heading you’ll find a menu of options and features from which to choose.
CALL RESTRICTIONS TO
VOICE TERMINALS
When your system is first installed, all voice terminals are unrestricted.
The Call Restrictions Assignment Form should show whether you plan to restrict
any of your voice terminals or assign Disallowed or Allowed Lists.
DISALLOWED LIST
If you plan to prevent all or some voice terminals from making billable calls,
you should have filled in one or more entries on the Disallowed List Entry Form
and put a check next to each voice terminal being assigned the Disallowed List
on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form.
Use the following procedure to setup a Disallowed List:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
Dial *09 followed by the Disallowed List code (01 through 20).
2
Dial the disallowed number (up to 16 digits). If the number includes
wild card digits, touch Hold once for each one.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
ALLOWED LISTS
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
If you plan to create lists of numbers that restricted voice terminals are allowed
to call, you should have filled in one or more of the lists on the Allowed List
Entry Form. As the directory shows, you can have up to eight Allowed Lists
with up to 10 entries on each list.
To setup an Allowed List:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
Dial a * and a 2-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the number of
the list.
2
Dial the 2-digit number of the item in the Allowed List (between 01 and 10).
3
Dial the allowed number, toll-prefix, and area code, if necessary, or exchange
to be added to the list (maximum eight digits).
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Systemwide Options
3-33
CALL RESTRICTIONS
ASSIGNMENT FORMS
For those voice terminals with a check mark in the “Disallowed List” column on
the form, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial *0900.
3
Follow the appropriate procedure below:
NOTE:
>
To assign the Disallowed List to all voice terminals, touch
Conference.
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you want to assign
the Disallowed List.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button.
>
4
Dial the appropriate code from the Dial Code chart located earlier in this
section under the heading “The BIS-22 Voice Terminal Used as an
Administrator Console” for the voice terminal to which the Disallowed
List is to be assigned.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
For those voice terminals with a check mark in the “Unrestricted” column on the
form, you don’t have to do anything here because when your system is first
installed, all voice terminals are unrestricted.
Check marks in the “Toll Restricted” and “Outward Restricted” columns show
the type of restriction you want to place on the voice terminal.
To assign either outward call restrictions or toll call restrictions to voice
terminals, follow the procedure below:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Follow the appropriate procedure:
> Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you want to
restrict.
> Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to restrict.
3
Touch Restrict until the green light next to it shows the kind of call
restriction you want the voice terminal to have:
Steady green light on =
Flashing green light =
=
Green light off
4
Unrestricted (all talk permitted)
Toll restricted (local and intercom calls only)
Outward restricted (intercom calls only)
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
3-34 Systemwide Options
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
For restricted voice terminals, if there is a check mark in one or more of the
“Allowed List Assigned” columns, do the following:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
3
Dial a * and a two-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the list you
checked off to assign to the voice terminal.
Dial 00.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for each voice terminal that has been
assigned this list.
4
5
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal that you want to
assign the list.
>
Use the appropriate code from the Dial Code chart earlier in this section
under the heading “Using the BIS-22 Voice Terminal as an Administrator
Console” for the voice terminal to which the allowed list is to be
assigned.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Systemwide Options
3-35
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
You can assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently called telephone numbers
or to account numbers you want to appear on call reports (if you have the
Call Report option). All system voice terminals will have access to
these System Speed Dial codes.
Assigning Codes to Telephone Numbers
As you learned when you planned your system, you can store telephone numbers
under System Speed Dial codes with or without Restriction override. You can
also specify which telephone numbers stored under codes will be printed out in
full on call reports and which will be identified in the reports by System Speed
Dial code only. Your System Speed Dial Form should show which, if any,
numbers you have designated for Restriction Override and which, if any, you
have designated as private (that is, not to be printed on Call Reports).
To assign System Speed Dial codes:
1
Enter administration mode.
The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict.
2
Dial the code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999) that you are assigning
to the telephone number.
3
Dial one of the following codes:
4
>
If you did not put a check mark in the “Restriction Override” column,
dial *90.
>
If you put a check mark in the “Restriction Override” column, dial *92.
Dial the telephone number. If you checked the “Private” column next to the
number, dial a * before the telephone number.
NOTE:
5
Private numbers will not appear on Call Reports or on display voice
terminals. However, private numbers will appear on System Feature
Reports.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each telephone number to which you are
assigning a System Speed Dial code.
7
Continue to administer the system, or leave administration mode.
Assigning Codes to Account Numbers
An account number on a call report allows you to identify the person or
organization to whom the call should be charged. As you learned when you
planned your system, you can store account numbers in the system under System
Speed Dial codes. Your System Speed Dial Form should show the codes you
plan to assign to your account numbers. Then, in step #3 of the above procedure
enter the account number instead of the phone number.
3-36 Systemwide Options
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
The following table is a quick guide to administration procedures for the
MERLIN Plus Communications System. If you need more information on a
procedure than the table gives you, look up the procedure in Section 5,
“Reference.”
Before you perform the steps given for any procedure, you first have to enter
administration mode as follows:
1
Slide the T/P switch on the left side of the console to P.
The red lights next to the line buttons go on steady.
The green lights next to the line buttons begin flashing.
The console rings every 5 seconds to remind you that it’s in programming mode.
2
Touch Administer.
The red lights go on steady next to Administer and Restrict.
All other lights go off, and the ringing stops.
NOTE:
If you are performing several of these procedures in one administration
session, you don’t have to leave administration mode after each one.
Simply dial the appropriate code or touch the appropriate button to
begin the next procedure.
When you finish administering the system, leave administration mode as
follows:
1
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
2
Change any voice terminal (telephone) button labels and any entries on forms
or directories to reflect the administration or programming changes you’ve
made.
Do This
Administration Procedure
Specify toll-prefix or area-code-only dialing.
Specify Touch-Tone or rotary (pulse) dialing.
1
Enter administration mode.
2
Dial the appropriate code:
*36 for toll-prefix dialing
*37 for area-code-only dialing.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the appropriate code:
*38 for Touch-Tone dialing
*39 for rotary (pulse) dialing.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-37
Do This
Administration Procedure
Make Line A and/or Line E Private.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial * 57. The green lights next to the buttons for Line A and Line E indicate
their status:
Green light on = privacy active
Green light off = privacy inactive
3 Touch the line button until the green light indicates the privacy status you
want.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Customize line assignments to a telephone.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone.
3 Touch the line buttons to add or remove lines. Add the lines in the order that
they should appear.
Green light on = line is assigned
Green light off = line is not assigned
4 Leave administration mode.
Specify number of lines in the system
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *4.
3 Dial the number of lines in the system (1-8).
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Assign Button-Free Line Operation to a
telephone.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone.
3 Touch the line button until the green light next to it shows the line
assignment you want:
Green fight on = the line is assigned to the voice terminal
Green light off = the line is not assigned to the voice terminal
4 Dial either *31 if you want the phone to ring on incoming calls or *32 if you
don’t want it to ring.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
NOTE:
To make all outside lines reappear on the voice terminal, enter
administration mode, touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the
intercom number of the phone, dial *34, touch Administer, and leave
administration mode.
(continued)
3-38 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Do This
Administration Procedure
Assign Call Restrictions to a telephone.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone.
3 Touch Restrict repeatedly until the green light indicates the desired
restriction.
Green light on steady = Unrestricted (all calls permitted)
Green light flashing = Toll restricted (no long distance permitted)
Green light off = Outward restricted (no outside calls)
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Add an entry to an Allowed List.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the right list; for lists 1 through 8 dial *01 through *08.
3 Dial the item number (01 through 10).
4 Dial the entry (up to eight digits).
The console beeps twice on the eighth digit.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
Remove an entry from an Allowed List.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the right list; for lists 1 through 8 dial *01 through *08
3 Dial the item number (01 through 10).
4 Touch Drop.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
Assign an Allowed List to a voice terminal.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the right list; for lists 1 through 8 dial *01 through *08.
3 Dial 00.
4 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate intercom code
number for the telephone.
Green light on = list is assigned to the telephone
Green light off = list is not assigned to the telephone
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-39
Do This
Administration Procedure
Add an entry to the Disallowed List.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial “09 followed by the Disallowed List code (01 to 20).
3 Dial the disallowed number (up to 16 digits).
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Remove an entry from the Disallowed List.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *09 and the Disallowed List code (01-20).
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
Assign a Disallowed List to a voice terminal.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *09 then 00.
3 Touch the Auto Intercom or dial the appropriate intercom code number of the
voice terminal you want to assign the list to.
Green light on = list is assigned
Green light off = list is not assigned
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Copy line assignments, call restrictions, and
programmed features from one telephone
the source) to another (the target).
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the target
voice terminal.
3 Touch Copy.
4 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the source
voice terminal.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
Change the Hold Disconnect Interval.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *69.
3 Touch the line button of the incoming line that you want to change the hold
disconnect interval.
Green light on = the long (450 millisecond) interval is selected.
Green light off = the short (50 millisecond) interval is selected.
(continued)
3-40 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Do This
Administration Procedure
Assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone
numbers and account numbers.
1
Enter administration mode.
2
Dial the code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999) you are assigning to
the number.
3
Dial either:
*90 to assign the code without Restriction Override
*92 to assign the code with Restriction Override
*88 to assign the code to an account number.
4
Dial the telephone number or account number.
NOTE:
To designate a telephone number as private (not printed on call
reports), dial * before the number in step 4.
If the telephone number or account number has the maximum allowed
16 digits, the console beeps twice when you enter the sixteenth digit.
Assigning or removing a voice terminal from a
paging group.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode.
1
Enter administration mode.
2
Dial the code for the paging group (*71 or *72).
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate code from the dial
code chart for the phone you want to add or remove.
Green light on = telephone is assigned
Green light off = telephone is removed
NOTE:
Set the Transfer Return Interval.
Touch DROP to remove all voice terminals from a paging group.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the transfer return interval you want (up to nine rings):
*2 plus the number of rings wanted (*25 = five rings).
*20 for transferred calls to not be returned.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-41
Do This
Administration Procedure
Set the Music-on-Hold volume.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the volume you want:
*12 to turn off Music-on-Hold.
*13 to set the volume to low.
*14 to set the volume to medium.
*15 to set the volume to high.
Or use the music source volume control instead.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
Set the background music volume.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the code for the volume you want:
*16 to turn off the background music.
*17 to set the volume to low.
*18 to set the volume to medium.
*19 to set the volume to high.
Or use the music source volume control instead.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
Set the date for Call Reports and
System Feature Reports.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *80.
3 Dial two digits for the month (01 through 12), two for the day
(01 through 31), and two for the year (00 through 99).
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Set the time for Call Reports and
System Feature Reports.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *81.
3 Dial two digits for the hour (00 through 23) and two for the minute
(00 through 59).
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
3-42 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Do This
Administration Procedure
Designate a telephone jack on the control unit
for Call Reports.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *82.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for the jack to which
the data collector and printer are currently assigned.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the new telephone jack to which you are
assigning the data collector and printer.
The green light goes off next to the Auto lntercom button for the old jack,
and the green light next to the Auto Intercom button for the new jack goes on.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Set the minimum call duration for Call Report
records.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *83.
3
Dial one digit (0 through 9) for the minimum number of minutes.
NOTE:
The system adds 10 seconds to the number of minutes you select.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Set the calls reported option for Call Reports.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *84.
3
Dial the code for the calls reported option you wane
0 = no calls reported
1 = outgoing calls only
2 = outgoing and incoming calls
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Print a System Feature Report.
1 Enter administration mode.
2
Dial the code for the report or set of reports you want:
*60 for one system administration report and individual phone reports.
*61 for a system administration report.
*62 plus touch one or more Auto Intercom buttons or dial one or more
intercom numbers for individual phone reports.
*63 to abort a printout and cancel all other report requests.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-43
Do This
Administration Procedure
Designate a voice terminal jack on the control
unit for System Feature Reports.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *85.
If previously administered, the green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom
button for the jack to which the data collector and printer are currently
assigned.
3 Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack to which the data collector and
printer are connected.
The green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button for the old jack,
and the green light next to the Auto Intercom button for the new jack goes on.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Program a telephone using Centralized
Programming.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone
you want to program.
3 Touch Conference.
4 Program the telephone.
5 Touch Conference.
6 Leave administration mode.
Lock the programming function at a voice
terminal
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *89.
3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the dial code of the voice terminal
you are administering.
Green light on = the voice terminal is locked
Green light off = the voice terminal is unlocked and can be programmed
NOTE:
Touch CONFERENCE to enable program mode lock systemwide.
Touch DROP to disable program mode lock systemwide.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Designate a voice terminal jack on the control
unit for Busy Buster.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *35.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal jack to which you want the BB jack connected.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
3-44 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Do This
Administration Procedure
Designate a jack for the ASA features
(jack 18 is the initial assignment).
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *59.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the jack you
want to assign to ASA.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Assign an alternate attendant to handle
ASA calls.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *79.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice
terminal you want to assign as the alternate attendant console.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Select the lines, except tie lines, that you want to
add to or remove from CF/DXD, RLA, or SA
line groups.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial the appropriate code:
*51 for the CF incoming line group
*52 for the CF outgoing line group
*58 for the DXD incoming line group
*54 for the RLA incoming line group
*75 for SA incoming line group
3
Touch line buttons until the green light next to it indicates its assignment to
the list.
Green light on = line is assigned to the list
Green light off = line is not assigned to the list
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Enable or disable the voice message for all lines
in your CF and/or DXD incoming line groups.
Modify the voice message for one or more lines
in your CF, RLA, SA and/or DXD incoming
line groups.
1
Enter administration mode.
2
Dial *30.
3
Dial the appropriate code:
1 to turn on the Call Forwarding voice message
0 to turn off the voice message
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button(s) for the line(s) on which you want to modify the
message.
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-45
Do This
Administration Procedure
Change the password for the CF or RLA feature.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *56.
3
Dial an intercom number plus three digits.
NOTE:
To invalidate any password, dial the intercom number and 000.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Designate the number of rings before a call will
be answered by ASA features.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *76.
3 Dial the number that corresponds to the ASA feature you’ve selected:
1 = DXD
2 = CF
3 = RLA
4 = SA
4
Dial 0-9 (for the number of rings).
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
Modify the voice message for one or more lines
in your CF, RLA, SA or DXD incoming line
groups.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button(s) for the line(s) on which you want to modify the
message.
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
5 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6 Leave administration mode.
Enter or change the telephone number to which
you want calls forwarded.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *53.
3
Dial the new CF destination telephone number.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Set the Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access
Disconnect Timer interval for systems where no
forward disconnect signal is provided by the
Central office.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *68.
3
Dial the desired value (must be 3 digits).
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
(continued)
3-46 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
Do This
Administration Procedure
Reset the system.
WARNING:
This procedure erases all system administration and telephone
programming, returns the system to its factory settings, and restores
initial feature assignments to the phones. Use this feature only
when you want to change the system radically.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *99198.
The console beeps twice.
3 Turn the power off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn it on again.
4 Leave administration mode.
Select a message to be played with System
Answer.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial *77 followed by the desired option:
0 = no voice message
1 = “Please hold”
2 = “Please hold, your call will be handled momentarily”
NOTE:
If a line number is administered using *50, the following message is
appended to the end of message 1 and 2: “You have reached . . .”
where . . . is a number entered by the system administrator
for Call Forwarding.
3 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4 Leave administration mode.
Select number of rings before a call is picked
up by an ASA feature.
1 Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2 Dial *76 plus the ASA feature number:
1 = DXD
2 = CF
3 = RLA
4 = SA
3
Dial the number of rings (between 0 and 9) before the ASA feature picks up
the call.
NOTE:
If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal will not ring.
and the calls will be immediately answered.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
Assign a template to a voice terminal.
1 Enter administration mode.
2 Dial* 10 followed by the desired template:
1 = Clear template
2 = Dialer template
3 = Feature template
4 = Receptionist/Secretary template
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal being assigned the template.
4 Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5 Leave administration mode.
Quick Reference Guide to System Administration
3-47
Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes
Feature
Other Numbers/Buttons
Administration Code
00
Add (or remove) an Allowed List (1 through 8)
to a voice terminal
01 through 10 plus up to eight
telephone number digits
Add telephone numbers to an Allowed List (1 through 8)
*09
00
01 through 10 plus up to 20 telephone
number digits
Add (or remove) a Disallowed List to a voice terminal
Add telephone numbers to a Disallowed List
*2
0 through 9 (rings)
*4
0 through 8 (lines)
Assign the number of lines in the system
plus template option
1 = Clear
2 = Dialer
3 = Feature
4 = Receptionist/Secretary
and intercom number
Assign a template to a voice terminal
the line button(s) for the line(s) on
which you want to reinstate restriction
Reinstate restriction
*01 through *08
*10
*11
Set the Transfer Return Interval for 0 through 9 rings.
*12
Turn off Music-on-Hold
*13
Set Music-on-Hold to low volume
*14
Set Music-on-Hold to medium volume
(the default setting)
*15
Set Music-on-Hold to high volume
*16
Turn off background music
*17
Set background music to low volume
*18
Set background music to medium volume
(the default setting)
*19
Set background music to high volume
*30
1 = to turn on the Call Forwarding
voice message
0 = to turn off the Call Forwarding
voice message
Enable or disable the voice message on one or more lines
in your CF and/or DXD incoming line groups
*31
Set a line for immediate ring on a voice terminal with
Button-Free Line Operation
*32
Set a line for no ring on a voice terminal with Button-Free
Line Operation
*34
Reassign lines to a voice terminal that has Button-Free
Line Operation
*35
jack number assigned to BB
Set the control unit jack for the Busy Buster feature
(continued)
3-48
Quick Reference Guide to Administration
Administration Code
Other Numbers/Buttons
Feature
*36
Set the system for toll prefix, a 0 or a 1
*37
Set the system for area code only
*38
Set the system for Touch-Tone dialing
*39
Set the system for rotary dialing
*50
the line button(s) for the line(s) on
which you want the modified message
the telephone number you want to
include in the message
Modify the Call Forwarding, Direct Extension Dialing,
Remote Line Access, or System Answer voice messages
for one or more lines in your CF, DXD, RLA, or SA
incoming line groups
*51
the line buttons of the lines you want
to add to or remove from the group
Select lines that will be included in the Call Forwarding
incoming line group
*52
the line buttons of the lines you want
to add to or remove from the group
Choose lines that will compose the Call Forwarding
outgoing line group
*53
the new Call Forwarding destination
telephone number
Enter or change the telephone number to which you want
calls forwarded
*54
the line buttons of the lines you want
to add to or remove from the group
Select lines that will be included in the Remote Line
Access incoming line group
*56
the ASA password (a MERLIN Plus
system intercom number plus any three
digits)
Choose at least one valid 5-digit password so that you can
gain access to an outside line using Remote Line Access or
change the current call forward number from a remote
location
*57
line A or E only
Assign Privacy to Line A or E
*58
the line buttons of the lines you want
to add to or remove from the group
Select lines that will compose the Direct Extension Dialing
incoming line group
*59
the intercom number for the jack you
want to assign to ASA
Change the jack assignment of the ASA features from jack
18, the initial assignment
*60
Print a System Feature Report for the system and for every
voice terminal in the system
*61
Print a System Feature Report for the whole system
*62
an intercom number of the voice
terminal
*63
Print a System Feature Report for an individual voice
terminal
Cancel a System Feature Report in progress and
all report requests
*68
three-digit timer interval
Set the CF/RLA Disconnect Timer interval (if no forward
disconnect is provided by the Central Office)
*69
the outside line buttons
Set Hold Disconnect Interval
(continued)
Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes
3-49
Other Numbers/Buttons
Administration Code
Feature
*71
the intercom numbers
Assign voice terminals to Group Page group 1
*72
the intercom numbers
Assign voice terminals to Group Page group 2
*75
the outside line buttons
Assign lines that can be answered by System Answer
*76
ASA feature number (1-4) and number
of rings (0-9)
Set number of rings before an ASA feature picks up a call
*77
plus message option
0 = no message
1 = “Please hold”
2 = “Please hold. Your call will be
answered momentarily”
Choose a message to be played with System Answer.
NOTE:
You can also append message
1 or 2 to the call forwarding
message modified with the
*50 code.
*79
an intercom number of the voice
terminal
Assign an alternate attendant position
*80
a 2-digit month, a 2-digit day of the
month, and a 2-digit year
Set the date for the Call Report and System Feature Report
feature
*81
a 2-digit hour, a 2-digit minute of the
hour
Set the time for the Call Report and System Feature Report
feature
*82
an intercom number
Set the control unit jack for the Call Report feature
*83
0 through 9 (minutes)
Set the minimum call duration for the Call Report feature
*84
0 = no calls reported
1 = only outgoing calls reported
2 = outgoing and incoming calls
reported
Set the type of calls that are printed on the call report
*85
an intercom number
Set the control unit jack for the System Feature Report
*88
an account number
Assign System Speed Dial codes to account numbers for
the Account Number Entry feature
*89
the intercom number
Enable or disable a person from changing programmed
features at his or her voice terminal
*90
system speed dial code and telephone
number digits
Assign System Speed Dial codes to outside telephone
numbers
a * plus the telephone number digits
Assign System Speed Dial codes to outside telephone
numbers that are private (only the dial code is printed on
the call report)
(continued)
3-50 Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes
Administration Code
*92
*99198
Other Numbers/Buttons
Feature
system speed dial code and telephone
number digits
Assign System Speed Dial codes with Restriction Override
to outside telephone numbers
a * plus the telephone number digits
Assign System Speed Dial codes with Restriction Override
to outside telephone numbers that are private (only the dial
code is printed on the call report)
Reset the system (for service personnel only)
Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes
3-51
Section 4: Using The Attendant Console
Overview
As your company’s system attendant, you will probably answer most calls that
come into the business and transfer many of those calls to other people in the
office. This section includes descriptions, instructions, and suggestions that will
help you transfer calls and use Auto Intercom buttons and Group Page features,
the Send Message feature, and the headset. For more information about any of
the MERLIN Plus Communications System features discussed here, refer to
Section 5, “Reference.”
THE ATTENDANT
CONSOLE
The main attendant console, plugged into jack 10 on the control unit, also serves
as the administration console. All of the company’s lines appear on separate
buttons on this console. It is important, especially if you answer most of the
incoming calls, that as the attendant, you have an Auto Intercom button with
lights for each voice terminal in the system. Therefore, most attendants use a
BIS-34 or BIS-34D model voice terminal that has enough buttons for lines and
Auto Intercom buttons. When you plug in your BIS-34 or BIS-34D model voice
terminal into intercom jack 10 on the control unit, your console automatically y
has a button for every line and an Auto Intercom button for every voice terminal
in the system.
If you are using a BIS-22 or BIS-22D voice terminal as an
administrator/attendant console, all the lines to which your system has access
will appear on separate buttons on your voice terminal, but you may not have an
Auto Intercom button for each person’s voice terminal in your system.
Therefore, when you want to place an intercom call or transfer a call, you may
need to dial the person’s intercom number rather than use an Auto Intercom
button.
NOTE:
Since the BIS-10 voice terminal does not have separate buttons for
outside and Auto Intercom lines, its use as an attendant console is
severely limited and so not recommended for that use.
Since the BIS-22 or BIS-22D voice terminal may not have Auto Intercom
buttons for every voice terminal in your MERLIN Plus system, you may need to
use the special procedure described in “Using the Send Message Feature” in this
section to turn on the Message light at the voice terminal of the person who has a
message waiting.
Figures 4-1 and 4-2 on the following pages are illustrations of the BIS-34D and
BIS-22 voice terminals respectively. Look at the picture of the type of voice
terminal that you are using and check the location of the buttons
and the dial pad.
If you need to check the initial button assignments for any voice terminal with
34 buttons to be used as an administrator/attendant console in regular
call-handling mode, see Section 3, “Administering the System.”
Overview
4-1
FIGURE 4-1 The BIS-34D with display as attendant console.
Display
buttons
AT&T
Display
contrast
control
Display
BIS-34D
Call
appearance
buttons
Test/Program
switch
Feature
buttons
Dial
pad
Ringer
volume
control
Speakerphone
volume control
4-2 Overview
Message light
Speakerphone light
HFAI light
Microphone light
FIGURE 4-2 The BIS-22 voice terminal as attendant console.
Call Appearance/
Feature buttons
AT&T
BIS-22
Test/Program
switch
Dial
pad
Ringer volume
control
Speakerphone
volume control
Message light
Speakerphone light
HFAI light
Microphone light
Overview
4-3
Handling Calls
As the system attendant, you will be answering most of the incoming calls.
To handle the calls efficiently, you will find it helpful to know about the
following features and procedures:
●
Transferring calls
●
Using the Auto Intercom buttons for people in your system
●
Paging through the voice terminal speakers
●
Using the Send Message feature
●
●
●
TRANSFERRING CALLS
Changing the ringing options of the outside lines on your console or helping
others to change the ringing options for the lines on their voice terminals
Using Night Service when you are off duty
Activating System Answer when you are away from the Console for a short
period of time or busy on other calls
●
Using an alternate attendant position to handle returning ASA calls
●
Using the headset
Since an important part of your job may be to screen calls and then transfer them
to the appropriate people, you should be familiar with the following ways to
transfer calls.
●
Transferring Calls by Dialing the Intercom Number
To transfer a call to someone by dialing his or her intercom number:
1
Touch Transfer.
2
Dial the person’s intercom number.
3
Hang up.
Transfer
Ocom no.
●
Transferring Calls with One-Touch Transfer
To transfer a call to someone using One-Touch Transfer:
1
With the call in progress, touch the Auto Intercom button of the person to
whom you want to transfer the call.
2
When you hear a beep, announce the call.
3
Hang up.
Susan 15
If the person has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature or if the
person is using the intercom line at his or her voice terminal, you cannot
announce the call because it will ring automatically.
4-4 Handling Calls
●
Screening Calls
When you screen a call, you first discuss the call with the person to whom it
is to be transferred. There are many reasons for consulting about the call.
For example, a person may want to obtain a file before taking the call, may
be busy and not want to answer the call at the moment, or may want the
attendant to answer the call and take a message.
To screen a call:
1
Touch Hold.
2
Touch Intercom and dial the intercom number of the person to whom the
call may be transferred.
or
Touch the person’s Auto Intercom button.
3
Announce the call and ask if it will be accepted.
NOTE:
If the person has activated the Voice Announcement Disable
feature or if the person is using the intercom line at his or her
voice terminal, you cannot announce the call because it will ring
automatically.
If the person chooses not to accept the call:
a
Touch the held call’s line button.
b
Advise the caller.
c
Hang up.
If the person chooses to accept the call:
a
Advise the person to touch the appropriate line button.
b
Hang up.
Hold
John 12
555-1234
Handling Calls
4-5
USING AUTO INTERCOM
BUTTONS
Auto Intercom buttons on your attendant console allow you to handle calls
efficiently in several ways:
●
●
●
Auto Intercom buttons allow you to quickly and easily transfer calls.
The lights next to Auto Intercom buttons indicate when others in your office
are using their voice terminals. If the green light is on next to an Auto
Intercom button, it means the person at that intercom number is using the
voice terminal or has activated the Do Not Disturb feature.
If the green light next to the person’s Auto Intercom button is flashing,
it means that the person is calling you.
Be sure to type or write the names of the people in your office on the appropriate
Auto Intercom buttons.
To call someone in your MERLIN Plus system with one touch:
1
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person you want to call.
2
When you hear the person answer, begin speaking into your speakerphone or
lift the handset and begin speaking.
Susan 15
USING GROUP PAGE
FEATURES
The Group Page feature allows you to make announcements to groups of people
or to page individuals for calls. When a call comes in, you can put the call on
hold and page the person for whom the call is intended. To use a programmed
button to make an announcement through a group of voice terminal speakers:
1
Touch the Group Page button for the group you want to page.
2
When you hear a beep, touch Speakerphone or lift your handset and make
the announcement.
Group
Page
Speakerphone
To page a group using a dial code:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
3
Dial a code for the group you want to page.
70 = Page-All (all voice terminals in the system)
71 = group 1
72 = group 2
4
When you hear a beep, begin speaking.
Intercom
Speakerphone
70-72
4-6 Handling Calls
USING THE SEND
MESSAGE FEATURE
When someone in the MERLIN PIUS system has a message, you can turn on the
Message light at the person’s voice terminal to indicate that there is a message
waiting.
1 Touch Send Message.
2 Touch an Auto Intercom button, if you have one for the person.
or
Dial the 3-character dial code opposite the person’s intercom number as
found on the following table.
Send
Message
Susan 15
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
Intercom 10
#22
Intercom 20
#03
Intercom 11
#21
Intercom 21
#04
Intercom 12
#20
Intercom 22
#05
Intercom 13
#19
Intercom 23
#06
Intercom 14
#18
Intercom 24
#07
Intercom 15
#17
Intercom 25
#08
Intercom 16
#16
Intercom 26
#09
Intercom 17
#15
Intercom 27
#10
Intercom 18
#14
Intercom 28
#11
Intercom 19
#13
Intercom 29
#12
For example, if you want to turn on the Message light at Intercom 24, but do not
have an Auto Intercom button for that person, look for Intercom 24 on the table
above. Opposite Intercom 24 you will find the Send Message dial code, #07.
Then you would touch Send Message and dial #07 to send the message.
To turn off the message light, repeat the steps.
Send
Message
#03-#22
Handling Calls
4-7
SELECTING RINGING
OPTIONS
You can program any outside line at your console to ring immediately, to ring
after a delay, or not ring at all. You will probably want most lines at your
console to ring immediately (the factory-set condition), but if you answer calls
on a certain line only when someone else doesn’t answer them, program that line
for delayed ringing. You may want to program the lines at other people’s voice
terminals for no ring so that they are not interrupted while they work.
If you want someone in the office to answer calls when you are busy or not at
your desk, program the lines at that person’s voice terminal for delayed ring.
The backup person may also want to program a Ring Override button for his or
her voice terminal. When the backup person must answer calls that would
ordinarily ring at your console, he or she can touch the Ring Override button and
have all calls ring immediately at his or her voice terminal.
USING NIGHT SERVICE
During the night or on weekends when you are off duty, you can still make it
convenient for someone else, such as a guard, to answer calls. You do so with
the Night Service feature. There are three ways to provide Night Service
for your office:
●
●
●
4-8 Handling Calls
You can provide the person with a voice terminal that has all the lines, or the
person can monitor the attendant console and answer calls there. Be sure that
all lines on which calls can come in after hours are set for immediate ring.
If the lines are not normally set for this ringing option, the person can
activate a Ring Override button that he or she has programmed for the voice
terminal. (See “Ring Override” in Section 5, “Reference.”)
The backup person can also answer calls that come in after hours by
programming a Call Pickup button so that he or she can pickup calls that
come in at the administrator/attendant console. Since the attendant console
has all the lines of your MERLIN Plus system, the person answering calls
after hours can pick up calls by touching the Call Pickup button whenever the
attendant console rings. (See “Call Pickup” in Section 5, “Reference.”)
If the person is in another part of the building, the attendant can connect his
or her console and an extra alert device to a Supplementary Alert Adapter
(See “Supplementary Alert Adapter” under “Accessory Equipment” in
Section 5, “Reference.”) so that each time a call comes in, an extra alert
device goes on.
Your system administrator can also administer and activate the
Call Forwarding feature for after-hours use. When the system is in
Call Forwarding mode, incoming calls on designated lines are connected to a
Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP) in the control unit for a message that
informs the caller that the call will be forwarded. While the caller is listening
to the message, the control unit calls the telephone number to which calls are
being forwarded and uses the system’s Conference feature to connect the
incoming call to the outgoing call. For more information about this feature,
refer to “Automatic System Access” in Section 5, “Reference.”
You can activate the System Answer feature with a System Answer button so
that when selected calls come in, the system automatically y answers them, then
plays a pre-recorded message before placing them on hold. This feature can only
be activated from the attendant console or the alternate attendant console. If your
system has an alternate attendant, the System Answer feature must be
administered to that voice terminal.
ACTIVATING SYSTEM
ANSWER
To activate the System Answer feature:
1
Touch System Answer.
The green light goes on.
System
Answer
USING AN ALTERNATE
ATTENDANT CONSOLE
When Automatic System Answer (ASA) calls are not answered, they normally
return to the main attendant console. However, you may prefer to assign an
alternate attendant position to handle just ASA calls; all other calls are directed
to the main attendant console. The alternate attendant position is assigned by the
system administrator.
If you are assigned the alternate attendant console, you can do anything the main
attendant can do, except you cannot turn on message lights at voice terminals nor
perform administration procedures from that console. The only calls handled by
the alternate attendant are returned ASA calls. For example, if a Direct
Extension Dialing (DXD) call is unanswered or busy, the call will be transferred
to the alternate attendant console, if one has been assigned.
USING THE HEADSET
If you have a heavy call-handling load, you may want to use a headset and
headset adapter. (For more information about the headset and the headset adapter
that connects the headset to the voice terminal, see Section 5, “Reference.”)
To place a call using your headset:
1
Touch On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
The green light next to the button goes on.
2
Dial the outside number.
To answer a call:
1
Touch On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
To mute the microphone:
1
Hold down On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
To hang up:
1
Touch Off on the headset adapter.
The green light next to On/Quiet goes off.
Handling Calls
4-9
SPEAKERPHONE
PERFORMANCE TIPS
For optimal use of the speakerphone on the BIS, HFAI, or SP voice terminals,
follow these guidelines:
●
Place the voice terminal in an area with low background noise.
Room acoustics and background noise may affect the proper operation of
your voice terminal’s speakerphone. High background noise is caused by
loud voices and loud electronic devices (radios, typewriters, office
equipment, etc.).
4-10 Handling Calls
●
Keep the area under and next to the microphone free of books and papers.
●
Let one person talk at a time. When both parties speak at the same time,
transmission can be broken.
●
Always face your terminal when talking.
●
Place your voice terminal at least six inches away from the edge of the desk
or table upon which it rests.
Section 5: Reference
MERLIN Plus System Features
Your MERLIN Plus system offers features that provide effective telephone
service both on a business-wide and personal basis. In order to meet company
priorities and needs, the system administrator can assign lines and add features
that will benefit the whole system. The voice terminals (telephones) in the
MERLIN Plus system come ready to use with many preassigned features, such
as Transfer and Hold. However, people in your system can also add features to
their individual voice terminals, such as Privacy or Saved Number Dial, that will
help them handle calls easily and efficiently.
The information included in each feature description in “MERLIN Plus System
Features” is divided into five headings:
●
Description
The description of the feature tells what it does and its advantages for those
people using it.
●
Considerations
Special considerations include any qualifications the person using the feature
should know about. It also includes ways in which the feature can or cannot
be used, or other features it can be or cannot be used with.
●
Administration
Administration procedures tell the system administrator how to administer
the features using the administrator/attendant console. For complete
information on system administration, refer to Section 3, “Administering the
System.”
●
Programming
The term “Programming” refers to customizing a voice terminal to suit the
needs of the person who will be using it. Brief programming instructions and
programming codes are included for each programmable feature. Directions
for programming features onto available programmable buttons on a voice
terminal also appear in the MERLIN Plus System User’s Guide.
●
How to Use
Procedures for using each feature are divided into specific steps so that a
person can easily and efficiently use his or her voice terminal.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-1
Abbreviated Ringing
DESCRIPTION
When another line rings while you are busy on a call, your voice terminal rings
only once. In this way you are aware that you have another call, but it does not
interrupt the call in progress.
After the ringing cycle stops, the green light continues to flash to remind you of
the other call.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
If you want to pick up the new call, you can place the call in progress on hold or
Exclusive Hold and touch the line button of the new call. You don’t need to
hang up first.
5-2 MERLIN Plus System Features
Account Number Entry
DESCRIPTION
You can use account numbers to identify the department, project, or client to
whom the call should be charged. If your system uses the Call Report feature
(often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording [SMDR]), you can
include these account numbers in the Call Reports. (See “Call Report.”)
There are two methods you can use to enter account numbers on a printed
Call Report: a quick method and a general method. Most businesses will be
satisfied with the quick method of entering account numbers on a Call Report.
The general method is recommended for businesses that have many accounts, or
in which there is no central accounting organization and users must invent their
own codes.
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
Option A—The General Method: The general method of entering an
account number on a Call Report is to use a programmed Account Number
Entry button. While you have a call in progress, you simply touch the
Account Number Entry button (a light goes on beside the button so that you
know the account number will be entered) and dial all the digits of the
account number. You can also program buttons or speed dial codes for
frequently used account numbers. If necessary, you can dial extra numbers
for subaccounts.
Option B—The Quick Method: The quick method of entering an account
number on a Call Report is to dial a System Speed Dial code (60 through 89
or 900 through 999) that the system administrator has stored in the system
(see “System Speed Dial”) or a 3-character Personal Speed Dial code that
you have assigned to an account number (see “Personal Speed Dial”).
While you have a call in progress, you simply dial the speed dial code that
corresponds with the account code. You can dial the code with one touch by
programming a System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial button.
This feature can be used only with outside calls; it cannot be used with
intercom calls.
If the system administrator has specified that the Call Report feature does not
report incoming calls, account codes can be entered only for outgoing calls.
There is a maximum of 16 characters available for an Account Number Entry.
The system beeps twice if the administrator attempts to enter more than
16 characters. If the administrator dials fewer than 16 characters, the system
does not beep.
The system administrator should give a copy of the System Speed Dial code
assignments to each person in the system who will use those codes.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-3
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
ADMINISTRATION
Before you assign a System Speed Dial code (#60 through #89 or #900 through
#999) to a specific account number, refer to the System Speed Dial Form that
you have filled out.
To administer Account Number Entry codes:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial the System Speed Dial code (#60 to #89 or #900 through #999) that you
are assigning to the account number. Make certain that you have not already
assigned a telephone number to that speed dial code, unless you are making a
change.
3
Dial *88.
4
Dial the account number.
You can also use a client’s telephone number as an account number. For that
purpose dial *88 and then dial the telephone number.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
PROGRAMMING
6
Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account number or telephone number to
which you are assigning a System Speed Dial code.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
To program a general Account Number Entry button (program this feature on a
button with lights):
1
2
Label the button Account Number Entry.
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *82.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Acct. No.
Entry
82
To program a button for a specific account number or System Speed Dial code
assigned to an account number:
1
Label the button Account Number plus the name of a client or project.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
5-4 MERLIN Plus System Features
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *88 plus the account number.
or
Dial *95 plus the System Speed Dial code (60 though 89 and 900 through
999) from a list that your administrator can give you.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Acct. No.
Acme Co.
88
HOW TO USE
acct. no.
To use a general Account Number Entry button:
1
While you have a call in progress, touch Account Number Entry.
The green light next to the button goes on.
2
3
Dial the account number of the account to be charged for the call.
or
Dial a System Speed Dial code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999)
for the account number to which you want to charge the call.
Touch Account Number Entry again.
The green light goes off.
Acct. No.
Entry
Acct. No.
Entry
acct. no.
If you enter the account code incorrectly, keep the call in progress and follow
this procedure:
1
Touch Account Number Entry twice.
The green light goes off and back on again.
2
Dial *.
3
Dial the account number correctly.
4
Touch Account Number Entry again.
The green light goes off.
Account
No. Entry
Account
No. Entry
Account
No. Entry
Acct. No.
To use a button for a specific account number:
1
While you have a call in progress, touch the programmed Account Number
button for the particular account number to be recorded.
Acct. No.
Acme Co.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-5
Allowed Lists
DESCRIPTION
When the system is installed, people can use their voice terminals to place
intercom, local, and toll calls. However, the system administrator can restrict
any voice terminal to intercom or local calls. (See “Call Restriction.”)
If restricted voice terminals require additional calling access, the administrator
can designate a list of numbers (an Allowed List) that people may call despite
the established restrictions.
CONSIDERATIONS
Allowed Lists help you control the cost of your monthly phone bill, but still
allow you to place all the business calls you need from any voice terminal in
your system.
The administrator may decide to stem one or more System Speed Dial codes
with Restriction Override. All voice terminals in the system can use those codes
as a type of password that allows the person to dial certain outside numbers.
Those numbers may be called regardless of toll or outward call restrictions
previously placed on a voice terminal. (See “System Speed Dial.”)
The system administrator can establish eight Allowed Lists for the system.
They are numbered 01 through 08 and each can have a maximum of 10 entries,
numbered 01 through 10. Each entry may consist of a toll prefix, if necessary
(1 or 0), an area code (for example, 201), and/or an exchange code (for example,
834), and/or emergency numbers (for example, 911). When the administrator
has dialed the maximum eight digits for an Allowed List entry, the system beeps
twice to remind the administrator that he or she cannot dial any more digits.
If the administrator dials fewer than eight digits, the system does not beep.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
Before you administer Allowed Lists for your system, refer to the Allowed List
Form that you have filled out.
To setup an Allowed List:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial a * and a 2-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the number of
the list.
For example, to add an entry to List 5, dial *05.
3
Dial the 2-digit number of the item in the Allowed List (between 01 and 10).
For example, to add an entry to List 3 as the first item on the list, dial *03 01.
4
Dial the number, toll-prefix and area code if necessary, or exchange to be
added to the list (maximum eight digits).
For example, to add the 201 area code with the toll-prefix, and 834 exchange
to List 2 as the seventh item on the list, dial *02 07 1 201 834.
5-6 MERLIN Plus System Features
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
01-
T
01-10
08
are code
P
Administer
To delete an entry from an Allowed List:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial a * and a 2-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the number of
the list.
3
Dial the 2-digit item number (01 through 10) of the entry you want to delete.
For example, to delete the eighth entry of List 1, dial *01 08.
4
Touch Drop.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Drop
Administer
01-
T
08
01-10
P
Administer
To clear all the entries from an Allowed List:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial a * and a 2-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the number of
the list you want to clear.
For example, to clear all entries from List 6, dial *06.
3
Touch Drop.
The console beeps twice.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-7
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Drop
Administer
01-
T
08
P
Adminster
Before you assign Allowed Lists to voice terminals in your system, refer to the
Call Restrictions, Allowed and Disallowed Lists Forms that you have filled out.
Then use the following procedures to assignor remove voice terminals for
access to Allowed Lists:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial a * and a 2-digit code (01 through 08) that corresponds to the list you
want to assign to the voice terminal.
3
Dial 00.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for each voice terminal to which this
list is already assigned.
For example, to assign List 2 to a voice terminal, dial *0200.
4
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button, if you have one, for the voice terminal
for which you are giving access or removing access to the Allowed List.
Green light on = the list is assigned to the voice terminal
Green light off = the list is not assigned to the voice terminal
>
5
If you do not have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal that
you want to assign the list to or remove the list from, use the code from
the dial code chart in Section 3.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
John 12
01-
T
08
00
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Ask your system administrator what call restrictions, if any, he or she has
assigned to your voice terminal.
5-8 MERLIN Plus System Features
Alternate Attendant
DESCRIPTION
You can assign a voice terminal, other than intercom 10, to be used as an
Alternate Attendant. When Direct Extension Dialing (DXD) calls are busy or do
not answer, they can be directed to the Alternate Attendant position. All other
calls are directed to the main attendant position. When an Alternate Attendant
position is assigned, System Answer must be activated from there.
CONSIDERATIONS
The alternate attendant console position can do anything the main attendant
position can do, except turn on message lights at voice terminals and perform
administration procedures.
The only calls transferred to the alternate attendant console are DXD calls that
are busy, dialed incorrectly, or unanswered.
The Alternate Attendant cannot be designated if your system has a
MERLIN Attendant.
The System Answer (SA) feature must be off when assigning the alternate
attendant position.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this section.
To assign an alternate attendant position:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *79.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice
terminal you want to assign as the alternate attendant console.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P to the center position.
T
■
■
■
■
P
Administer
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
★ 70
T
Auto
Intercom
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-9
PROGRAMMING
If you will be using the System Answer feature, see “System Answer” later in
this section, you must program the SA button. Only the attendant or the alternate
attendant can have the SA button.
1
2
Label the button “System Answer.”
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *58.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
System
Answer
58
HOW TO USE
To activate System Answer from the Alternate Attendant position:
1
Touch System Answer.
Green light on = SA on
Green light off = SA off
Green light flashing = Problem with SA
System
Answer
If the green light next to the System Answer button is flashing, notify the system
administrator who should refer to Section 7, “Troubleshooting,” to correct the
problem.
5-10 MERLIN Plus System Features
Auto Answer-All
NOTE:
This feature requires a General Purpose Adapter and can be used with a
modem, an answering machine, a facsimile machine, or a cordless
telephone.
DESCRIPTION
If you want an optional piece of equipment, such as a modem, an answering
machine, or a facsimile machine, connected to your voice terminal, to turn on
automatically when you receive ringing calls, you need to program an
Auto Answer-All button.
CONSIDERATIONS
You cannot have both the Auto Answer-All and Auto Answer-Intercom features
activated at the same time. If you have a Hands-Free Unit (HFU) and
Auto Answer-All is activated, all incoming calls will be answered at once.
This feature only answers ringing incoming calls. It will not answer voice
announced calls. You should program Voice Announcement Disable on your
voice terminal if you want all your incoming calls to ring. (See “Voice
Announcement Enable/Disable” later in this section for more information.)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
Program the Auto Answer-All feature on a button with lights.
To program an Auto Answer-All button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Auto Answer-All.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *75.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Auto Ans.All
P
75
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-11
HOW TO USE
To have a modem, answering machine, or facsimile machine answer calls
automatically:
1
Touch Auto Answer-All.
The green light next to the button goes on.
Auto Ans.All
This feature remains active until you:
1
Touch Auto Answer-All again.
The green light next to the button goes off.
Auto Ans.All
5-12 MERLIN Plus System Features
Auto Answer-Intercom
NOTE:
This feature is used with a Hands-Free Unit.
DESCRIPTION
If your voice terminal has the Hands-Free-Answer-on-Intercom (HFAI) feature
or is connected to a Hands-Free Unit (HFU), you can have your speakerphone go
on automatically whenever you receive an intercom call. To do this with an
HFU, you must program an Auto Answer-Intercom button.
CONSIDERATIONS
You can have both Auto Answer-Intercom and Auto Answer-All programmed
for your voice terminal, but both features cannot be activated at the same time.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
Program the Auto Answer-Intercom feature on a button with lights.
To program an Auto Answer-Intercom button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Auto Answer-Intercom.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *70.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Auto Ans.Intercom
70
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-13
HOW TO USE
To have your hands-free unit turn on automatically when you receive intercom
calls with voice announcement:
1
Touch HFAI or Auto Answer-Intercom.
The green light next to the button goes on.
Auto Ans.Intercom
To return to answering calls yourself
1
Touch HFAI or Auto Answer-Intercom again.
The green light next to the button goes off.
Auto Ans.Intercom
5-14 MERLIN Plus System Features
Auto Intercom
DESCRIPTION
You can use an Auto Intercom button for one-touch dialing of intercom numbers.
Program any 2-digit intercom number onto an Auto Intercom button and use the
button whenever you want to call the intercom number.
CONSIDERATIONS
In the MERLIN Plus system, you place an intercom call with a voice
announcement. Your co-worker hears your voice through the voice terminal
speaker and can respond to you without lifting the handset. If the co-worker
does not have a BIS model voice terminal or HFAI enabled, he or she cannot
respond to you without lifting the handset.
However, if the person you are calling has activated the Voice Announcement
Disable feature, your intercom call rings rather than beeps at the person’s
voice terminal.
You cannot announce an intercom call to a person active on the
voice terminal’s speaker.
You cannot have both an Auto Intercom button and a Manual Signaling button
for the same person. If you try to program both, you deactivate the one that you
programmed earlier. You can use either feature to place an intercom call.
(See “Manual Signaling.”)
If you program this feature onto a button with lights, the green light next to the
button goes on when the person at that intercom number uses the voice terminal
or uses the Do Not Disturb feature. When the person calls you, the green light
next to the person’s Auto Intercom button flashes.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
A button with lights is recommended but not required for the
Auto Intercom feature.
To program an Auto Intercom button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button with a name and intercom number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *91 plus an intercom number.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
John 12
91
Icom no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-15
HOW TO USE
To place an intercom call with one touch:
1
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the intercom number you want to dial.
2
If you hear a short beep, begin speaking or lift your handset. If you hear a
long beep, wait for someone to answer on the other end.
John 12
Speakerphone
If the line is busy or if no one answers:
1
Touch Speakerphone to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
5-16 MERLIN Plus System Features
Automatic Call Restriction Reset
DESCRIPTION
Use Automatic Call Restriction Reset to ensure the integrity of assigned
call restrictions.
CONSIDERATIONS
None.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this section.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *11 plus the line button you want to reset.
Green light on = line is restriction reset.
Green light off = line is not restriction reset. (System default.)
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
555-1234
11
T
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Ask your system administrator what call restrictions, if any, he or she has
assigned to your voice terminal.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-17
Automatic Line Selection
DESCRIPTION
You can program the order in which your system selects outside lines when you
touch Speakerphone or lift your handset to place a call. For example, you can
program the line you use most often to be the first line in the Automatic Line
Selection sequence. A line you use less often can be programmed to be the next
line the system selects. Then, when you touch Speakerphone or lift your
handset, the system automatically selects the line you usually use. If that line is
busy, the system then selects your second choice, such as a WATS or Readyline,
unless that line is busy too, and so on.
You can include all or only some of your outside lines in an Automatic Line
Selection sequence.
CONSIDERATIONS
If you plan to program other features when you program Automatic Line
Selection, you must program Automatic Line Selection first. If you are already
in the middle of a programming session, slide the T/P switch to the center
position and then back to P before programming this feature.
The Automatic Line Selection order is only for outside lines; the line selection
does not include intercom lines. However, if you remove all outside lines from
your Automatic Line Selection sequence, your system will select an intercom
line when you touch Speakerphone or lift the handset. (See “Intercom
Preference.”)
If you don’t program an Automatic Line Selection sequence, you will get outside
lines according to the sequence in which they are plugged into the control unit.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program an Automatic Line Selection sequence for your voice terminal:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
2
Dial **.
3
Touch the line buttons in the order you prefer.
4
If you want to continue programming other features, dial ** again.
Otherwise slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
555-1234
5-18 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
HOW TO USE
When you want to place an outside call:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
The MERLIN Plus system connects you to the first available line in the Automatic Line
Selection sequence.
Speakerphone
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-19
Automatic System Access (ASA)
DESCRIPTION
Automatic System Access (ASA) includes four features that allow more flexible
use of your MERLIN plus system and your outside lines. The features are
described in this section under separate entries:
●
Call Forwarding (CF)
When the system is in CF mode, incoming calls on designated lines are
connected to a Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP) in the control unit for a
message. Meanwhile, the control unit calls the telephone number to which
calls are being forwarded and uses the system’s Conference feature to
connect the incoming call to the outgoing call.
●
Direct Extension Dialing (DXD)
When you put the system in DXD mode, the control unit connects incoming
calls on designated lines to the VSP for a message. Meanwhile, the caller
dials the extension number (a 2-digit intercom number), and the control unit
transfers the call to that extension.
●
System Answer (SA)
When the attendant or the alternate attendant activates the System Answer
button, selected incoming calls are answered automatically and placed on
hold. The system administrator can choose to have the caller hear a special
message before being placed on hold or, if connected to a compatible
audio-source, a pre-recorded message or music can be played instead.
●
Remote Line Access (RLA)
When the system is in RLA mode, you can call in from outside and use a
password to gain access to one of the system’s outside lines. You can also
use the RLA feature to change the telephone number to which calls are being
forwarded during CF operation. The VSP prompts you through the necessary
procedures.
CONSIDERATIONS
If your Central Office (CO) or PBX does not provide a “forward disconnect” on
the serving lines, you must use the Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access
Disconnect Timer to set a disconnect interval for CF and RLA.
All lines in the system must be assigned to the ASA port.
Refer to the individual features in this section for specific considerations for
each feature. ASA features work differently when used in conjunction with the
MERLIN Attendant.
5-20 MERLIN Plus System Features
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
ASA Jack Assignment
The Automatic System Access features require a dedicated jack on the control
unit into which you can plug one end of the Auto Access cord. The cord also
plugs into the memory module where the Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP) is
located. The VSP provides taped messages to callers when ASA features are
being used. At startup, jack 18 is automatically assigned to ASA. To change the
assignment, use the following procedures:
NOTE:
You cannot assign jack 19, usually assigned to Busy Buster and/or
Call Report, unless you have reassigned the jack for these features.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *59.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to ASA.
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the jack you want to assign to ASA.
The green light goes off next to the button for the old number, and the green light goes on
next to the button for the new number. If you hear a denial tone, the feature is on or the
VSP port is active. Either wait or turn off the feature.
>
4
Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to
assign to ASA.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
59
T
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
Refer to the individual features in this section.
HOW TO USE
Refer to the individual features in this section.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-21
Auxiliary Lines
DESCRIPTION
The MERLIN Plus system provides an auxiliary jack, labeled “AUX,” at the top
of each Line Module. This auxiliary line is bridged directly to outside Line A or
Line E, and does not go through the MERLIN Plus system control unit. You can
connect accessory devices to the system, and use these devices independently of
the system. These devices include:
●
●
●
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
Basic Telephones — During an electrical power outage, your MERLIN Plus
system will not function. However, you can plug a basic telephone
(not a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal) into the AUX jack, and use it to
place and receive calls on Line A or Line E.
Facsimile Machines —You can also plug a facsimile machine into the
AUX jack. When calls come in on Line A or Line E, the FAX machine will
respond to them as it would if plugged into any other outside telephone line.
Modems and Computers —You can plug a modem into the AUX line and
use it for transmitting and receiving data on Line A or Line E. The modem
will function on this line as it would on any other outside telephone line.
When using a modem, it is important that you prevent other employees from
using voice terminals connected to Line A or Line E since this could interfere
with data transmissions. You can program Line A or Line E for privacy
(see “Privacy on Lines A and E“), thus preventing others from bridging onto
calls on Line A or Line E. To have the modem answer incoming calls
automatically, simply set it up for auto-answer as you would on any
telephone line. You can place outside calls with the modem either by
connecting a basic telephone and dialing manually, or by using the modem’s
autodial capabilities.
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf and Dictation Machines —You
can plug these devices into the AUX jack and transmit or receive data on
Line A or Line E. The machines will respond as if they were plugged into
any other outside telephone line.
Answering Machines —You can plug an answering machine into the
AUX jack so that when calls come in on line A or Line E, the answering
machine will record messages as it would if plugged into any other outside
telephone line.
When a call comes in on Line A or Line E, it will ring both on the voice terminal
that is assigned to Line A or Line E and on any device connected to the auxiliary
jack bridged to Line A or Line E. If you are using the auxiliary line for a device
such as a FAX or modem, you may want to use the No Ring option (see “Ringing
Options”) to prevent calls from ringing on a voice terminal connected to Line A
or Line E. This will prevent employees from answering calls that should be
going to the accessory device connected to the auxiliary line.
If you do not want the accessory device to ring on incoming calls, you can
simply turn it off or set it not to ring, and program Line A or Line E for normal
ringing.
You cannot use a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal on the auxiliary jack.
You cannot connect a loudspeaker paging system into the auxiliary jack.
5-22 MERLIN Plus System Features
The system administrator can administer the privacy feature for Line A and/or
Line E so that no one else in the system can bridge onto or monitor these lines
while a call is active on them. For more information, see “Privacy (on Lines
A and E).”
ADMINISTRATION
If you want calls that come in on the line connected to an auxiliary jack to ring at
that device but not at any other voice terminal that has the same line assigned to
it, program the other voice terminals to not ring on that line.
(See “Ringing Options.”)
If you don’t want calls that come in on the line connected to an auxiliary jack to
ring at that device, you will have to see if the device has a switch to turn off the
ring and set it accordingly.
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Use the basic telephone, facsimile machine, or modem and computer connected
to the auxiliary jack as you normally would.
Plug in the auxiliary telephone whenever you want to bridge or monitor
Line A or Line E.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-23
Bridging
DESCRIPTION
If you share a line with another person, you can join (or “bridge” onto) a call in
progress on that line. In this way you can easily join a conference call by just
touching a line button and Speakerphone or lifting your handset.
(See “Conference.”)
CONSIDERATIONS
Up to three people connected to the MERLIN Plus system, including the
originator of the call, can bridge onto a call atone time. When a person bridges
onto a call in progress, the red and green lights next to the line button on your
voice terminal flash alternately so that you know that someone else has joined
the call.
You cannot use the Bridging feature on a voice terminal with Button-Free
Line Operation.
If a person has activated the Privacy feature on his or her voice terminal, you
cannot bridge onto a call in progress at that voice terminal. (See “Privacy.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To bridge onto a call in progress:
1
Touch the line button associated with the call.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
555-1234
5-24 MERLIN Plus System Features
Speakerphone
Busy Buster (BB)
DESCRIPTION
The Busy Buster feature automatically redials the number you most recently
dialed up to ten times at 60-second intervals. If the called telephone begins to
ring within this time, your voice terminal alerts you. To use this feature, the
system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voice terminal jack on
the control unit, a connection must have been made from that voice terminal jack
to the BB jack on the memory module, and a button must be programmed at each
applicable voice terminal.
CONSIDERATIONS
The Busy Buster feature is shared by everyone in the MERLIN Plus system.
When you and other people in your system use this feature at the same time,
the system places the telephone number each person has dialed in a queue.
The system then dials each number in the queue.
The system redials the call on the same line on which the call was placed. If you
use a stop character in the dialing sequence of a System Speed Dial number, you
cannot use Busy Buster to retry the number for you.
Each person in the system can have only one Busy Buster number active
at a time.
If you or someone else places or accepts another call on a voice terminal that has
activated Busfy Buster, the system will continue to try to complete the call, even
though your voice terminal is in use. When the BB call goes through, the voice
terminal will alert you with an abbreviated ring even if you’re on another call.
If you are using an SP-34 or an SP-34D voice terminal, Busy Buster can only be
programmed onto one of the two rows of buttons above the dial pad.
Occasionally when Busy Buster is activated the voice terminal rings even when
the call was not connected. This is due to noisy Central Office lines that can
provide false indications to the MERLIN Plus system.
When a Busy Buster call is answered, your voice terminal is alerted. If there is a
significant delay between the time that the called party answers and the time you
pick up your alerting voice terminal, the party you called may become confused
by the silence and hang up. Therefore, if you are expecting a Busy Buster call,
you may want to activate the Do Not Disturb feature so that only transfer return
calls, which include Busy Buster calls, will ring at your voice terminal.
If you activate Busy Buster for a number that is in the same local exchange as
the number you’re calling from, there is a chance that when successful, the call
will be answered so quickly that the exchange network cannot provide the
information to alert your voice terminal. The party you called could become
confused and hang up.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-25
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
The system is factory-set to have the Busy Buster feature assigned to voice
terminal jack 19 on the control unit. However, you can use the following
procedure to assign the feature to any other voice terminal jack in the system,
except jack 10.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *35.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to
which the Busy Buster feature will be assigned.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button to which the feature will be assigned.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
6
Make sure the BB jack is moved to the corresponding voice terminal jack
you’ve just assigned.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
35
T
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
This feature requires a button with lights.
To program a button on your voice terminal for the Busy Buster feature:
1
Label the button Busy Buster.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
Touch the button you want to program.
4 Dial *31 (you do not need to dial an outside number).
5 Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
3
T
P
T
Busy
Buster
31
5-26 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
HOW TO USE
If the number you are calling is busy and you want to use the BB feature, follow
this procedure:
1
Before you hang up, touch the Busy Buster button.
The green light next to the Busy Buster button flashes.
2
Hang up.
Busy
Buster
When the dialed number rings, your voice teminal rings. To begin the call:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset.
Speakerphone
If you no longer want to have the system repeatedly redial the last number you
dialed, you can deactivate the feature.
1
Without lifting the handset, touch Busy Buster.
The green light next to the button goes off.
Busy
Buster
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-27
Button-Free Line Operation
DESCRIPTION
Button-Free Line Operation allows people with a 5-button or any 10-button
voice terminal to access lines, even though the lines do not appear on the voice
terminal buttons. Therefore, those voice terminals have additional free buttons
for needed programmed features. This feature is ideal for people who need
several lines, but who rarely handle more than one call at a time. To place or
answer a call, they just lift their handset, and the MERLIN Plus system selects a
free line for outgoing calls or the ringing line for incoming calls.
CONSIDERATIONS
The system administrator can assign a maximum of eight lines to a button-free
voice terminal. However, if the administrator again wants lines assigned to
buttons on a voice terminal, he or she can assign only the number of lines for
which the voice terminal has line buttons. For example, if the administrator has
assigned eight lines to a 5-button voice terminal with Button-Free Line
Operation and decides to assign lines to voice terminal buttons, only four of
those eight lines can appear. The features that the administrator or user has
programmed onto the voice terminal buttons will be replaced by lines.
With Button-Free Line Operation, the system administrator can administer the
individual voice terminals so that they ring or do not ring when calls come in.
(See “Ringing Options.”) Button-Free Line Operation with the no ring option is
appropriate for voice terminals in public places, such as lobbies.
When anyone in your system uses the Button-Free Line Operation feature:
●
●
●
●
●
ADMINISTRATION
There are no red and green lights associated with lines to keep track of
call-handling features, such as Transferor Hold.
The person with Button-Free Line Operation can answer transferred calls and
ringing lines by picking up the handset.
There is no way of knowing which line the system has selected for an
outgoing call. Therefore, make sure that all lines assigned to these voice
terminals are of the same type. Do not mix regular lines, WATS lines,
and Foreign Exchange lines.
You cannot program an Automatic Line Selection sequence on voice
terminals with Button-Free Line Operation. In this case, only your system
administrator can assign the sequence of lines for your voice terminal.
You can use the Intercom, Hold, Transfer, and Call Pickup features, but you
cannot use the Bridging or the Conference feature.
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To make lines on a voice terminal button-free:
1
5-28 MERLIN Plus System Features
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal you are administering.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button. Green lights go on next to the buttons
of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
3
Touch the line button until the green light next to it shows the line
assignment you want:
Green light on = the line is assigned to the voice terminal
Green light off = the line is not assigned to the voice terminal
4
To make the line Button-Free, dial one of these two codes:
>
Dial *31 if you want the voice terminal to ring.
The green light next to the Auto intercom button flashes rapidly.
>
Dial *32 if you do not want the voice terminal to ring.
The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flashes slowly.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
Susan 15
555-1234
31 or
T
32
P
Administer
To remove Button-Free Line Operation by reassigning lines to separate buttons
on a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you are administering.
3
Dial *34.
A green light should go on next to the lines that have been assigned to the voice terminal.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
Susan 15
34
T
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-29
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
If you do not have a line button for a call that you have received or that has been
transferred to you, you can still put the call on hold using the Hold button. To
retrieve the call, you can use the Hold Retrieve feature. (See “Hold Retrieve.”)
5-30 MERLIN Plus System Features
Call Forwarding (CF)
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Call Forwarding is an ASA feature and therefore requires the
assignment of the ASA jack. If the ASA jack assignment has not yet
been made, refer to “Automatic System Access” in this section before
attempting to administer this feature.
When in CF mode, incoming calls on designated lines are connected to the
Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP), then while the caller is listening to the
message, the control unit dials the telephone number where calls are being
forwarded. When the person at the CF number answers, the system then uses the
conferencing feature to connect the two calls, and the call progresses normally.
You have the option to change the message or you can have calls forwarded
without the message so that callers are unaware that their calls are being
forwarded. You can also change the call forwarding number from any
Touch-Tone phone.
CONSIDERATIONS
Call Forwarding requires the following:
●
A programmed button with green and red lights labeled CF/DXD.
You use the CF/DXD button to activate either Call Forwarding or Direct
Extension Dialing (discussed later in this section). To put the system in
either of these modes, or in normal mode, you touch the CF/DXD button.
The green and red lights show you what mode you are in.
NOTE:
>
Direct Extension Dialing does not work with the
MERLIN Attendant.
If the system is in normal mode, touch the button twice to put the system
in CF mode
Only red light on = CF mode
NOTE:
>
You must first assign a CF number before touching the CF/DXD
button to put the system in CF mode.
Touch the button a third time to put the system back into normal mode.
Green and red light off = normal mode
●
A valid 5-digit password to gain access from a remote location to enter a call
forwarding number or to change the current call forwarding number.
To enter a password, follow the administration procedure discussed later in
this entry.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-31
●
That there can be more than one CF/DXD button in the system, but a
voice terminal can have only one CF/DXD button:
If two or more users have a CF/DXD button programmed on their voice
terminals, each of them can turn the features on and off. For example, if one
of these users activates Call Forwarding, the red light goes on next to the
CF/DXD button on all the voice terminals that have that button. When a
person deactivates the feature by touching the CF/DXD button, the light goes
off next to the button on all the voice terminals that have the programmed
CF/DXD button.
●
A synthesized voice message:
This message is automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit.
The administrator can modify the message when necessary or may choose to
turn off the message.
●
That one jack on the control unit be dedicated to the ASA features.
See “Automatic System Access” in this section for administration
procedures.
●
That you administer at least one line to an incoming and one line to an
outgoing line group:
At startup, none of the system’s lines are assigned to the CF incoming or
outgoing line group.
●
●
●
●
5-32 MERLIN Plus System Features
If there is only one line in the incoming line group and one line in the
outgoing line group, they cannot be the same line. The green light next to the
CF button will flash when you try to turn it on.
When the system is in CF mode, the feature’s operation affects only those
calls that come in on lines in the CF incoming line group. Likewise, the
system only uses the lines in the CF outgoing line group to forward calls.
Calls coming in on lines not assigned to the CF incoming line group are not
automatically answered for call forwarding.
Call Forwarding should be used only at night if your system has one or more
MERLIN Attendants, and you do not have dedicated lines for Call
Forwarding. To use Call Forwarding at night with the MERLIN Attendant,
activate this feature before leaving the office at the end of the business day,
and deactivate it as soon as your business day begins.
The Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer should be used
in conjunction with CF if your Central Office (CO) does not provide a
“forward disconnect” signal to your MERLIN Plus system. (See “Call
Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer” in this section.)
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
Call Forwarding Line Groups
At startup, none of the system’s outside lines are assigned to the CF incoming or
outgoing line group. To use this feature YOU must assign line(s) to each group.
NOTE:
To use Call Forwarding with the MERLIN Attendant, you should have
one outgoing line for each incoming line in every Call Forwarding line
group.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial the code for the type of line group list you want to administer:
> CF incoming line group, dial *51
Green light on = line is assigned to the group
Green ligh off = line is not assigned to the group
>
For a CF outgoing line group, dial *52
Green light on = line is assigned to the group
Green light off = line is not assigned to the group
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for
the line group.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
51 or
T
52
P
Administer
MERLiN Plus System Features
5-33
Voice Messages
The system automatically provides the following default voice message for call
forwarded calls:
“Your call is being forwarded. Please hold.”
You can modify this message to include the following statement:
“You have reached nnn...”
where nnn... is the telephone number of one of your outside lines. The number
can be up to 16 digits, including * or #. You can modify the message for all lines
in an incoming line group, or you can modify the message for some and leave
others unmodified. To modify the CF message for one or more lines in your
incoming line groups, do the following:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button for the line on which you want the modified message.
The green light goes on.
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
NOTE:
For special phone numbers, such as an 800 number, you may prefer
to have the recorded voice say “Eight hundred” followed by the
number, instead of “Eight, zero, zero.” In this case, you would touch
the Hold button to enter a pause after the toll prefix, then again after
the 800 area code, and again after the exchange. For example,
1-800-555-1212 would be entered as follows:
1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212
5
Repeat for other lines.
6
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
■
■
■
■
P
Administer
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
555-1234
50
T
CF no.
P
Administer
To return to the message provided with the system:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *50.
5-34 MERLIN Plus System Features
3
Touch the line button.
The green light goes off.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
50
T
P
Administer
You may also choose to forward your calls without a message:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *30.
3
Dial 0 to turn off the message.
To turn on the message, dial 1 instead of 0 in step 3.
NOTE:
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Administer
P
Administer
30
0 or 1
Numbers of Rings
To change the number of rings (the default is two rings) before the CF call is
answered:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *762 plus the number of rings (between 0 and 9) before CF
picks up the call.
NOTE:
3
If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal will not ring,
and the calls will be forwarded immediately.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
T
P
Administer
76207629
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-35
Passwords
You and others in your business need at least one valid 5-digit password in order
to change a call forwarding number from a remote location. The first two
numbers in the password are the caller’s intercom number.
To create or invalidate a password, follow this procedure:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *56
3
Perform the appropriate step below:
To create a password for a particular intercom number, dial a
MERLIN Plus system intercom number plus any three digits
except 000.
>
The console beeps twice.
To invalidate any password beginning with a particular intercom number,
dial the intercom number plus 000. Repeat the procedure for more
passwords.
>
The console beeps twice.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
56
Icom no.
+ 123
Call Forward Destination Number
You can enter or change the telephone number where you want calls forwarded
(the CF destination number) in either of two ways:
●
Follow the first procedure below to enter or change the CF destination
telephone number from the administrator/attendant console with the system
in administration mode.
●
Follow the second procedure below to enter or change the CF destination
telephone number from a phone outside the system with the system
in CF mode.
5-36 MERLIN Plus System Features
From the Administrator/Atfendant Console To enter, change, or delete the
CF destination telephone number from the administrator/attendant console,
follow this procedure.
1
Press CF/DXD to go into normal mode.
Green and red lights go off.
2
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
3
Dial *53.
4
Perform the appropriate step below:
5
>
To enter or change a CF destination telephone number, dial the new
number.
>
To remove the current CF destination number without replacing it with
another number, touch Administer.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
CF/DXD
To Add
Change
T
P
Administer
53
Administer
To Delete
From Outside the System To enter or change the CF destination number from
outside the system while the system is in CF, DXD, or RLA mode, follow this
procedure.
NOTE:
1
This procedure is available on the MERLIN Plus CF/RLA card,
so that you can refer to it when you’re changing the CF destination
while off-site.
Dial the telephone number for one of the lines in the CF incoming line group.
When the call is answered, you hear the CF voice message.
2
During the voice message, dial *#*.
The system goes into RLA mode, and the VSP asks you to enter your password.
NOTE:
3
If a voice prompt is not administered, the CF destination number
cannot be changed from outside the system.
At the voice prompt, enter your password.
The VSP arks you to enter a line number.
4
At the voice prompt, dial 00.
The VSP asks you to enter the new call forward number followed by a pound (#).
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-37
5
Dial the new CF telephone number plus a pound (#).
The VSP repeats the new number and asks you to either confirm it by dialing a * or deny it by
dialing 00.
6
Dial * to confirm, or dial 00 to return to step 5, above, and try again.
After receiving the confirmation signal, the VSP repeats the new number once more and
identifies it as the new call forward number
7
Hang up.
555-1234
#
PROGRAMMING
00
password
tel. no. + #
A button with a red light next to it is required for the CF feature.
To program a CF/DXD button on a voice terminal:
1
Label the button CF/DXD.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you’re programming and that you
can't place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *83.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
CF/DXD
83
HOW TO USE
Using the CF/DXD Button
Touching the CF/DXD button repeatedly cycles the system through DXD, CF,
and normal modes. The red and green lights next to the CF/DXD button will
help you recognize which mode the system is in.
Green and red light off = Normal mode
Only green light on = DXD mode
Only red light on = CF mode
Red light flashing = Problem with CF
If the red light next to the CF/DXD button is flashing, notify the system
administrator who should refer to Section 7, “Troubleshooting.”
To return to CF mode after an error has been corrected:
1
Touch CF/DXD three times.
The first time puts the system in normal mode; the second touch of the button puts the system
in DXD mode; the third touch puts the system in CF mode.
CF/DXD
5-38 MERLIN Plus System Features
CF/DXD
CF/DXD
Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer
DESCRIPTION
The Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer is used in
conjunction with the Call Forwarding and Remote Line Access features in
MERLIN Plus systems for which the Central Office (CO) lines do not provide a
forward disconnect signal. The timer disconnects calls made using
Call Forwarding and/or Remote Line Access after these calls reach a call
duration threshold that is set for the system. This threshold may be set between
1 and 99 minutes.
CONSIDERATIONS
The timer will disconnect a Call Forwarding or Remote Line Access call at the
administered interval, even if a conversation is in progress.
This feature should only be used if your CO lines do not provide a forward
disconnect signal (also known as a “held call disconnect signal”) of
450 msec or 50 msec.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this section,
To administer the Customer Administrable Timer:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *68.
3
Dial the desired three-digit timer value. You must dial 3 digits:
For example, to set the timer value to 1 minute, you must dial 001, a value of
10 minutes would be dialed 010, and a value of 120 minutes would be
dialed 120.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Administer
68
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
P
Administer
# 01 - # 99
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-39
Call Pickup
DESCRIPTION
If you want to pick up an intercom or outside call that is ringing at another voice
terminal, use the Call Pickup feature.
You can use this feature in three different ways:
CONSIDERATIONS
●
Option A —You can use a dial code and dial the intercom number of the
ringing voice terminal.
●
Option B —You can program a Call Pickup button and dial the intercom
number of the ringing voice terminal.
●
Option C —You can program a One-Touch Call Pickup button for a specific
voice terminal in your business so that when the person is away, you can
answer that person’s calls with one touch. You can program a Call Pickup
button for each voice terminal for which you need to answer calls.
If the line on which the call is coming in appears on a button on your voice
terminal, you do not need to use the Call Pickup feature to answer the call.
You can just touch the line button on which the call is ringing and then touch
Speakerphone or lift your handset.
If you want someone in the office, such as a guard, to answer calls that come in
after hours, program a Call Pickup button for calls that come in at the
administrator/attendant console. Since the attendant console has all the lines of
your MERLIN Plus system, the person answering calls after hours can pickup
all calls by touching the Call Pickup button whenever the attendant console
rings. If the person is in another part of the building, the attendant can connect
his or her console and an extra alert device to a Supplemental Alert Adapter
(see “Supplemental Alert Adapter” under “Accessory Equipment”), so that each
time a call comes in, an extra alert device goes on.
ADMINISTRATION
None
5-40 MERLIN Plus System Features
You do not need to program Option A.
PROGRAMMING
To program Option B:
1
2
Label the button Call Pickup.
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *85.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Call
Pickup
85
To program Option C:
1
2
Label the button Call Pickup plus an intercom number.
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *85 plus an intercom number.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Call
Pickup 18
85
HOW TO USE
P
Icom no.
You can use a programmed button or a dial code to pick up an intercom or
outside call at any other voice terminal in the system.
To pickup a call ringing at any other voice terminal using Option A:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
2
Dial #3.
3
Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal where the call is ringing.
Speakerphone
# 3
Icom no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-41
To pickup a call ringing at any other voice terminal using Option B:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
2
Touch the Call Pickup button you programmed above.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the
voice terminal at which the call is ringing.
Speakerphone
Call
Pickup
John 12
To pickup ringing calls at a specific voice terminal using Option C:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
2
Touch the One-Touch Call Pickup button you have programmed for the
voice terminal.
Speakerphone
5-42 MERLIN Plus System Features
Call
Pickup 18
Call Report
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
This feature is used with a MERLIN Plus system data collector and an
AT&T 475/476 or 572/573 printer or its equivalent.
The Call Report feature, often called Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR), enables a business to keep records of incoming and outgoing calls.
The information in a printed call report gives details about outgoing and
incoming calls: the date and time of each call, its duration, the line and voice
terminal on which the call was made or received, and the dialed numbers of the
outgoing call. Call reports are printed automatically as calls go out or come in.
This information helps a business build records of its telephone traffic patterns
and identify abuses in voice terminal privileges.
If an account code is entered when the call is made, the call report prints that
information for you. Account codes are helpful in billing customers and
different departments of the company for telephone calls that should be charged
to them. (See “Account Number Entry.”) The data collector and the printer can
also print a System Feature Report, a list of the features that have been
administered to the system (see “System Feature Report”). Figure 5-1 shows a
printout that contains several typical Call Reports. Each line beginning with “C”
represents an individual Call Report.
FIGURE 5-1 A Printout of Typical Call Reports.
TIME
CALLED NUMBER
DURATION
LN
STN
ACCOUNT
C 08 21 86 11:01
DATE
9090334
7879096565
00:01:13
8
11
32145677
00:06:24
6
15
11
C 08 21 86 11:05
C 08 21 86 13:15
00:13:06
4
C 08 21 86 14:05
4697896
00:09:00
3
12
C 08 22 86 09:43
IN
00:02:16
4
11
C 08 22 86 10:12
8889914321
C 08 22 86 11:15
IN
C 08 22 86 14:25
C 08 23 86 11:15
C 08 24 86 08:10
110869685679714?
110869685679714?
4697896
#67
00:12:18
7
14
00:17:09
3
00:08:15
4
12
11
00:19:11
3
12
00:12:14
5
18
63354324
63354324
Notes:
1
2
3
Column headings (DATE. TIME. etc.) do not appear on Call
Report printouts
An IN in the Called Number column indicates an incoming call
A ? at the end of a number in the Called Number column
indicates that the number called had more than the 15 reported
digits.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-43
As you can see from the reports in Figure 5-1, the system prints the number of
each outgoing call. If there’s a telephone number you’d like to keep private—
say, a number containing a long distance access code —you can give that number
a System Speed Dial code and mark it for privacy when you enter it during
system administration. Then the system will print the System Speed Dial code
instead of the telephone number on Call Reports, as the last Call Report in
Figure 5-1 shows. See “System Speed Dial” later in this section.
CONSIDERATIONS
The Call Report feature can only be invoked at the administrator/attendant
console.
When the system administrator administer the system for the Call Report
feature, he or she can set certain options for the feature.
●
●
The administrator should set the initial time and date, so that these details
appear correctly on the call report.
The system is set to have the data collector and the printer connected to voice
terminal jack 19 for the Call Report feature. However, the administrator can
administer the printer and connect it to any other voice terminal jack in the
system, except jack 10.
NOTE:
●
●
●
If you are using the same printer and data collector for both the
System Feature Report and the Call Report features and change the
voice terminal jack assignment, you must administer the new jack
assignment for both features. You cannot use the same jack that
you used for ASA but ASA can share the same jack assigned to BB
by using the adapter provided with the data collector. ASA and BB
jack assignments can be changed if necessary.
The administrator can select the type of calls that appear on the call report.
The system is factory-set to have no calls reported. However, the
administrator can set the system for reporting outgoing and incoming calls,
or for reporting only outgoing calls.
The system is set to record outgoing calls that last at least 1 minute.
However, the system administrator can change that setting for a longer
(up to 9 minutes) or shorter (as little as 10 seconds) minimum duration.
The administrator can also specify which System Speed Dial codes are
printed on call reports, and which ones will be private.
The entries on a call report are preceded by a “C.”
5-44 MERLIN Plus System Features
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
ADMINISTRATION
Before you administer the Call Reports options for your system, refer to the
System Configuration Form that you have filled out.
To administer the various Call Reports options for your system:
The Date and the Time
To set today’s date:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *80.
3
Dial two digits for the month (01 through 12).
4
Dial two digits for the day (01 through 31).
5
Dial two digits for the year (00 through 99).
For example, if the date is March 24, 1988, dial *80032488.
6
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
80
T
month
day
year
P
Administer
To set the current time:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *81.
3
Dial two digits for the hour (00 through 23).
4
Dial two digits for the minute (00 through 59).
For example, if the time is 2:16 A.M., dial *810216; if the time is 2:16 P.M.,
dial *81 14 16.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
81
T
hour
minute
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-45
Control Unit Jack Assignment for the Call Report Feature
To specify the voice terminal jack to which the data collector and the printer will
be connected:
NOTE:
1
2
The system is factory-set for jack 19.
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
Dial *82.
The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button that corresponds with the jack to
which the data collector and the printer are currently assigned.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to
which the data collector and printer are currently assigned.
The green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button that corresponds with the jack to
which the data collector and printer are currently assigned.
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to
which the data collector and the printer will be connected.
The green light next to hek button goes on.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
■
■
■
■
P
Administer
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Call
Report 29
Icom 19
82
T
P
Administer
Minimum Call Duration
To specify a minimum call duration other than 1 minute for call reporting:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *83.
3
Dial one digit from 0 to 9 for the number of minutes.
For example, to specify a minimum duration of 10 seconds, dial *830. To
specify a minimum duration of 9 minutes, dial *839.
NOTE:
4
Ten seconds is the shortest duration you can set under one minute.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
Administer
83
5-46 MERLIN Plus System Features
0-9
P
Type of Documented Calls
To specify the type of calls that will be documented (the system is set to have no
calls reported):
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *84.
3
Dial a number code 0 through 2 to specify the kind of calls to be reported
(the system is factory-set so that no calls are reported):
> If you do not want any calls reported, dial 0.
> If you want only outgoing calls reported, dial 1.
> If you want outgoing and incoming calls reported, dial 2.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
84
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
P
Administer
0-2
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-47
Call Restriction
DESCRIPTION
When the system is first installed, people can use their voice terminals to place
intercom, local, and toll calls. However, the system administrator can assign
either of two types of call restrictions for selected voice terminals:
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
Outward Call Restriction restricts voice terminals so that only intercom
calls can be placed.
Toll Call Restriction restricts voice terminals so that only intercom and
local calls can be placed.
Even if a voice terminal has Outward Call Restriction, the person can bridge
onto calls in progress, answer incoming calls, and place and receive intercom
calls.
If the outward call restrictions arc too limiting, the administrator can designate a
list of numbers that individuals may call beyond the established restrictions.
(See “Allowed Lists.”)
If the administrator decides to store a System Speed Dial code with Restriction
Override, all voice terminals in the system can use the code as a type of
password that allows the person to access the outside number, regardless of toll
or outward call restrictions previously placed on the voice terminal.
(See “System Speed Dial.”)
If there are two or more voice terminals in the system that will have the same
restrictions, the administrator can use the Copy feature to copy these restrictions
from one voice terminal to another. (See “Copy.”)
When administering call restrictions, the system administrator can use the
Automatic Call Restriction Reset feature to ensure the integrity of the assigned
restrictions. (See “Automatic Call Restriction Reset” in this section.)
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To administer call restrictions to a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice
terminal you want to restrict.
3
Touch Restrict until the green light beside it shows the kind of call
restriction you want the voice terminal to have.
Steady green light on = Unrestricted (all calls permitted)
Flashing green light = Toll restricted (local and intercom calls only)
Green light off = Outward restricted (intercom calls only)
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5-48 MERLIN Plus System Features
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each voice terminal you want to restrict.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Susan 15
Administer
T
Restrict
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Ask your system administrator what call restrictions, if any, he or she has
assigned to your voice terminal.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-49
Centralized Programming
DESCRIPTION
The Centralized Programming feature allows the system administrator the
convenience of programming features onto individual voice terminals directly
from the administrator/attendant console. In this way there is no need to go to
each voice terminal to do the programming. This feature is useful when the
administrator is assigning Ringing Options for incoming calls.
CONSIDERATIONS
The system administrator must be certain that the appropriate feature buttons on
the voice terminals are accurately labeled.
The voice terminal being programmed must be idle. If the voice terminal is busy
or in program mode, the administrator hears a beep at the administrator/attendant
console, indicating that he or she cannot use this feature until the voice terminal
is idle again.
This feature cannot be used to program station 10.
The system administrator can use the Program Mode Lock feature to prevent
people within the system from changing programming assignments on their
voice terminals. (See “Program Mode Lock.”)
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To program a feature onto a voice terminal from the administrator/attendant
console:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal you want to program.
3
Touch Conference.
Green lights go on next to the line buttons of lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
4
Follow the same steps to program the feature that you would follow if you
were at the voice terminal.
5
When you are finished programming the features for that voice terminal,
touch Conference again.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
5-50 MERLIN Plus System Features
John 12
Conference
P
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-51
Conference
DESCRIPTION
When you want people outside the MERLIN Plus system to join a call in
progress, you can use the Conference feature. You can set up a conference call
that includes up to two people from outside the MERLIN Plus system, up to two
people within the system, and yourself, a total of five people.
CONSIDERATIONS
People connected to the MERLIN Plus system can bridge onto an outside line
that is active on the conference call unless one of the participants has activated
the Privacy feature. However, when the maximum configuration of three people
within the system and two from outside is reached, attempts to add more people
will be denied.
Use the Drop button followed by touching the appropriate line button when you
want to selectively disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call.
(See “Drop.”) If you press the switchhook, you may end the conference call.
You cannot use the Conference feature for outside lines on a voice terminal with
Button-Free Line Operation.
If you attempt to add to a conference call a voice terminal that is busy on an
another call, you will hear busy tones, and the call is automatically dropped in
15 seconds. If the voice terminal dots not answer, you can drop the call by
touching Drop without disconnecting the person who is already apart of the
conference.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To setup a conference call when one outside line is already on the call:
1
Touch Conference.
2
Touch a free line button.
3
Dial the outside number of the person you want to add to the conference call.
Conference
555-1234
tel. no.
If you don’t want the person already connected to listen while you connect the
second person to the call:
1
Touch Hold.
2
Touch a free line button.
3
Dial the outside number of the second person you want to include in the
conference.
5-52 MERLIN Plus System Features
4
Announce the conference call through your speaker or handset.
5
Touch Conference.
6
Touch the line button for the line that you put on hold.
Hold
555-1234
Conference
555-1234
tel. no.
To rejoin the call:
1
Touch a line button associated with the call.
555-1234
To disconnect one participant from the call:
1
Touch Drop.
2
Touch the button of the line you want to disconnect.
Drop
555-1234
To add someone inside the system to the conference call:
1
Dial the person’s intercom number to request that he or she pick up the line
that the conference call is on. (See “Intercom.”)
Intercom
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-53
Copy
DESCRIPTION
If there are two or more voice terminals that require identical feature
assignments, the system administrator can use the Copy feature to copy the line
and programmable feature assignments from one voice terminal onto another.
CONSIDERATIONS
When the administrator uses the Copy feature, the MERLIN Plus system copies
the line assignments from one voice terminal to the other. Feature assignments
are always overwritten by lines.
Several other features are also copied during the Copy process: Ringing Options,
Voice Announcement Enable/Disable, Automatic Line Selection, Personalized
Ringing, Button-Free feature, and Call Restrictions except for Allowed Lists.
The “System Answer” button programmed for the System Answer feature cannot
be copied. If attempted, the corresponding button on the voice terminal you are
copying to will be blank.
If you have a 5-button voice terminal, you cannot copy any lines or feature onto
a larger voice terminal, or vice versa.
Except for the 5-button voice terminal, the administrator can copy the lines and
features from any small voice terminal onto a larger voice terminal. If you are
the system administrator, you might want to copy the button assignments from a
BIS-10 onto a BIS-22 voice terminal for example. You can also copy from a
large voice terminal to a smaller voice terminal. However, if you copy lines or
features from a large voice terminal onto a smaller voice terminal, such as from a
BIS-34 to a BIS-22, the system copies only those lines and/or features for which
there are corresponding buttons on the smaller voice terminal. For example, in
copying the lines and features from a BIS-34 voice terminal onto a BIS-22 voice
terminal, the system copies only those lines and/or features assigned to the three
left columns of buttons (the first 22 buttons) of the BIS-34 voice terminal.
The rightmost column of buttons on the BIS-34 voice terminal will not be copied
onto the smaller voice terminal.
Be sure to label the buttons on the voice terminal to which lines or features have
been copied.
If any voice terminal in the system is active on a call, you must wait until it is
idle before you can use Copy.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To copy line and feature assignments from one voice terminal to another:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice
terminal to which you want to copy line assignments.
3
Touch Copy.
5-54 MERLIN Plus System Features
4
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice
terminal from which you are copying line assignments.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
7
Be sure to label the new line assignments on the voice terminal to which you
did the copying.
T
P
Administer
John 12
T
Susan 15
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
Copy
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-55
Customized Line Assignment
DESCRIPTION
The system administrator can assign lines to any voice terminal in any order, or
choose not to assign particular lines to a voice terminal. The administrator can
use Customized Line Assignment if he or she wants to assign lines or groups of
lines to selected voice terminals with similar requirements for placing and
receiving calls. For example, this might include people within a particular
department who need the same line assignments as each other, but different from
line assignments of people in other departments. The administrator can also
assign personal lines so that no one else in the system has access to them.
(See “Personal Lines.”)
CONSIDERATIONS
If a person in a system with Customized Line Assignments does not have a
particular line assigned to his or her voice terminal, he or she can pick up a
ringing call on that line by using the Call Pickup feature. (See “Call Pickup.”)
If two or more voice terminals in the system will have the same line assignments,
the administrator can use the Copy feature to copy the line assignments from one
voice terminal to another. (See “Copy.”)
A line jack with nothing plugged into it is called a nonequipped line appearance,
or “ghost line.” To eliminate ghost lines, the administrator must specify how
many lines the system contains by using the administration procedure below.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
Specifying the Number of Lines in Your System
When the administrator first sets up the system, he or she must specify the
number of lines in the system.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *4.
3
Dial a number (1 through 8) that corresponds with the number of lines in your
MERLIN Plus system.
For example, if the system contains six lines, the administrator dials *4 and
then 6 or *46.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
Administer
41-
5-56 MERLIN Plus System Features
48
P
Assigning Lines to Voice Terminals
Before you assign lines to voice terminals in your system, refer to the Line
Assignments Form that you have filled out.
To assign lines to a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal that you are administering.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button. Green lights also go on next to the
buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
3
Touch all of the line buttons that have a light next to them.
The green light next to each line button goes off.
4
Touch all the line buttons again, this time in the order that you want them to
appear on the voice terminal. If you want to reserve a button(s) for feature
programming, touch that button(s) last.
Green lights go on next to the line buttons you touch.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
If you reserved a button(s) for feature programming:
>
Touch the button(s) that you want to be used for feature programming
again.
Green light goes off next to the button you touch.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
T
555-9876
555-1234
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
The system administrator assigns lines to buttons for the whole system and for
individual voice terminals. Be sure that the lines that you have access to are
labeled on your voice terminal.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-57
Direct Extension Dialing (DXD)
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
Direct Extension Dialing (DXD) is an ASA feature and therefore
requires assignment of an ASA jack. If the ASA jack assignment has
not yet been made, refer to “Automatic System Access” in this section
before attempting to administer this feature.
When you put the system in DXD mode, the control unit acts like an automated
attendant. Incoming calls on designated lines are connected to the
Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP) for the following message prompt:
“Please dial desired extension number.”
When the caller dials the extension number (the 2-digit intercom number), the
control unit transfers the call to that extension and the caller hears the following
message:
“Please hold.”
You can also modify the voice message, so that callers first hear the number
they’ve reached, followed by the request for the extension number:
“You have reached [number]. Please dial desired extension number.”
CONSIDERATIONS
Direct Extension Dialing requires the following:
●
A programmed button (with green and red lights) labeled CF/DXD
You use the CF/DXD button to activate either Call Forwarding or Direct
Extension Dialing. To put the system in either of these modes, or in normal
mode, you touch the CF/DXD button. The green and red lights show you
what mode you’re in.
>
If the system is in normal mode touch the button once to put the system
in DXD mode.
Green and red lights off = Normal mode
Only green light on = DXD mode
Green light flashing = Problem with DXD;
call your system administrator
Only red light on = CF mode
>
●
Touch the button three times to put the system back into normal mode
(both the green and red lights are off).
A synthesized voice message
This message is automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit.
The administrator can modify the message to add the telephone number that
the callers have contacted.
5-58 MERLIN Plus System Features
●
That one jack on the control unit be dedicated to the ASA features
At startup, jack number 18 is automatically designated as the ASA jack.
An Auto Access cord that you plug into this jack is connected to the memory
module which houses the VSP. If you want to change this jack assignment,
follow the simple administration procedure discussed under
“Automatic System Access” earlier in this section.
●
Its own incoming line group.
The feature’s operation includes only calls coming in on lines assigned to the
DXD incoming line group. Calls coming in on lines not in the DXD
incoming line group arc not answered by the DXD feature. At startup, no
lines are assigned to the DXD incoming line group. There’s a simple
procedure (discussed under “Administration”) for changing the makeup of
the DXD incoming line group.
CF and DXD are mutually exclusive modes: the system cannot be in both modes
at the same time.
Direct Extension Dialing cannot be used with the MERLIN Attendant.
There can be more than one CF/DXD button in the system, but there can be only
one CF/DXD button on a voice terminal. If two or more users have a CF/DXD
button programmed on their voice terminals, each of them can turn the features
on and off. For example, if one of these users activates the Direct Extension
Dialing feature, the green light goes on next to the CF/DXD buttons on all the
voice terminals that have a button for the feature. When the person deactivates
the feature by touching the CF/DXD button, the light goes off next to the button
at all the voice terminals that have programmed the CF/DXD features.
You should consider having a Transfer Return Interval if you plan to use DXD.
(See “Transfer Return lnterval.”) Depending on the incoming call traffic, you
may also want to designate an alternate attendant position to handle all returning
ASA calls, (See “Alternate Attendant.”)
When a caller responds to the voice prompt by entering an intercom number,
the control unit uses the system’s transfer feature to transfer the call to the voice
terminal with that intercom number. If the call goes unanswered at the
destination voice terminal and there is an administered Transfer Return Interval,
the call is transferred to the administrator/attendant or the alternate attendant
console when the interval expires.
If the system is administered for no return of transferred calls, the call continues
to ring at the destination voice terminal until the caller hangs up.
If a compatible audio-source is available, Music-On-Hold is recommended for
DXD, so that the caller can hear music while waiting. See “Music-On-Hold”
under “Accessory Equipment” later in this section.
If the system is in both DXD and Remote Line Access modes and the lines
overlap, DXD takes precedence.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-59
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
DXD Line Groups
At startup, none of the system’s outside lines are assigned to each ASA line
group. You need to assign which lines you want to designate for DXD.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *58 for a DXD incoming line group.
3
Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for
the line group.
Green light on = line is assigned to the group
Green light off = line is not assigned to the group
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
58
T
P
Administer
Number of Rings
To change the number of rings (the default is two rings) before the DXD call is
answered:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *761 plus the number of rings (between 0 and 9) before call
is picked up.
NOTE:
3
If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal will not ring,
and the calls will be answered immediately.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
Administer
7610- 7619
5-60 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
You can modify this message to include the following statement:
“You have reached nnn...”
where nnn... is the telephone number of one of your outside lines. The number
can be up to 16 digits, including * or #. You can modify the message for all lines
in an incoming line group, or you can modify the message for some and leave
others unmodified. To modify the DXD message for one or more lines in your
incoming line groups, do the following:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *50.
3
Touch the line button for the line on which you want the modified message.
The green light goes on.
4
Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message.
NOTE:
For special phone numbers, such as an 800 number, you may prefer
to have the recorded voice say “Eight hundred” followed by the
number, instead of “Eight, zero, zero.” In this case, you would touch
Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix, then again after the 800
area code, and again after the exchange. For example,
1-800-555-1212 would be entered as follows:
1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212
5
Repeat for other lines.
6
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
50
T
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
tel. no.
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-61
PROGRAMMING
A button with a red and green light next to it is required for the DXD features.
To program a CF/DXD button on a voice terminal:
1
Label the button CF/DXD.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you’re programming and that you
can’t place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *83.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
CF/DXD
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
T
P
83
HOW TO USE
Using the CF/DXD Button
Touching the CF/DXD button repeatedly cycles the system through DXD, CF,
and normal modes. The red and green lights next to the CF/DXD button will
help you recognize which mode the system is in.
Green and red light off = Normal mode
Only green light on = DXD mode
Only red light on = CF mode
5-62 MERLIN Plus System Features
Disallowed List
DESCRIPTION
Most businesses find it inappropriate for their employees to make billable calls
to numbers such as those beginning with the “976” exchange or the “900” area
code, for services such as, comedy, weather, sports, lottery, and chatlines. The
Disallowed List feature enables you to deny access to up to 20 area codes,
exchanges, and entire numbers, even on unrestricted lines.
If a voice terminal has been assigned a disallowed number, any attempt to dial
that number will not go through. As soon as the dialed digits match any
complete disallowed number, dialing is blocked. The only exception to this is if
a System Speed Dial number with Restriction override matches a number on the
Disallowed List, the number will go through. (see “System Speed Dial” for
more details.)
CONSIDERATIONS
The Disallowed List can contain 20 numbers up to 16 digits each. This allows
you to deny access to virtually any number combination, including area
code/exchange, and foreign numbers. You can enter “wild card” digits
(which are pauses in the administration procedure) by touching the Hold button.
The pauses can be used to represent any area code or combination you require.
For example, to prevent calls to the “976” exchange in any state, the disallowed
number would be entered as 1 Hold Hold Hold 976 or 0 Hold Hold Hold 976.
You cannot dial a number on an Allowed List if it matches a number on the
Disallowed List. For example, if 976-3535 is on the Allowed List, but the 976
exchange is on the Disallowed List, the number will not go through.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
As you administer a Disallowed List to your system, refer to the Disallowed List
Form you completed in Section 2.
To setup a Disallowed List:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *09 followed by the Disallowed List code (01 to 20).
3
Dial the disallowed number (up to 16 digits). If the number includes
wild card digits, touch Hold once for each wild card digit.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
0901-
0920
disallowed
no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-63
To assign Disallowed List to voice terminals:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *0900.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate code from the table
below for the voice terminal you want to assign the Disallowed List. If you
want to prevent all voice terminals in the system from dialing the number,
touch Conference. TO remove all voice terminals from a disallowed number
assignment, touch Drop.
Green light on = Disallowed List assigned.
Green light off = Disallowed List not assigned.
4
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
Intercom 10
#22
Intercom 20
#03
Intercom 11
#21
Intercom 21
#04
Intercom 12
#20
Intercom 22
#05
Intercom 13
#19
Intercom 23
#06
Intercom 14
#18
Intercom 24
#07
Intercom 15
#17
Intercom 25
#08
Intercom 16
#16
Intercom 26
#09
Intercom 17
#15
Intercom 27
#10
Intercom 18
#14
Intercom 28
#11
Intercom 19
#13
Intercom 29
#12
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
0900
T
Administer
5-64 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
To remove a number from a Disallowed List:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *09 followed by the Disallowed List code (01-20) that you want to
remove.
3
Touch Administer.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
0901-
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
P
Administer
Administer
0920
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-65
I
Display Unit
DESCRIPTION
Some 34-Button speakerphone voice terminals, namely, the BIS-34D and the
34-Button (SP-34D) voice terminal with display, are equipped with a display
unit. You can also purchase one separately and add it later to a 34-Button
(SP-34) voice terminal. To order the Display Unit, call the AT&T National Sales
Parts Center’s tollfree number, 1-800-222-PART, and ask for order number
105400030 (for black BIS-34 voice terminals).
The display provides information that helps you handle calls and program your
voice terminal more easily. For example, when you dial a number or touch an
Auto Intercom button, or when you receive an intercom call or a returned
transfer call, the number associated with the call appears on the display screen.
When you are programming a button, the display unit can help you check if the
button has a feature already programmed onto it. If you have not yet programmed
a feature on the button, the word “blank” appears on the display screen.
FIGURE 5-2 Operating Display Unit Timekeeping Features.
Timer
Set
Start
Stop
Time/
Timer
Fwd
Rev
Exit
Time-keeping
features
CONSIDERATIONS
12:00a
Su
1-01
Contrast
Display
screen
You can also use the display unit for providing an alarm, timing calls that you
place or receive, and displaying the time, day, and the date. See Figure 5-2.
To adjust the clarity of the display screen characters, turn the contrast
thumbwheel until the numbers and letters are clear.
Only the numbers for incoming intercom calls are displayed on the screen; the
display unit does not show the identification of incoming calls from outside the
system.
When the display is idle, the screen shows the time, day, and date.
The information appears on the screen for a maximum of 10 seconds. If you
disconnect a call or touch another display option button, such as the Time/Timer
button, before the 10 seconds are over, the display is replaced with the
time/date display.
Dial the numbers and characters of your calls slowly so that the display unit can
place them correctly on the screen.
5-66 MERLIN Plus System Features
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To use the four features associated with the display unit, follow the instructions
on the next few pages.
Received Call ID
When you receive an intercom call, the 2-digit intercom number of the person
calling you appears on the screen, as shown below.
23 -On Intercom
When you transfer a call to another voice terminal and the call is unanswered,
the call returns to your voice terminal. The 2-digit intercom number of the voice
terminal from which the call is returning appears on the screen.
Trans Return -18
Program Mode
When you begin programming, the display tells you that you are in the program
mode and the intercom number of your voice terminal you are programming.
Program Mode 16
If you touch a button that has already been programmed, the display identifies
the name of the feature on that button. The example below shows that the Last
Number Redial feature has been programmed on the button you have touched.
Last Number
If the button has not been programmed, the message below appears on your
display screen.
Blank
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-67
If you touch a preassigned, or nonprogrammable button, such as Conference or
Hold, the following message appears on the display screen:
Not Programmable
or
Error
NOTE:
You can use nonprogrammable buttons, such as Hold or Recall to enter
a special character, such as a pause or a stop, into a dialing sequence.
Number Dialed
When you dial outside, intercom, or account numbers, or touch a button that
contain numbers, such as an Outside Auto Dial, Auto Intercom, Last Number
Redial, or Saved Number Redial button, the digits associated with that button are
printed on the display screen.
5551234
The combined display screens in the Display Number Dialed feature can contain
up to 16 digits. (It does not set the time and date for the Call Report and
System Feature Report features.)
Time-Keeping Features
The time-keeping features of the display unit allow you to set an alarm, clock,
calendar, and timer.
●
Setting the Clock and Calendar
Clock/calendar display screen
12:01a Su
Clock
1-01
Alarm on
indicator
Calendar
To set the time, day, and date on the display screen:
5-68 MERLIN Plus System Features
a
Press Set until the item you want to change flashes.
b
Press Fwd or Rev to advance or reverse the time, day or date.
c
When you are finished, press Exit.
●
Setting the Alarm
Alarm setting display screen
ALARM: Off
Alarm
status
12:00 p
Alarm set for
12:00 p.m.
To set the alarm (for example, when you want a reminder that you have a
meeting in five minutes):
●
a
Press Set until the item you want to change flashes.
b
Press Fwd or Rev to advance or reverse the time until the display shows
the time you want the alarm to sound.
c
When you are finished, press Exit.
Operating the Timer
Timer display screen
12:03a
Clock
00:00
Timer
To operate the timer for calls you need to time:
a
Press Time/Timer (to display timer).
b
Press Timer Start to turn the timer to 00:00 and start it.
c
When you are finished using the timer, press Timer Stop.
When you want to return to the Clock/Calendar display, which shows the time,
day, and date:
●
Press Time/Timer.
When you want to return to the call handling display:
●
Press Time/Timer.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-69
Do Not Disturb (DND)
DESCRIPTION
When you are busy and do not want to receive calls, you can touch the
Do Not Disturb button, if you have programmed one onto your voice terminal.
When you receive outside calls, the green light next to the line button flashes,
but your voice terminal does not ring.
Calls transferred to you return to the sender, and intercom calls get a busy signal.
When you activate the Do Not Disturb at your voice terminal, the green light
goes on next to your Auto Intercom button at other people’s voice terminals.
Calls you transfer will return to you if they are unanswered.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
The Do Not Disturb feature requires a button with lights.
To program a Do Not Disturb button for your voice terminal:
1
2
Label the button Do Not Disturb.
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *71.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Do Not
Disturb
71
5-70 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
HOW TO USE
To prevent calls from ringing at your voice terminal:
1
Touch Do Not Disturb.
The green light next to the button goes on.
Do Not
Disturb
This feature remains active until you:
1
Touch Do Not Disturb again.
The green light next to the button goes off.
Do Not
Disturb
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-71
Drop
DESCRIPTION
If you get a busy signal or no answer as you setup a conference call, or if you
want to disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call, use the
Drop feature For more information about using this feature, see “Conference.”
CONSIDERATIONS
If you press the switchhook, you may disconnect everyone on the
conference call.
In order for a person within the MERLIN Plus system to be disconnected from
the conference, he or she must hang up.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call:
1
Touch Drop.
2
Touch the button of the line you want to disconnect.
Drop
5-72 MERLIN Pius System Features
555-1234
Group Listening
DESCRIPTION
If you want other people in your office to hear a call, you can turn on your voice
terminal speaker. Everyone can then hear the voice of the other person on the
call without that person being aware that the call is on a speaker.
CONSIDERATIONS
This feature is not available on the BIS model voice terminals.
Your speaker may make a squealing noise when the handset comes close to it.
To prevent this noise, touch Speaker when you have completed a call and are
ready to hang up your handset. Another way to reduce the squealing sound is to
turn down the volume control on your voice terminal.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To allow others to hear a call:
1
Without hanging up, touch Speaker and continue your conversation.
Speaker
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-73
Group Page
DESCRIPTION
The system administrator can set up Group Page groups so anyone in the system
can use the Group Page feature to page up to 20 people at a time directly through
the voice terminal speakers.
You can have up to three paging groups. The Page-All group consists of all
voice terminals in the system; groups 1 and 2 can have up to 20 voice terminals
in each group.
CONSIDERATIONS
If necessary, one voice terminal can be assigned to more than one paging group.
You can program buttons for the groups you want to page. Or, you can save
available feature buttons for other uses and use a dial code for this feature.
If someone in the Group Page group picks up the handset during a Group Page
announcement, he or she is connected to the person making the announcement,
and the page announcement is terminated.
When someone in the MERLIN Plus system has activated the
Voice Announcement Disable feature for his or her voice terminal,
he or she cannot hear a Group Page announcement.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
When the system is first set up, the system has the following Group Page groups:
Group 1 = voice terminals 10 through 19
Group 2 = voice terminals 20 through 29
Page-All = voice terminals 10 through 29
If these group assignments are not satisfactory for the system, the administrator
can add or delete voice terminals from the individual groups.
The Page-All group, the paging group containing all the voice terminals in the
system, cannot be administered.
Before you begin to administer Group Page groups, refer to “Paging Groups” on
your “System Configuration Form.” Then use one of the following procedures to
add or remove a voice terminal from a paging group:
To administer the Group Page feature, follow this procedure:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *71 for group 1 or *72 for group 2.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button, if you have one, of any voice terminal
already assigned to that paging group.
5-74 MERLIN Plus System Features
3
Perform the appropriate procedure:
>
Touch the appropriate Auto Intercom button(s) until the green light
beside it shows the paging group assignment you prefer.
Green light on = voice terminal is assigned to the group
Green light off = voice terminal is not assigned to the group
>
4
If you do not have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you
want to add or remove from the paging group, dial a code from the chart
below that corresponds with the voice terminal.
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
Intercom 10
#22
Intercom 20
#03
#04
Intercom 11
#21
Intercom 21
Intercom 12
#20
Intercom 22
#05
Intercom 13
#19
Intercom 23
#06
Intercom 14
#18
Intercom 24
#07
Intercom 15
#17
Intercom 25
#08
Intercom 16
#16
Intercom 26
#09
Intercom 17
#15
Intercom 27
#10
Intercom 18
#14
Intercom 28
#11
Intercom 19
#13
Intercom 29
#12
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Follow steps 2 through 4 for each paging group you want to administer.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
Susan 15
71 or
T
72
P
Administer
If you want to clear all entries from group 1 or from group 2:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *71 for group 1 or *72 for group 2.
3
Touch Drop.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-75
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Drop
Administer
71 or
T
72
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
To program a Group Page button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Group Page plus a group number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *91 plus a Group Page code:
70 = Page-All (all voice terminals in the system)
71 = group 1
72 = group 2
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Grp. Page
Group 2
91
HOW TO USE
P
70-72
You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature.
To use a Group Page button to make an announcement through a group of
voice terminal speakers:
1
Touch the Group Page button for the group you want to page.
2
When you hear a beep, lift your handset and make the announcement.
NOTE:
If you don’t lift your handset to make the announcement and another
BIS terminal is nearby, you may hear a loud squeal from your
voice terminal.
Grp. Page
Group 2
5-76 MERLIN Plus System Features
To page a group using a dial code:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
3
Dial the code for the group you want to page:
70 = Page-All (all voice terminals in the system)
71 = group 1
72 = group 2
4
When you hear a beep, begin speaking.
Intercom
Speakerphone
70-72
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-77
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI)
DESCRIPTION
If you are using a voice terminal that has a Hands-Free Answer on Intercom
(HFAI) button on it, without lifting your handset, you can touch the HFAI or
HFAI/Mic button when you want to answer intercom calls hands free.
You will hear the other person’s voice through your voice terminal speaker.
CONSIDERATIONS
The HFAI feature can only be used for intercom calls, not outside calls. It is not
for use with group paging calls. When you turn on the HFAI feature, the green
light next to the button goes on. For optimal use of the HFAI feature and
speakerphone voice terminals, follow these guidelines:
●
Place the voice terminal in an area with low background noise.
Room acoustics and background noise may affect the proper operation of
your voice terminal’s speakerphone. High background noise is caused by
loud voices and loud electronic devices (radios, typewrite, etc.).
●
●
●
●
Keep the area near the microphone free of books and papers.
Let one person talk at a time. When both parties speak at the same time,
transmission can be broken.
Always face your terminal when talking.
Place your voice terminal at least six inches away from the edge of the desk
or table upon which it rests.
NOTE:
●
If you are having difficulty hearing the other person, increase the
speaker’s volume level. (Refer to CIB 3078, “Adjusting the Volume
Control Switch on Your Voice Terminal” for further information.)
Certain conditions may cause difficulty with the speakerphone to persist.
If raising the volume level on the speaker does not help, (see NOTE above),
lift the handset to continue the conversation.
If you use the Voice Announcement Disable feature on a voice terminal with
HFAI, you deactivate the HFAI feature.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
5-78 MERLIN Plus System Features
HOW TO USE
If you have a HFAI button on your voice terminal and you want your intercom
calls answered automatically:
1 Touch HFAI or touch HFAI/Mic.
The green light flahes on BIS-10 and 10-Button HFAI models when active on a call and
remains steady on all other BIS models.
HFAI/
Mic.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-79
Hold
DESCRIPTION
When you need to put someone on hold, use the Hold feature.
CONSIDERATIONS
Before placing an intercom call on hold that has been answered using the HFAI
feature, lift the handset or the call will be disconnected.
When you leave a call on hold for more than a minute, your voice terminal rings
at one minute intervals to remind you the call is still on hold.
You can program an Exclusive Hold button so that no other voice terminal can
pick up a call you’ve put on hold. For more information about the
Exclusive Hold feature, see the entry for “Hold-Exclusive” in this section.
If a caller placed on hold hangs up, the system will automatically drop the line.
If the light continues to flash after a caller has hung up, the Hold Disconnect
Interval may be too long (450 milliseconds) for the local telephone company to
detect. See “Hold Disconnect Interval” for information to correct this problem.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To place a call on hold:
1
If the call was answered using the HFAI feature, lift the handset.
2
Touch Hold.
Hold
When you put a call on hold, the green light next to the call’s line button flashes
rapidly. If someone else puts a call on hold from another voice terminal, the
green light flashes slowly next to the call’s line button on your voice terminal.
To take a call off hold:
1
Touch the call’s line button.
The green light becomes steady.
555-1234
5-80 MERLIN Plus System Features
Hold Disconnect Interval
DESCRIPTION
Telephone company central offices use either a “short” (50 millisecond) or a
“long” (450 millisecond) disconnect interval. Because most switching systems
use along interval, your MERLIN Plus system is factory-set for a long interval.
If your telephone company uses a short interval, or if your MERLIN Plus system
has been reprogrammed, the disconnect interval for your system may cause
problems with held calls.
CONSIDERATIONS
If your system has either of the following problems, the system administrator
must change the Hold Disconnect Interval:
●
●
If a caller waiting on hold is disconnected, the disconnect interval setting of
your MERLIN Plus system is shorter than the setting at your local telephone
company’s central office.
If a caller waiting on hold hangs up, but the light next to that line continues to
flash as if the call was still on hold, the disconnect interval setting of your
MERLIN Plus system is longer than the setting at your local telephone
company’s central office.
You can perform a quick test to see if you need to change the interval from
450 milliseconds to 50 milliseconds. Make an outside call to someone who
would be willing to help you for a few minutes. Ask them to hang up the phone
ten seconds after you put them on hold. When they’re ready, put the call on hold.
If the call is not dropped within a few minutes, the Hold Disconnect Interval
needs to be administered to 50 milliseconds.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To change the disconnect interval of your MERLIN Plus system to match the
central office disconnect interval:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial the 3-character code *69.
3
Touch each line button to change its disconnect interval. Each touch of the
button gives you one of the following codes:
Steady green light on = line has long disconnect interval
Green light off = line has short disconnect interval
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-81
4
Touch Administer.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
69
T
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
5-82
MERLIN Plus System Features
P
Hold-Exclusive
DESCRIPTION
By programming the Exclusive Hold feature onto a button, you can put an
outside caller on Exclusive Hold, which means that no one else at another voice
terminal in the system can pick up the held call.
CONSIDERATIONS
This feature must be programmed on a button with a green light.
To place a call on normal hold, after it’s been placed on Exclusive Hold, or
vice versa, you must reconnect with the caller before touching the hold button.
When you leave a call on Exclusive Hold for more than one minute, your voice
terminal rings at one minute intervals to remind you that the call is on hold.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
You need a button with a green light to program an Exclusive Hold button:
1
Label the button “Exclusive Hold.”
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every five seconds to remind you that you are programming and you
cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch Exclusive Hold.
4
Dial *77.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Exclusive
P
Hold
77
HOW TO USE
To put an outside call on hold so no one else in the system can pickup the call:
1
Touch Exclusive Hold.
The green light next to the line button of the held call flashes rapidly to remind you that the
call is on hold.
2
If a call has been on Exclusive Hold for more than a minute, your voice
terminal will ring once every minute to remind you that the call is waiting.
Exclusive
Hold
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-83
To pick up the call that you have put on Exclusive Hold.
1
Touch the line button of the held call.
555-1234
To place a call on normal hold after it’s been placed on Exclusive Hold:
1
Touch the line button of the held call.
2
Touch Hold.
555-1234
5-84 MERLIN Plus System Features
Hold
I
Hold Retrieve
DESCRIPTION
If you do not have a line button for a call that you have received or that has been
transferred to you, you can still put it on hold using the Hold button. However,
to retrieve the call, you must use a dial code or program a Retrieve Call button.
CONSIDERATIONS
To use this feature, you can either program a button or use a dial code.
This feature is especially useful for 5-Button voice terminals that may not have
line buttons for every incoming or transferred call.
If your system administrator has set your voice terminal for Button-Free Line
Operation, you should have a Hold Retrieve button on your voice terminal, so
that you can put calls on hold and retrieve them later. (See “Button-Free Line
Operation.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program a Hold Retrieve button for your voice terminal:
1
2
Label the button Retrieve Call.
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *95*.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Retrieve
Call
95
HOW TO USE
You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature.
To put a call on hold:
1
Touch Hold.
Hold
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-85
You can use a programmed button or a dial code for the Hold Retrieve feature.
To use a Retrieve Call button to retrieve a held call:
1
Touch Retrieve Call.
Retrieve
Call
To use a dial code to retrieve a held call:
1
Dial #*.
#
5-86 MERLIN Plus System Features
Intercom
DESCRIPTION
Each voice terminal connected to the MERLIN Plus system has a unique 2-digit
intercom number. You can dial intercom numbers to place calls to people
connected to the system.
CONSIDERATIONS
In the MERLIN Plus system, you place an intercom call with a voice
announcement. Your co-worker hears your voice through the voice terminal
speaker, and can either touch Speakerphone or lift the handset
to respond to you.
However, if the person you are calling has activated the Voice Announcement
Disable feature, your intercom call rings rather than beeps at the person’s
voice terminal and you cannot give your voice announcement.
(See “Voice Announcement Enable/Disable.”)
If you program an Auto Intercom button for the intercom number you want to
call, you can dial the number with one touch. (See “Auto Intercom.”)
You cannot announce an intercom call to a person active on the voice terminal’s
speaker.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To place an intercom call with a voice announcement:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
3
Dial the 2-digit intercom number for the voice terminal you want to call.
4
When you hear a beep, begin speaking.
or
If you hear ringing, wait for the person to answer.
Intercom
Speakerphone
Icom no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-87
Intercom Preference
DESCRIPTION
Intercom Preference provides an intercom line immediately upon touching
Speakerphone or lifting the handset.
CONSIDERATIONS
If you are at a voice terminal that either has Intercom Preference or has no
outside lines assigned to it, you will be connected to an intercom line when you
touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
NOTE:
This feature does not remove access to outside lines from the voice
terminal; outside lines can only be removed by the attendant at the
attendant console during administration. If you want to restrict access
to outside lines for a voice terminal located in a lobby or public area,
you would have to administer this restriction. However, to provide the
convenience of an intercom line immediately upon pickup, use
Intercom Preference.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program Intercom Preference:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
2
Dial ****.
3
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
HOW TO USE
P
T
P
If the voice terminal you are using has been programmed for Intercom
Preference, you will be connected to an intercom line when you either touch
Speakerphone or lift your handset.
5-88 MERLIN Plus System Features
Last Number Dial
DESCRIPTION
With a Last Number Dial button, you can redial with one touch the number you
dialed most recently. Each time you want this feature to redial a number, you
must touch the programmed Last Number Dial button. You do not need to do
anything to save this number.
CONSIDERATIONS
You may also use the Busy Buster feature to redial the number you dialed most
recently. The Busy Buster feature automatically redials the number you most
recently dialed up to ten times at 60-second intervals. If someone answers the
call within this time, your voice terminal alerts you. To use this feature, the
system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voice terminal jack on
the control unit. See “Busy Buster” earlier in this section for more information.
On BIS-10 and BIS-22 model voice terminals, the Personal Speed Dial code #24
is pre-programmed as the default for Last Number Dial. (See “Personal Speed
Dial,” later in this section.)
The Last Number Dial can contain up to 16 digits.
The Last Number Dial feature saves manually dialed numbers and numbers
dialed with an Outside Auto Dial button.
If you make frequent calls to a few numbers, it may be more convenient for you
to use the Saved Number Dial feature to help you redial numbers correctly.
(See “Saved Number Dial.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program a button on your voice terminal for the Last Number Dial feature:
1
Label the button Last Number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *73 (you do not need to dial an outside number).
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Last No.
73
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-89
HOW TO USE
You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature.
If you are using the Last Number Dial feature, YOU can follow this procedure to
have the system redial the last number you dialed:
1
Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset, touch
Last Number, or dial #24 if you haven’t reprogrammed this as a personal
speed dial code.
Your voice terminal speaker goes on, and you hear dialing.
2
When you hear the other person answer, begin talking or lift your handset
and begin talking.
Speakerphone
Last No.
Speakerphone
If the line is busy, or if no one answers:
1
Touch Speakerphone or hang up the handset to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
If later you want the system to redial the number, touch Last Number,
or dial #24 again.
5-90 MERLIN Plus System Features
Lights
DESCRIPTION
The lights next to the line buttons on your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal
give you immediate status of any of your lines. There is also a light next to the
Message button, and, on most voice terminals, there is a light next to the
Speakerphone button.
The lights next to the feature buttons on your voice terminal indicate the on/off
status of the feature programmed on that button.
Lights
Line Status
Red light steady
This is either the line you are now using or
the line you will get when you touch
Speakerphone or lift your handset.
Green light steady
This line is busy or the feature is activated.
Green light flashing
This is the line on which a call is coming in.
Green light flashing rapidly
This is the line of a call you have put on
hold.
Green light flashing slowly
This is the line of a call someone else has
put on hold from another voice terminal.
Alternating flashing red and green lights on a
line you are using
Someone in the system has bridged onto
your call.
Green light on next to the Message button
This means that the attendant has a message
waiting for you.
Green light on next to the Speakerphone
button
This means that the voice terminal speaker
is on. Without lifting the handset, you can
begin dialing, or you can hear a
conversation through the speaker.
Green light on next to the HFAI/Mic button
on a BIS-10 or 10-Button HFAI voice
terminal or next to the HFAI button on any
other BIS or HFAI voice terminal
You can answer and speak to others on
intercom calls without lifting your handset.
Green light on next to the Speakerphone and
Microphone buttons on any BIS voice
terminal
You can answer and speak to others on all
calls without lifting your handset.
Green light on next to the
Call Forwarding/Direct Extension Dialing
(CF/DXD) button
The system is in DXD mode.
Red light on next to the CF/DXD button
The system is in CF mode
Green light on next to the Remote Line
Access (RLA) button
The system is in RLA mode
Green light on next to the System Answer
(SA) button.
The system is in SA mode.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-91
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
5-92 MERLIN Plus System Features
Line Request
DESCRIPTION
If any or all the lines that appear on your voice terminal are busy, you can still
request the use of one of these intercom or outside lines. When the line becomes
available, the system alerts you.
CONSIDERATIONS
If two or more people request the same line, the system places them in a queue
according to the sequence in which the people requested the line. When the line
is free, the system checks the queue, and the first person who requested the line
is alerted.
If the line is not used within 10 seconds after the voice terminal has received the
alert, the next voice terminal in the queue is alerted. This process is repeated
until the queue is empty.
If the voice terminal is idle, the red light goes on next to the line that was
requested. If the voice terminal is busy, the red light does not go on next
to that line.
The Line Request feature does not reserve a line. Anyone in the MERLIN Plus
system who has the line appearance can use the line when it is free.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To request an intercom or outside line that is presently busy:
1
Touch the intercom or outside line button of the line you want to use.
The red light goes on next to the line button you requested.
2
The MERLIN Plus system signals you with a beep when the line
becomes free.
555-1234
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-93
Line Select
DESCRIPTION
You may need to make an outside call at a time when you also need to leave
your primary line open for incoming calls. If your voice terminal has more than
one outside line, you can select a line other than your primary line for
an outside call.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To select a specific outside line:
1
Touch the button for the specific outside line you want to use.
The red light goes on beside the line you select.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset and dial.
555-1234
5-94 MERLIN Plus System Features
Speakerphone
Loudspeaker Paging
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
This feature is used with an optional loudspeaker paging system and is
compatible with paging systems with talkback. Refer to “Loudspeaker
Paging System” under “Accessories” at the end of this section for more
information.
If you have a Loudspeaker Paging System connected to the MERLIN Plus
system, you can page people, make announcements, and provide background
music (if available) throughout the building.
You have two options:
1
2
You can connect the loudspeaker paging system to the Page Jack on the front
of the control unit.
You can connect the loudspeaker paging system to a CO (outside) line jack
on a line module and administer that jack as a paging port.
CONSIDERATIONS
Refer to “Loudspeaker Paging System” under “Accessories” at the end
of this section.
ADMINISTRATION
Refer to “Loudspeaker Paging System” under “Accessories” at the end
of this section.
PROGRAMMING
If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to the page jack on the control
unit, you can program a loudspeaker paging button to use instead of a dial code
whenever you want to page someone.
A button with lights is recommended for the Loudspeaker Page feature:
1
Label the button Loudspeaker Page.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch Loudspeaker Page.
4
Dial *91.
5
Dial 6.
6
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Ldsp.
Page
91
6
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-95
HOW TO USE
If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to a CO line, follow this
procedure:
1
Touch the loudspeaker page’s line button.
2
Follow the instructions provided with your loudspeaker page system.
Ldsp.
Page
If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to the page jack on the control
unit, you can use a programmed button or a dial code to access the Loudspeaker
Page feature.
To use a Loudspeaker Page button:
1
Touch Loudspeaker Page.
2
When you hear the beep, lift your handset and make your announcement.
Ldsp.
Page
To use this feature by dialing a code:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Lift your handset.
3
Dial 6.
4
When you hear a beep, make your announcement.
Intercom
6
When you hang up, the loudspeaker turns off automatically.
5-96 MERLIN Plus System Features
Manual Signaling
DESCRIPTION
You can use a Manual Signaling button to generate a beep at a co-worker’s voice
terminal. Most often, this feature is used by a boss who wants to buzz his or her
secretary. Assign a Manual Signaling button to each person you want to signal.
CONSIDERATIONS
You can signal someone with a Manual Signaling button while you have an
outside call in progress.
The beep sounds at your co-worker’s voice terminal even if it is busy.
If you program this feature on a button with lights, the green light next to the
button goes on when your co-worker uses his or her voice terminal or uses the
Do Not Disturb feature.
You cannot have both a Manual Signaling button and an Auto Intercom button
for the same person. If you try to program both, you deactivate the feature that
you programmed earlier. You can use either feature to place an intercom call.
(See “Auto Intercom.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program a Manual Signaling button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Signal plus a name.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *6 plus an intercom number.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Signal
Mary
6
Icom no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-97
HOW TO USE
To signal a co-worker:
1
Without lifting your handset, touch a Manual Signaling button.
The signal is heard as long as you continue to touch the button.
Signal
Mary
To place an intercom call using a Manual Signaling button:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Touch Speakerphone.
3
Touch the Manual Signaling button for the person you want to call.
4
If you hear a beep, start talking (or lift your handset to speak). If you hear
ringing, the voice signaling path is busy and the voice terminal is being
alerted with the intercom ring.
Intercom
5-98 MERLIN Plus System Features
Speakerphone
Signal
Mary
Message
DESCRIPTION
When the light next to the Message button is on, your MERLIN Plus system
attendant has a message for you.
CONSIDERATIONS
Your Message light can only be turned on from the administrator/attendant
console.
If the attendant is using a BIS-22 and the system has more than 10 voice
terminals, refer to “Send Message” for directions on sending a message to
voice terminals in the system.
5-button voice terminals do not have a Message button.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
The system attendant can touch Message to turn on the light next to the
Message button at a person’s voice terminal.
1
At the administrator/attendant console, touch Send Message.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person’s voice terminal.
The red light next to the Auto Intercom button goes on, indicating the person’s light is lit.
Send
Message
Susan 15
A person can turn off the Message light on his or her voice terminal. The system
attendant can also turn off the light at a voice terminal by repeating
the two steps above.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-99
Monitor-on-Hold
DESCRIPTION
This feature is only for use with voice terminals that have a speaker button but
not a speakerphone button. When someone puts your call on hold, you can turn
on your voice terminal’s built-in speaker, hang up, and continue working while
you wait for the person to return to the call.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To turn on your speaker until you are taken off hold:
1
When you have been put on hold, touch Speaker.
2
Hang up.
3
When you hear the person return to the call, lift your handset
and continue the call.
The speaker automatically turns off.
Speakerphone
5-100 MERLIN Plus System Features
Night Service
DESCRIPTION
When the person who usually answers calls leaves for the day, you can make
answering calls after hours easy for night shift personnel and security guards by
providing Night Service for your office. You can implement Night Service one
of three ways:
●
●
●
Provide the person with a voice terminal that has all the lines, or have the
person monitor the attendant console and answer calls there. Be sure that all
lines on which calls come in after hours are set for immediate ring. If the
lines are not normally set for this ringing option, the person can activate the
Ring Override feature that he or she has programmed for the voice terminal.
(See “Ring Override.”)
The backup person can also answer calls that come in after hours by
programming a Call Pickup button so that he or she can pickup calls ringing
at the administrator/attendant console. Since the attendant console has all the
lines of your MERLIN Plus system, the person answering calls after hours
can pick up calls at his or her voice terminal by touching the Call Pickup
button when the attendant console rings. (See “Call Pickup.”) If the person
is in another part of the building, the attendant can connect his or her console
and an extra alert device to a Supplemental Alert Adapter (see “Supplemental
Alert Adapter” under “Accessory Equipment”), so that each time a call comes
in, an extra alert device sounds.
You can also choose to administer and activate the Call Forwarding feature
for after-hours use (see “Call Forwarding” in this section). When the system
is in Call Forwarding mode, you can administer incoming calls on designated
lines so that they are connected to a Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP) in the
control unit. The VSP message informs the caller that the call will be
forwarded. While the caller is listening to the message, the control unit calls
the telephone number to which calls are being forwarded and uses the
system’s Conference feature to connect the incoming call to
the outgoing call.
CONSIDERATIONS
Call Forwarding can be used in conjunction with a MERLIN Attendant for
enhanced Night Service coverage. When used with the MERLIN Attendant,
however, Call Forwarding functions somewhat differently. See the
MERLIN Plus MERLIN Attendant User’s Guide for more information on this
feature.
ADMINISTRATION
The system administrator must decide who will answer calls that come in after
hours and how those calls will be answered.
PROGRAMMING
For programming procedures for Call Pickup, Ring Override, and Call
Forwarding features, see the individual entries for these features in this section.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-101
HOW TO USE
For further information on the attendant console, see Section 4, “Using the
Attendant Console.” If you need help in using the Call Pickup, the Ring
Override, or the Call Forwarding features, see the entries “Call Pickup,”
“Ring Override,” or “Call Forwarding” in this section.
5-102 MERLIN Plus System Features
One-Touch Dialing
DESCRIPTION
In the MERLIN Plus system, there are six features that allow you to dial or redial
a telephone number with the touch of a button.
●
●
●
●
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
Outside Auto Dial — Dial an outside number by touching a button.
An Outside Auto Dial button can hold a maximum of 16 digits.
Auto Intercom — Dial an intercom number with one touch whenever you
want to call someone connected to your MERLIN Plus system.
System Speed Dial — If your system administrator has assigned a System
Speed Dial code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999) to a frequently
dialed telephone number or account number, you can program the speed dial
code onto an available voice terminal button. Then when you want to dial
the telephone number or enter the account number on a call report, just touch
the System Speed Dial button for that number.
Last Number Dial — If you have programmed a Last Number button for your
voice terminal, you can redial with one-touch the most recent number that
you dialed. Each time you want this feature to redial a number, you must
touch the programmed Last Number Dial button. You do not need to do
anything to save this number.
Busy Buster — This feature automatically redials the number you dialed
most recently up to ten times at 60-second intends. If someone answers the
call within this time, your voice terminal alerts you. To use this feature, the
system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voice terminal jack.
Saved Number Dial — If you have Saved Number buttons on your voice
terminal, you can save numbers for later redialing. When you are ready to
redial each of the telephone numbers, merely touch the Saved Number button
on which you have saved that number.
In order to use any one of these six One-Touch Dialing features, you must
program it onto an available button on your voice terminal.
The system administrator can use the Program Mode Lock feature to prevent
programming from individual voice terminals. If this feature is enabled for your
voice terminal, you will not be able to program these buttons.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
If you want to use any of the six One-Touch Dialing features, you must program
them onto your voice terminal. For programming procedures for each of the
features, see their separate entries in this section.
HOW TO USE
When you want to use one of the six One-Touch Dialing features, merely touch
the appropriate button.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-103
On-Hook Dialing
DESCRIPTION
Instead of using your handset to listen while you place a call, you may want to
use your voice terminal’s built-in speaker.
CONSIDERATIONS
When instructions in this guide tell you to lift your handset before dialing,
you may choose to leave your handset on-hook and use the speaker instead.
If you have a Speakerphone button, you can use it when you dial a call, so you
can speak with people hands-free. See the “Hands-Free Answer on Intercom”
feature in this section for more information on speakerphone guidelines.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To use the speaker while you place a call:
1
Without lifting your handset, touch Speakerphone or Speaker.
2
Dial the number.
3
When you hear the other person answer, begin your conversation.
Speakerphone
Tel. no.
If the line is busy, or if you get no answer:
1
Touch Speakerphone or Speaker to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
5-104 MERLIN Plus System Features
Outside Auto Dial
DESCRIPTION
You can use Outside Auto Dial to dial frequently used numbers and codes with
one touch. These numbers and codes can include telephone numbers, and PBX,
Centrex, or Custom Calling feature codes. You can include up to 16 numbers
and special characters in an Outside Auto Dial sequence.
CONSIDERATIONS
Any time instructions tell you to dial an outside number, you can touch an
Outside Auto Dial button instead if you have one programmed for the number
you want to dial.
IMPORTANT:
If you want to program an outside auto dial button for an
emergency number such as the police or fire department, the
FCC requires that you test the button to be sure you programmed
it properly only during off-peak hours.
You may need to program a pause, stop, or switchhook flash into an Outside
Auto Dial sequence, or you may need to switch from rotary to Touch-Tone
signals in the middle of a programmed dialing sequence. To do so, you must
enter one or more of the following special characters when you program the
sequence. (For more information about using special characters in a dialing
sequence, see “Special Characters in Dialing Sequences.”)
●
To program a pause, touch Hold.
●
To program a stop, touch Drop.
●
●
To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a number, touch Recall
and then touch Hold.
To program Touch-Tone Enable, touch Transfer.
Your MERLIN Plus system may work behind a PBX or a Centrex system or you
may want to use Custom Calling features. If so, use the PBX, Centrex, or
Customer Calling features exactly as their instructions describe. However, there
are two important exceptions:
●
Any PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling feature code that begins with a “#”
must be preceded by another “#” in order to operate in the MERLIN Plus
system. For example, if PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling instructions tell
you to dial #1234, you must dial ##1234 in order to use the feature.
NOTE:
●
ADMINISTRATION
If you will be doing this frequently, you may want to program ##on
a button.
When PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling instructions tell you to include a
switchhook flash, you must touch Recall instead, If you touch the
switchhook, you’ll disconnect the call.
None
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-105
PROGRAMMING
To program an Outside Auto Dial button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button with a name and/or a number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *90 plus a telephone number or a PBX or Centrex code (if you need to
include a special character in the dialing sequence, use the directions above).
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Home
Office
90
HOW TO USE
tel. no.
To dial an outside number with one touch:
1
Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset, touch the Outside
Auto Dial button for the number you want to dial.
Your voice terminal speaker goes on, and you hear dialing.
2
If you programmed the special character STOP in a dialing sequence, after
you hear the second dial tone, touch the Outside Auto Dial button again to
continue the dialing.
3
When you hear the other person answer, start speaking or lift your handset
then start speaking.
Home
Office
If the line is busy or if no one answers:
1
Touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
5-106 MERLIN Plus System Features
Personal Lines
DESCRIPTION
When the system administrator assigns lines to voice terminals, he or she can
select lines that will serve as personal lines for individuals in the business, such
as the president of the company. NO one else has these lines on his or her voice
terminal. Calls that come in on these personal lines will not ring at other voice
terminals or at the attendant’s console.
CONSIDERATIONS
A secretary can cover calls that come in on his or her boss’ personal line by
having the line assigned to his or her own voice terminal and programming the
line for immediate ring. A secretary can screen calls that come in on the
personal line by programming the line on the boss’ voice terminal to delayed ring
or no ring and programming the line at his or her own voice terminal for
immediate ring. (See “Ringing Options.”)
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To assign a personal line to a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice
terminal to which you want to assign a personal line.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button. Green lights also go on next to the
buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal.
3
To add the personal line, touch the line button associated with that line until
the green light next to it goes on.
NOTE:
4
If another voice terminal in your system has that line, you must
remove it from that voice terminal by dialing the intercom number
for that voice terminal and touching the line button that corresponds
with that line so that green light next to it goes off.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
T
Susan 15
555-1234
P
Administer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-107
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
You can begin speaking when a call comes in on your personal line. If you want
your personal line to be the first line in your Automatic Line Selection sequence,
tell your system administrator when he or she administers that feature for your
voice terminal. (See “Automatic Line Selection.”)
5-108 MERLIN Plus System Features
Personal Speed Dial
DESCRIPTION
If you don’t have many available buttons on which to program Outside Auto
Dial, you can use the programming instructions below to assign a 3-character
Personal Speed Dial code (from #01 through #24 for BIS-10 models and from
#01 through #12 for BIS-22 models) to telephone numbers, PBX, Centrex,
or Custom Calling feature codes you frequently dial.
You can assign a Personal Speed Dial code to a sequence containing up to 16
numbers and special characters.
CONSIDERATIONS
Personal Speed Dial uses a dialing code. You do not place these codes on a
voice terminal button.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
This feature is not associated with a voice terminal button.
Programming a Pause, Stop, or Switchhook Flash
You may need to program a pause, stop, or switchhook flash into a Personal
Speed Dial sequence, or you may need to switch from rotary to Touch-Tone
signals in the middle of a programmed dialing sequence. To do so, you must
enter one or more of the following special characters when you program the
sequence. (For more information about using special characters in a dialing
sequence, see “Special Characters in Dialing Sequences.”)
●
To program a pause, touch Hold.
●
To program a stop, touch Drop.
●
●
To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a number, touch Recall
and then touch Hold.
To program Touch-Tone Enable into a dialing sequence, touch Transfer.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-109
From a BIS-10 Voice Terminal
If you are using a BIS-10 voice terminal, use the following procedure to program
a Personal Speed Dial sequence:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
2
Dial a Personal Speed Dial code (#01 through #24).
NOTE:
Personal Speed Dial code #23 is preprogrammed for Saved Number
Dial and #24 is preprogrammed for Last Number Dial. You can
assign these Custom Calling features to different Personal Speed
Dial codes, using a slightly modified procedure. Here’s how to
program Last Number Dial or Saved Number Dial onto Personal
Speed Dial code #01:
a
Slide the T/P switch to P.
b
Dial #01.
c
Dial *90.
d
Dial #01 again.
e
Dial *73 for Last Number Dial or *74 for Saved Number Dial.
f
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
3
Dial *90 plus a telephone number or a PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling
feature code. Follow the instructions above if you need to include a special
character in the dialing sequence.
4
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
90
#01-#24
P
tel. no.
From a BIS-22 Voice Terminal
If you are using a BIS-22 voice terminal, use the following procedure to program
a Personal Speed Dial sequence:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
2
Dial a Personal Speed Dial code (#01 through #12).
3
Dial *90 plus a telephone number or a PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling
feature code. Follow the instructions above if you need to include a special
character in the dialing sequence.
4
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
#01-#12
5-110 MERLIN Plus System Features
90
tel. no.
P
HOW TO USE
From a BIS-10 Voice Terminal
To place a call using a Personal Speed Dial code:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset.
2
Dial a Personal Speed Dial code (#01 through #24).
3
If you programmed the special character STOP in a personal speed dial
sequence, after you hear the second dial tone, dial the Personal Speed Dial
code again to continue the dialing.
4
If the line is busy, touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
Speakerphone
#01-#24
From a BIS-22 Voice Terminal
To place a call using a Personal Speed Dial code:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset.
2
Dial a Personal Speed Dial code (#01 through #12).
3
If you programmed the special character STOP in a personal speed dial
sequence, after you hear the second dial tone dial the Personal Speed Dial
code again to continue the dialing.
4
If the line is busy, touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
Speakerphone
#01-#12
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-111
Personalized Ringing
DESCRIPTION
To make it easy for the right person to pick up calls in a group office, people in
this type of office may want to program their voice terminals with a ringing
pattern that is easier for each person to identify. There are eight different ringing
patterns available.
CONSIDERATIONS
Once you have programmed your Personalized Ringing selection, calls that ring
at your voice terminal have this ringing pattern. However, note that only the
second part of the transferring (one short and one long ring) has your
Personalized Ringing pattern.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To choose a ringing pattern that you like:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
You hear the ringing sound your voice terminal makes.
2
Touch Speakerphone or Speaker.
You hear another ringing pattern.
3
Touch Speakerphone or Speaker repeatedly until you hear a ringing pattern
you like.
4
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Speakerphone
HOW TO USE
P
Speakerphone
After you have programmed your Personalized Ringing preference, you don’t
need to do anything else to use the feature. When a call rings at your voice
terminal, you will hear the ringing pattern that you have chosen.
5-112 MERLIN Plus System Features
Privacy
DESCRIPTION
If you share an outside line with other people, you may choose to program a
Privacy button that allows you to control when others may join or monitor your
telephone conversations.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
The Privacy feature requires a button with lights.
To program a Privacy button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Privacy.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *72.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Privacy
72
HOW TO USE
To suspend the Privacy feature:
1
Touch Privacy.
The green light next to the button goes off.
Privacy
To activate the Privacy feature:
1
If the green light next to Privacy is off, touch the button.
The green light next to the button goes on.
Privacy
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-113
Privacy (on Lines A and E)
DESCRIPTION
The system administrator can administer the Privacy feature for Line A and/or
Line E so that no one in the system can bridge onto or monitor these lines while
a device plugged into the Aux jack is off-hook on Line A or Line E.
(See “Auxiliary Lines.”)
CONSIDERATIONS
This feature is used for a modem, facsimile machine, or other equipment
connected to the line through an auxiliary (AUX) jack on the control unit.
This Privacy must be administered and therefore is a different feature than the
Privacy feature that people can program for their voice terminals.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
1
2
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
Dial *57.
The green light goes on next to those lines that cannot be bridged or monitored.
3
If you want to change the Privacy setting of either Line A or Line E, touch
the line button until the green light next to it shows the setting you want:
Green light on = the line is private
Green light off = the line can be monitored
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
555-1234
Administer
57
T
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
5-114 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
Program
DESCRIPTION
By using the Test/Program switch and following the instructions listed below,
you can program features that you have selected for your voice terminal onto
available buttons.
CONSIDERATIONS
There are several programmable features that you can use with either a button or
a dial code. Therefore, if you have a limited number of available feature buttons
on your BIS-10 or BIS-22 voice terminal, you may choose to use a dial code
rather than program any of those features onto your voice terminal.
If you make a mistake when programming a button, simply touch the button
again and redial the programming code and all required numbers.
The system administrator can use the Program Mode Lock feature to prevent
people within the system from changing programming assignments on their
voice terminals. (See “Program Mode Lock.”)
ADMINISTRATION
The system administrator can program features onto individual voice terminals
by using the Centralized Programming feature. (See “Centralized
Programming.”)
PROGRAMMING
Individual feature programming codes are provided in programming instructions
in the reference description for each programmable feature and in Section 6,
“Quick Reference Guides.”
HOW TO USE
To program a feature onto your voice terminal:
1
Type or print on the button label strips all the names of the features you want
to program. Then insert the labels into the appropriate slots on your
voice terminal.
2
Slide the T/P (Test/Program) switch on the left side of the voice terminal to
the P (Program) position.
The green lights next to the buttons begin flashing.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Consult the programming instructions in the specific feature’s entry in this
section or use the codes listed in the “Quick Reference Guides” at the end of
this section to determine the feature’s programming code. (You can also refer
to the MERLIN Plus System User’s Guide for programming codes.)
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-115
4
Touch the first button you want to program.
5
Dial the required programming code and any other numbers required.
6
Touch the second button you want to program and dial the required
programming code and numbers. Continue to follow this procedure for all
other buttons you want to program.
7
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Button
code
5-116 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
Program Mode Lock
DESCRIPTION
The system administrator may choose to disable (or “lock”) the programming
function at an individual voice terminal so that the person at the voice terminal
cannot change the programmed assignments. When a voice terminal’s T/P
switch is locked, programming for that voice terminal can be done only at the
administrator/attendant console. This feature can be administered for an
individual voice terminal or for all voice terminals in the system, except the
administrator/attendant console.
CONSIDERATIONS
To program features onto a voice terminal, the administrator can use the
Centralized Programming or the Copy feature.
The T/P switch allows a person to test the voice terminal lights and ringing of the
voice terminal and program features on the voice terminal. When the system
administrator has locked the programming function at a particular voice
terminal, the person at the voice terminal can still slide the T/P switch to both the
Test and the Program positions and can use the Test option only. However, the
person cannot change any programmed features at the voice terminal.
When your MERLIN Plus system comes from the factory, programming can be
done by the user at his or her own voice terminal (each voice terminal’s
T/P switch is unlocked).
The administrator/attendant console connected to jack 10 cannot be locked out
of program mode.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To lock or unlock the programming function on an individual voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *89.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-117
3
Perform one of the following procedures:
>
Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal that you are
administering.
Green light on = the voice terminal is locked.
Green light off = programming can be done from the voice terminal.
>
If You don’t have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal, then use
the corresponding dial code from the chart below:
If the intercom
number is:
Dial this code:
If the intercom
number is:
Intercom 10
Intercom 11
#22
#21
Intercom 20
Intercom 21
#20
Intercom 22
Intercom 23
intercom 24
Intercom 25
Intercom 26
Intercom 27
Intercom 28
Intercom 29
Intercom 12
Intercom 13
Intercom 14
Intercom 15
Intercom 16
Intercom 17
#19
#18
#17
#16
#15
#14
#13
Intercom 18
Intercom 19
4
Dial this code:
#03
#04
#05
#06
#07
#08
#09
#10
#11
#12
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
89
T
P
Administer
If you want to lock the programming function on all the voice terminals in your
system (except the administrator/attendant console connected to jack 10):
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *89.
3
Perform one of the following procedures according to whether you want to
lock or unlock the programming function at all the voice terminals in
your system:
> Touch Conference to lock every voice terminal in your system.
A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button corresponding to the appropriate
voice terminals. The voice terminals are locked; they cannot enter programming mode.
> Touch Drop to unlock all voice terminals in your system.
A green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button corresponding to the appropriate
voice terminals. The voice terminals are unlocked; they can enter programming mode
when necessary.
5-118 MERLIN Plus System Features
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Conference
Administer
89
T
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Check with your system administrator to see if you can program features at your
voice terminal or if programming can be done only at the administrator/attendant
console.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-119
Recall
DESCRIPTION
If you are on a PBX or Centrex system, you can use the Recall feature when
directions tell you to include a switchhook flash.
CONSIDERATIONS
By touching the Recall button, you will get one of the following:
●
A new dial tone.
●
Access to Custom-calling services.
If you have PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling features, you must touch Recall
any time instructions call for a switchhook flash. By touching the Recall button,
you automatically place a specially timed pause onto the line. If you press the
switchhook instead, you disconnect your call.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To use Recall as a switchhook flash:
1
Touch Recall.
Recall
5-120 MERLIN Plus System Features
Remote Line Access (RLA)
NOTE:
Remote Line Access (RLA) is an ASA feature and therefore, requires
the assignment of the ASA jack. If the ASA jack assignment has not yet
been made, refer to “Automatic System Access” in this section before
attempting to administer this feature.
DESCRIPTION
When the system is in RLA mode, you can call in from outside (for example,
from your home phone) and use a password to gain access to one of the system’s
outside lines. You can also use RLA to change the telephone number to which
calls are being forwarded during CF operation. (For more information, see
“Call Forwarding” earlier in this section.) In RLA mode, the Voice Synthesis
Processor (VSP) prompts callers through the procedures for entering a password
and gaining access to an outside line.
CONSIDERATIONS
RLA operation requires the following:
●
At least one programmed button with red and green lights
●
An incoming line group
When you use an RLA button to activate RLA, the system will treat as
RLA calls only those calls that come in on lines specifically assigned to the
RLA incoming line group. At startup, none of the outside lines are included
in the RLA line group. There are simple administration procedures for
changing the makeup of the RLA line group.
NOTE:
●
If the system is in both CF/DXD and RLA modes and the lines
overlap, CF/DXD takes precedence.
Passwords
To gain access to one of the system’s outside lines during RLA operation, a
caller must enter a valid 5-digit password when prompted to do so by the
voice message. The administration procedure that follows is for assigning
passwords. The first two digits of a password must be an intercom number in
the system. The remaining three digits can be any three digits. Once the
caller has gained access to the system, the caller’s identity is verified against
the password, including the intercom number, and any restrictions that apply
to the caller’s voice terminal apply to the current call.
●
A synthesized voice message
For RLA operation, the voice message is a series of voice prompts
automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit. You cannot modify or
turn off the voice prompts for RLA.
●
Either RLA or CF/DXD buttons must be activated
To call in from a remote location, the MERLIN Plus system must be set to
RLA or CF/DXD mode. Therefore, if you plan to use RLA during business
off hours (weekends, evenings) be sure either the RLA or CF/DXD button is
on before the office is closed.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-121
●
●
Call Forwarding should be used only at night if your system has one or more
MERLIN Attendants, and you do not have dedicated lines for Call
Forwarding. To use Call Forwarding at night with the MERLIN Attendant,
activate this feature before leaving the office at the end of the business day,
and deactivate it as soon as your business day begins.
The Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer should be used
in conjunction with CF if your Central Office (CO) does not provide a
“forward disconnect” signal to your MERLIN Plus system. (See “Call
Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer” in this section.)
An outward restricted user can only dial numbers that are present in an
allowed list.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
RLA Line Groups
At startup, none of the system’s outside lines are assigned to the RLA line group.
To use this feature, you will need to assign line group(s) as follows:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *54 for the incoming line group.
The green lights go on next to the buttons for the lines currently assigned to
the list.
Green light on = line is assigned to the group
Green lighl off = line is not assigned to the group
3
Touch line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for the
line group.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
555-1234
54
T
Administer
5-122 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
Passwords
You and others in your business must enter a password to use RLA.
The password is 5-digits and must be entered in order to gain access to an
outside line using RLA or to change the current call forward number from a
remote location. The first two numbers in the password are the caller’s intercom
number.
To create or invalidate a password, follow this procedure:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *56.
3
To create a password for a particular intercom number, dial a MERLIN Plus
system intercom number plus any three digits (except 000).
The console beeps twice.
4
To invalidate any password beginning with a particular intercom number,
dial the intercom number plus 000. Repeat the procedure for more passwords.
The console beeps twice.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
56
Icom. no.
+ 123
Number of Rings
To change the number of rings (the default is two rings) before the RLA call is
answered:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *763 plus the number of rings (between 0 and 9) before the RLA feature
picks up the call.
If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal will not ring,
and the calls will be immediately answered.
NOTE:
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
P
Administer
76307639
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-123
PROGRAMMING
A button with a green light next to it is recommended for the RLA feature.
To program an RLA button on a voice terminal:
1
Label the button RLA.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you’re programming and can’t
receive or place calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *84.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
RLA
84
HOW TO USE
Using the RLA Button
Touching the RLA button toggles the system back and forth between the normal
mode and the RLA mode. You can tell which mode you are in by the status of
the green light next to the RLA button.
Green light on = RLA mode
Green light off = Normal mode
Green light flashing = Problem with RLA
If the green light next to the RLA button is flashing, notify the system
administrator who should refer to Section 7, “Troubleshooting,” to correct the
problem.
Gaining Access to a Line using RLA
If the system is in RLA mode, you can gain access to an outside line from a
remote location by following this procedure:
NOTE:
If you will be using this feature, ask your system administrator for the
handy MERLIN Plus CF/RLA Card that provides instructions for RLA.
1
Dial the telephone number of a line in the RLA incoming line group.
2
When the call is answered, the VSP begins prompting you through the
procedure in which the following information is called for:
NOTE:
●
5-124 MERLIN Plus System Features
The system verifies each response, such as the correct password or
unrestricted lines or telephone numbers. If the response is incorrect
or not allowed, the system requests the caller to respond again.
Enter the 5-digit password (the first two digits are a valid intercom
number).
●
Enter the line number of the outside line you want to make your call on.
●
Enter the telephone number you want to reach plus a #.
3
When you have finished responding to the voice prompts, you will hear
normal call-progress tones (ringing, busy signal, fast busy signal, etc.).
4
Complete your call as usual.
If the system is in either CF or DXD mode, you can gain access to a line in the
RLA outgoing line group from a remote location by following this procedure.
1
Depending on the mode the system is in, dial the telephone number for a line
in either the CF or the DXD incoming line group.
When the call is answered, the VSP gives the appropriate message.
2
During the voice message, dial *#*.
The VSP begins prompting you through the RLA procedure
3
Respond appropriately to the voice prompts until you hear normal
call-progress tones (ringing, busy signal, fast busy signal, etc.).
4
Complete your call as usual.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-125
Ring Override
DESCRIPTION
Sometimes you may want all of your calls to ring immediately, even if you have
programmed the lines on your voice terminal to ring after a delay or not at all.
(See “Ringing Options.”) For instance, you may need to cover calls for someone
who shares one of your lines. You can use a Ring Override button to temporarily
override the ringing option you have established.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
A button with lights is recommended but not required.
To program a Ring Override button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Ring Override.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *78.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Ring
Override
78
HOW TO USE
To have all your calls ring immediately at your voice terminal:
1
Touch Ring Override.
If you have programmed this feature on a button with lights, the green light goes on.
Ring
Override
To return to your programmed line ringing:
1
Touch Ring Override again.
The green light goes off.
Ring
Override
5-126 MERLIN Plus System Features
Ringing Line Preference
DESCRIPTION
When you receive an outside call, the MERLIN Plus system automatically
connects you to the ringing line.
CONSIDERATIONS
If you want to place an outside call while one of the lines on your voice terminal
is ringing or in use, touch the line button of the line you want to use. When you
touch Speakerphone or lift the handset, the MERLIN Plus system connects you
to the line you have selected.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
When you receive an outside call:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
The MERLIN Plus system connects you to the ringing line.
Speakerphone
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-127
Ringing Options
DESCRIPTION
You can designate incoming calls to ring immediately at your voice terminal,
ring at a second voice terminal if they are not answered at the first one after two
rings (delayed ring), or not ring at all. When your system is installed, the lines at
each voice terminal ring immediately when a call comes in on them. However,
you can change this so that people in your office can answer calls at their desk
for someone who is away or you can program phones in public places not to ring.
CONSIDERATIONS
The following tips are useful for deciding how and when voice terminals in your
MERLIN Plus system should ring.
Immediate Ring: People responsible for answering incoming calls, such as the
system attendant, should have the lines on their voice terminals programmed for
immediate ring. You can also use this option for private lines that don’t need to
be screened or for people who answer their own calls.
Delayed Ring: You can provide backup coverage on a shared line by having that
line ring at a second voice terminal only after it has rung a few times somewhere
else. Then, when calls come in for a person who is away from his or her desk,
that person’s calls will ring at a second voice terminal, the voice terminal
belonging to a backup person. Delayed ring is often useful for a secretary who
can pick up calls for someone on a personal line.
No Ring: People who do not normally answer incoming calls should have their
lines programmed for no ring. You may also prefer to program telephones in
public places, such as lobbies or conference rooms, not to ring. A line
programmed for no ring does not ring on outside calls, but does ring for
transferred and intercom calls. Even though the phones don’t ring, they still can
pickup lines that appear on the voice terminal.
NOTE:
Lines that appear on all telephones in your MERLIN Plus system must
be administered for No Ring at any telephone that has an answering
machine.
If one answering machine is to be used to take messages for all
telephones in your system, then all telephones should be administered
for immediate ring.
If you decide that you want a line that you have programmed for delayed ring or
no ring to temporarily ring immediately, program the Ring Override feature.
(See “Ring Override.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
5-128 MERLIN Plus System Features
PROGRAMMING
To program the line ringing option you prefer:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
2
Touch the line button for which you want to program immediate, delayed, or
no ringing.
3
Dial one of these codes for the type of ringing you want the line to have:
> Dial *35 for no ring.
The red light next to the line button goes off.
> Dial *36 for delayed ring.
The red light next to the line button flashes.
> Dial *37 for immediate ring.
The red light next to the line button goes on steady.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each line button you want to program.
5
When you are finished programming, slide the T/P switch to the center
position.
T
T
P
P
555-1234
35-
HOW TO USE
37
Even if you program the lines on your voice terminal not to ring, you can tell if a
call comes in for you because the ‘green light next to the line button still flashes.
To answer the call:
1
Touch the line button next to the flashing green light.
2
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
555-1234
Speakerphone
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-129
Saved Number Dial
DESCRIPTION
If you have programmed a Saved Number Dial button, you can use the button to
save an important number for one-touch dialing at a later time. If the number
you call is busy or no one answers, or if you need to call the person back, you
can save that number by touching Saved Number before you hang up. Later,
when you touch Saved Number again, your voice terminal automatically redials
the number you have saved.
CONSIDERATIONS
You can program more than one Saved Number Dial button for your voice
terminal, so that, if necessary, you can save different calls during the day.
Be sure to write on a separate sheet of paper the identity of each person called
and/or telephone number for each Saved Number button.
You may prefer to use a dial code rather than program a button in order to use
the Saved Number Dial feature.
A Saved Number Dial button saves both manually dialed numbers and numbers
dialed with an Outside Auto Dial button, and numbers saved on a Last Number
Dial button.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program a Saved Number Dial button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Saved Number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *74 (you do not need to dial an outside number).
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Saved
Number
74
5-130 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
HOW TO USE
You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature.
To save a number for redialing:
1
Before you touch Speakerphone or hang up your handset from a call in
progress, touch Saved Number or dial #23, if you haven’t already
programmed this personal speed dial code.
2
Touch Speakerphone or hang up your handset.
Saved
Number
Speakerphone
The MERLIN Plus system saves this number until you repeat this procedure to
save another number.
To redial this number later:
1
Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset, repeat the first step
you used to save the number. So if you touched Saved Number, touch it
again or if you dialed #23, dial it again.
Your voice terminal speaker goes on, and you hear dialing.
2
When you hear the other person answer, touch Speakerphone or lift your
handset and begin talking.
Saved
Number
Speakerphone
If the line is busy, or if no one answers:
1
Touch Speakerphone, or hang up to cancel the call.
Speakerphone
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-131
Send Message
DESCRIPTION
The system attendant can turn on the Message light at the voice terminals of
people in the MERLIN Plus system in order to alert them that they have a
message. (See “Message.”)
CONSIDERATIONS
The Message light at voice terminals in the system can only be turned on at the
attendant/administrator voice terminal. The alternate attendant position cannot
turn on the message light.
If your administrator/attendant console is a BIS-22 with more than ten voice
terminals on the system, the attendant can still use the Send Message feature by
following the directions below. However, he or she will not know if the light is
already on at the voice terminal.
If you’ve programmed Personal Speed Dial numbers, such as LND or SND, onto
Auto Intercom buttons, then you cannot use those buttons with the Send
Message feature.
5-Button voice terminals do not have a Message button.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
From a BIS-34 Console
If you are using a BIS-34 console, use the following procedure to turn on the
message light at a voice terminal:
1
At the administrator/attendant voice terminal, touch Send Message.
2
Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person’s voice terminal.
The red ligh next to the Auto Intercom button goes on, indicating the person’s
Message light is on.
NOTE:
To turn off the light, repeat the steps.
Send
Message
5-132 MERLIN Plus System Features
Susan 15
From a BIS-22 Console
If you are using a BIS-22 console, use one of the following procedures to turn on
the message light at a voice terminal:
1
At the administrator/attendant console, touch Send Message.
2
Follow one of these procedures:
>
Touch an Auto Intercom button that the attendant has programmed for
the person.
>
Dial a 3-character code corresponding to the Send Message button code
on the following chart.
NOTE:
To turn off the light, repeat the steps used to turn it on.
Auto
Intercom
Send
Message
From a BIS-10 Console
If you are using a BIS-10 console, use the following procedure to turn on the
message light at a voice terminal:
1
At the administrator/attendant console, touch Send Message.
2
Dial a 3-character code corresponding to the Send Message dial code on the
following chart.
Dial this Send
Message dial
code:
If the intercom
number is:
Intercom 10
Intercom 11
Intercom 12
Intercom 13
Intercom 14
Intercom 15
Intercom 16
Intercom 17
Intercom 18
Intercom 19
#22
#21
#20
#19
#18
#17
#16
#15
#14
#13
If the intercom
number is:
Intercom 20
Intercom 21
Intercom 22
Intercom 23
Intercom 24
Intercom 25
Intercom 26
Intercom 27
Intercom 28
Intercom 29
Dial this Send
Message dial
code:
#03
#04
#05
#06
#07
#08
#09
#10
#11
#12
For example, the attendant may want to turn on the Message light at Intercom 21,
but does not have an Auto Intercom button for that person. The attendant refers
to the chart above and finds that the Send Message dial code is #04. Then from a
BIS-22 console the attendant touches Send Message and dials #04 to light the
message light.
NOTE:
To turn off a message light at a voice terminal, repeat the steps above.
Send
Message
#03-#22
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-133
Speaker
DESCRIPTION
If your voice terminal does not have a speakerphone button, you can use your
voice terminal speaker when you have dialed a call or been put on hold to
monitor a line without lifting your handset. You can also allow others in your
office to hear a conversation while you have a call in progress. There are three
main ways to use your speaker:
●
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
On-Hook Dialing —Without lifting your handset, turn on the voice terminal
speaker and dial an outside or intercom number. (You can also use the
one-touch dialing features for this purpose. See “One-Touch Dialing.”)
Monitor-on-Hold —If someone puts you on hold, you can turn on your voice
terminal speaker, hang up, and continue working until the person returns to
the call.
Group Listening —By turning on your voice terminal speaker during a
telephone conversation, you can allow others in your office to hear a call.
This feature is not available on the BIS models.
When you touch an Outside Auto Dial button or an Auto Intercom button, your
voice terminal speaker automatically goes on and you hear dialing.
When you use the Group Listening feature, your speaker may make a squealing
noise when the handset comes close to it. To prevent this, touch Speaker when
you have completed a call and are ready to hang up your handset. Another way
to reduce the squealing sound is to turn down the volume control on your voice
terminal. This feature is not available on the BIS-10, BIS-22, BIS-22D, BIS-34,
or BIS-34D.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To use On-Hook Dialing:
1
Without lifting your handset, touch Speaker.
2
Dial the number.
3
When you hear the other person answer, lift your handset to speak.
Speaker
tel. no.
5-134 MERLIN Plus System Features
If the line is busy, or if you get no answer:
1
Touch Speaker to cancel the call.
Speaker
To use Monitor-on-Hold:
1
When you have been put on hold, touch Speaker.
2
Hang up.
3
When you hear the other person return to the call, lift your handset and
continue the call.
Speaker
To use Group Listening:
1
Without hanging up, touch Speaker, and continue your conversation.
Speaker
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-135
Special Characters in Dialing Sequences
DESCRIPTION
You may need to program a pause, stop, or switchhook flash into an Outside
Auto Dial, a Personal Speed Dial, a Disallowed List, or a System Speed Dial
sequence, or YOU may need to switch from rotary to Touchstone signals in the
middle of a programmed dialing sequence. To do so, you must enter one or more
special characters when you program the sequence.
CONSIDERATIONS
The switchhook flash can be used only at the beginning of a programmed dialing
sequence. Your MERLIN Plus system may work behind a PBX or a Centrex
system, or you may use Custom Calling features. If so, use the PBX, Centrex, or
Custom Calling features exactly as their instructions describe. However, there
are two important exceptions:
●
Any PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling feature code that begins with a “#”
must be preceded by another “#” in order to operate in the MERLIN Plus
system. For example, if PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling instructions tell
you to dial #1234, you must actually dial ##1234. For your convenience,
you may want to program a ## button, if you need to follow this procedure
frequently.
●
When PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling instructions tell you to include a
switchhook flash, you must touch Recall instead. If you touch the
switchhook, you’ll disconnect the call.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
Use the following procedures to enter special characters into a dialing sequence.
Pause
Program a pause (1.5 seconds) into a dialing sequence. For example, you may
need a pause between an access code, such as a 9, and an outside telephone
number in an Outside Auto Dial sequence.
1
Dial the access code, such as a 9.
2
Touch Hold (Pause).
3
Dial the outside telephone number.
Hold
code
5-136 MERLIN Plus System Features
Pause
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
tel. no.
Stop
Program a stop into a dialing sequence to wait for a second dial tone. For
example, you may need to program a stop between a local telephone number and
an alternate long distance authorization code.
1
Dial the local telephone number (seven digits).
2
Touch Drop (Stop).
3
Dial the authorization code (five or six digits).
■
■
■
■
Drop
tel. no.
Stop
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
code
Switchhook Flash
Program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a dialing sequence. For example,
you may need to program a button with a PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling
feature code that calls for a switchhook flash.
1
Touch Recall.
2
Touch Hold (Pause).
3
Dial the PBX or Centrex dial code sequence that gives you access to the
feature you want to program.
Hold
Recall
Pause
code
Touch-Tone Enable
Program Touch-Tone Enable into a dialing sequence on a line with rotary signal.
For example, you may need to use a credit card authorization service.
1
Touch Transfer.
2
Dial the credit card authorization code.
Transfer
code
HOW TO USE
If your MERLIN Plus system works behind a PBX or a Centrex system,
or you are using the Custom Calling features, follow these directions:
1
When PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling feature instructions tell you to dial a
“#,” dial a second “#.” For example, if the instructions tell you to dial #4567,
you must actually dial ##4567 in order to use the feature with the
MERLIN Plus system.
If your PBX, Centrex, or Custom Calling feature instructions tell you to use a
stop, touch Drop instead and for a switchhook flash, touch Recall instead.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-137
System Answer (SA)
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
System Answer is an ASA feature and therefore requires the assignment
of the ASA jack. If the ASA jack assignment has not yet been made,
refer to “Automatic System Access” in this section before attempting to
administer this feature.
When a call comes in, you can set the System Answer (SA) feature to
automatically answer the call and place it on hold, or provide a brief message
before placing the call on hold. If a compatible audio-source (tape player, radio,
or stereo) is plugged into the Music-On-Hold jack (see “Music-On-Hold” under
“Accessory Equipment” in this section), you have the option of playing a
pre-recorded message about your business (hours of operation, special
promotions, numbers to call, etc.), or allowing callers to hear music once the call
is placed on hold. To answer the held call, touch the line button.
CONSIDERATIONS
This feature can be activated only at the position assigned to the attendant.
This will be intercom 10 unless an Alternate Attendant position has been
assigned. System Answer must be deactivated (green light off) whenever you
reassign the attendant position.
This feature can also be activated while a call is ringing. That call will be
answered immediately and subsequent calls will automatically be answered after
the administered number of rings. When the system is first set up, up to eight
lines can be answered by SA and the caller will hear two rings before
the SA message.
When administering an alternate attendant position, this feature must be
turned off.
This feature cannot be copied using the Copy administration procedure.
If copying is attempted, the receiving voice terminal will have an empty button
in the corresponding position.
NOTE:
If the system has System Answer active along with either the CF/DXD
or RLA features and the assigned incoming line groups overlap, the
CF/DXD or RLA features will take precedence.
System Answer feature must be deactivated when assigning the line groups.
If an Alternate Attendant is assigned after the System Answer line groups are
assigned, the line groups remain the same, even if the line does not appear at the
Alternate Attendant position. However, the line cannot be answered at the
Alternate Attendant position if it does not appear there. Also if a call is ringing
on a line that does not appear on the console defined as the attendant, touching
SA will not answer the call.
System Answer cannot be used in conjunction with a MERLIN Attendant.
(See the MERLIN Plus MERLIN Attendant User’s Guide.)
5-138 MERLIN Plus System Features
ADMINISTRATION
Follow the administration procedure under “Automatic System Access” in this
section, for ASA jack assignments. If your responsibilities do not include
administration, skip this information.
SA Line Groups
To add lines that can be answered by SA:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding T/P to P and touching Administer.
2
Dial *75.
3
Touch the incoming line button that you are adding to or removing from the
feature.
Green light on = line can be answered by SA
Green light off = line cannot be answered by SA
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
P
Administer
555-1234
75
Number of Rings
To change the number of rings (the default is two rings) before SA
answers a call:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *764 plus the number of rings (between 0 and 9) before the SA feature
picks up the call.
NOTE:
3
If the number of rings is set to 0, the voice terminal will not ring,
and the calls will be immediately answered by SA.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
76407649
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-139
Voice Message
To select a message to be played to the caller for lines answered by SA:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding T/P to P and touching Administer.
2
Dial *77 followed by the option desired. (Message 2 is the default):
0
1
2
NOTE:
3
=
=
=
No voice message; call is immediately placed on hold
Message says, “Please hold.”
Message says, “Please hold, your call will be handled momentarily.”
If a line number is administered using *50, this message precedes
message 1 and 2: “You have reached . . .” where . . . is a number
entered by the system administrator in “Call Forwarding.”
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Administer
Administer
770772
PROGRAMMING
To program a System Answer button on a voice terminal:
NOTE:
Only the attendant or the alternate attendant can have a System Answer
button. The voice terminal does not have to be at Intercom #10.
1
Label the button “System Answer.”
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannel place or receive calls.
3
Touch System Answer.
4
Dial the time-digit code *58.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
System
Answer
58
5-140 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
HOW TO USE
To activate the System Answer feature:
1
Touch System Answer.
Green light on = SA on
Green light off = SA off
Green light flushing = Problem with SA
If the green SA light is flashing, report the problem to the system administrator
who should refer to Section 7, “Troubleshooting,” to correct the problem.
System
Answer
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-141
System Feature Report (SFR)
NOTE:
DESCRIPTION
This feature is used with a MERLIN Plus system data collector and an
AT&T 475/476 or 572/573 printer or equivalent.
If the system administrator needs to verify the features administered to the
system or needs a written copy of the lines and features on each voice terminal,
he or she can use the data collector and the printer to print a System Feature
Report. This report lists both systemwide features and programmed features and
lines on individual voice terminals.
The system features that can be printed on the System Feature Report are:
●
Disallowed List assignments for each voice terminal.
●
Allowed List assignments for each voice terminal
●
Transfer Return Interval
●
Call Report settings, such as the minimum call duration of a call for which
the Call Report feature will print information
●
System Speed Dial numbers
●
Automatic System Access (ASA) administration
The voice terminal features that can be printed on the System Feature Report are:
●
The intercom number of the voice terminal
●
The voice terminal model type
●
Optional accessories used with the voice terminal
●
Voice Announcement Enable/Disable
●
Automatic Line Selection sequences
●
The lines and features assigned to all buttons on the voice terminal
Figure 5-3 shows a printout of a typical SFR.
CONSIDERATIONS
The System Feature Report feature can be accessed only from the
administrator/attendant console.
If the system administrator wants to have the date and time on the System
Feature Report, the administrator can set these options on the control unit when
he or she administers the date and time for the Call Report feature.
(See “Call Report.”)
The system administrator can connect the data collector and the printer to any
voice terminal jack in the system, except jack 10. However, if the printer and
data collector have already been assigned to a voice terminal jack for the
Call Report feature, usually jack 19, it is best to use the same jack assignment for
the System Feature Report.
5-142 MERLIN Plus System Features
FIGURE 5-3 A printout of a typical System Feature Report.
A
A
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION
OPTIONE
Data: 04.01.89
Time: 05:55:45
A
MISCELLANEOUS
FEATURES:
A
(*14)
A 1. MUSIC-ON-HOLD VOLUME IS:
MEDIUM
A
MEDIUM
(*13)
A 2. BACKGROUND MUSIC VOLUME IS:
A
A 3. TRANSFER RETURN (*2): 4 rings
A
TOLL PREFIX:
A 4. L0NG DISTANCE DIALING:
(*38)
A
TOUCH
TONE
(*38)
A 5. DIAL SIGNAL:
A
1 MINUTES 10 SECONDS
A 6. CALL REPORT MINIMUM CALL DURATION (*83):
A
NO CALL REPORT (0)
A 7. TYPE OF CALLS REPORTED (*84):
A
A
A AUTO SYSTEM ACCESS (ASA) FEATURES:
A
(*30): ON
A 1. CALL FORWARD ANNOUNCEMENT MESSAGE OPTION IS
A
(*53):
A 2. CALL FORWARD TELEPHONE NUMBER IS
12125551000
A
A 3. REMOTE LINE ACCESS PASSWORDS ARE (*56):
19000
A 10388 11999
12000
13000
14000
15000
16000
17000
18000
A 20000 21000
22000
23000
28000 29000
24000 25000 26000
27000
A
*08):
A ALLOWED LIST (*01 A [X=in list. .=not in list]
A [List Entries are printed for each list following the station list)
A
A
ICOM NUMBER:
A LIST
10
15
20
25
A
1
:
X...X XXXXX
XXXX.
..XXX
976
A
212976
A
A
NOTE:
If you are using the same printer and data collector for both features and
change the voice terminal jack assignment, you must administer the
new jack assignment for both features.
You cannot use the same jack that you used for ASA but you can use
the same jack that you used for BB, by using the 450F adapter and cord
supplied with the data collector. If necessary, you can change the jack
assignments for BB and ASA.
The report for each voice terminal shows all voice terminals as having
34-buttons. This allows flexibility for upgrading and changing voice terminals.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-143
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
ADMINISTRATION
To set the date and the time, to assign a voice terminal jack for the System
Feature Report, and to print or to cancel a report, use the following procedures.
The Date and the Time
(If you have already set the date and time for the
Call Report feature, you don’t have to do it again.)
To set today’s date:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *80.
3
Dial two digits for the month (01 through 12).
4
Dial two digits for the day (01 through 31).
5
Dial two digits for the year (00 through 99).
For example, if the date is May 16, 1986, dial *80 05 16 86.
6
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
80
T
month
day
year
P
Administer
To set the current time:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *81.
3
Dial two digits for the hour (00 through 23).
4
Dial two digits for the minute (00 through 59).
For example, if the time is 3:25 A.M., dial *81 03 25; if the time is 3:25 P.M.,
dial *81 15 25.
5
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
6
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Administer
01
T
Administer
5-144 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
hour
minute
Control Unit Jack Assignment for the System Feature Report
To assign a voice terminal jack on the control unit for the System Feature
Report:
NOTE:
The system is factory-set to have the data collector and printer
connected to voice terminal jack 19 for the System Feature Report
feature.
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *85.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to
which the data collector and the printer will be connected for the
Call Report feature.
The green light next to the current jack assignment goes off; the green light next to the
Auto intercom button for the jack to which the data collector and the printer will be
connected goes on.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Call
Report 29
Administer
85
T
P
Administer
Complete System Report
To print out a system administration report and a report for every voice terminal
in your system:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *60.
The printer prints the reports as it receives the data from the system.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
60
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-145
System Administration Report
To print out a system administration report only:
1
2
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
Dial *61.
The printer prints the report as it receives data from the system.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
61
Individual Voice Terminal Reports
To print out individual reports on one or more voice terminals:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *62.
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button(s) or dial the intercom number(s) of the
voice terminal(s) for which you want a report.
The printer prints the report as it receives data from the system.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
Susan 15
Administer
62
T
Administer
5-146 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
Printout Cancellation
To cancel a printout in progress and to delete all waiting report requests:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *63.
The printer stops printing.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
P
Administer
63
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-147
System Reset
WARNING:
This feature is intended for service personnel only.
DESCRIPTION
When the service person or the administrator uses System Reset, the entire
MERLIN Plus system is set to the initial feature assignments, and consequently
erases any system administration, such as System Speed Dial numbers or call
restrictions. It is useful when making radical changes to the system or starting
administration over again.
CONSIDERATIONS
When the the service person on the administrator resets the system, all
programming done for any voice terminal in the MERLIN Plus system is erased.
If the administrator has administered customized line assignments for any voice
terminal, these are erased also, and the line configuration is returned to square
operation. All administered features are erased.
ADMINISTRATION
System Reset requires readministering your system and reprogramming
all voice terminals.
To reset your system to the initial feature assignments:
1
2
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
Dial *99198.
The console beeps twice.
NOTE:
3
If the console beeps only once or not at all, the reset didn’t work,
probably because someone was using the system when you dialed
the System Reset code. Wait until no one is using the system, and
try the reset again.
Go to the control unit and turn off the power for ten seconds,
then turn it back on.
The red lights go on, and the green lights flash.
The console rings every 5 seconds.
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
Administer
OFF
99198
5-148 MERLIN Plus System Features
T
ON
P
Administer
P
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
This feature is recommended for service personnel only.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-149
System Speed Dial
DESCRIPTION
The administrator can store System Speed Dial codes for telephone numbers,
such as a warehouse number or a branch office number, and account numbers
that people in the office frequently use. People can then dial the number simply
by dialing the proper Speed Dial code. Your MERLIN Plus system can store up
to 130 System Speed Dial numbers. System Speed Dial is particularly useful
when the administrator wants to give users access to a specific number, for
instance, an authorization code for an alternate long-distance service, but does
not want to divulge the number.
For more information about assigning a System Speed Dial code to account
numbers that the administrator wants to appear on call reports, see
“Account Number Entry.”
CONSIDERATIONS
You can program a System Speed Dial code for an area code and an exchange.
Then when you want to dial a telephone number that begins with this area code
and exchange, you can dial the Speed Dial code or touch the button programmed
for the Speed Dial code, and then dial the remainder of the telephone number or
use another Speed Dial code. The MERLIN Plus system can hold a maximum of
130 System Speed Dial codes of up to 16 digits each.
IMPORTANT:
If you want to program a System Speed Dial code for an
emergency number such as police or fire departments, the FCC
requires that you test that the number was programmed correctly
only during off-peak hours.
The system administrator can assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone
numbers with or without Restriction Override.
●
●
If the administrator decides to store a System Speed Dial code with
Restriction Override, all voice terminals in the system can use the code as a
type of password that allows the person to access the outside number,
regardless of Disallowed List, toll or outward call restrictions previously
placed on the voice terminal.
The administrator may decide to store a System Speed Dial code without
Restriction Override so that the Disallowed List, and all toll or outward
restrictions placed on voice terminals continue to apply.
For System Speed Dial codes assigned to telephone numbers,
the administrator can specify which Speed Dial codes will be printed on call
reports (see “Call Report”), which codes will be displayed on display sets, and
which ones will be private.
5-150 MERLIN Plus System Features
It is sometimes necessary to include a pause, stop, or switchhook flash, or to
switch from rotary to Touch-Tone signals within a dialing sequence. To do so,
the administrator must enler one or more of the following special characters into
the dialing sequence. However, if you do use the special characters in the
dialing sequence, you cannot use Recall to retry the number for you.
●
To program a pause, touch Hold.
●
To program a stop, touch Drop.
●
To program Touch-Tone Enable, touch Transfer.
●
To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a dialing sequence, touch
Recall and then touch Hold.
NOTE:
If the first digit of a System Speed Dial number is the special
character Recall, follow it by a pause (also a special character)
when programming the dial sequence. If you need to use Recall in
other than the first digit of the dialing sequence of a System Speed
Dial number, you cannot use the Speed Dial feature.
(For more information about using special characters in a dialing
sequence, including PBX, Centrex, and Custom Calling features, see
“Special Characters.”)
If a number to which the administrator assigns a System Speed Dial code
contains a “#” character, the character must be entered twice (For example,
9##123). A single “#” character ends administration of the current
Speed Dial code.
When the administrator has dialed the maximum 16 characters for a System
Speed Dial code, the system beeps twice to confirm the entry and to remind the
administrator that he or she cannot dial any more characters. If the administrator
dials less than 16 characters, the system does not beep.
The administrator should give a copy of the System Speed Dial code
assignments to each person who will be using these codes.
People can dial the codes or program a button for specific Speed Dial codes.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
Before you administer the System Speed Dial feature, refer to the System Speed
Dial Form that you have filled out.
To assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently dialed telephone numbers:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial the code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999) that you are assigning
to the telephone number.
MERLIN Pius System Features
5-151
Dial one of the following codes:
3
>
Dial *90 to assign the Speed Dial code (without Restriction Override).
For example, if you want the Speed Dial number to have the same
restrictions as the actual telephone number, that is, call or toll restrictions
still apply with this number, dial the System Speed Dial code
(such as #67 or #936),*90, and then the telephone number.
>
Dial *92 to assign the Speed Dial code with Restriction Override.
For example, if you want to assign a System Speed Dial code to a
telephone number that anyone in the system can dial, regardless of any
previously placed restrictions, dial the System Speed Dial code
(such as #67 or #936), *92, and then the telephone number.
Dial the telephone number. (If you want the number to be private so that
only the dial code appears on Call Reports and on display voice terminals,
insert a * before the telephone number. However, private numbers do appear
on System Feature Reports.)
4
For example, for a private number with Restriction Override, dial a System
Speed Dial code (such as #67 or #936), *92, and a telephone number
with a * before it, such as *1-617-555-1234.
Touch Administer.
5
The console beeps twice.
6
Repeat the last four steps for each telephone number to which you are
assigning a System Speed Dial code.
7
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
Administer
#60-#89
#900-#999
PROGRAMMING
90 or 92
tel. no.
To program a button for a System Speed Dial code assigned to a
telephone number:
1
Label the button with a name and/or a number.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *95 plus a System Speed Dial code number from 60 through 89 and
900 through 999 that your administrator can give you.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Eastern
Office #72
95
5-152 MERLIN Plus System Features
60-89
900-999
P
P
HOW TO USE
In order to use the System Speed Dial feature, you can use a Speed Dial code or
touch a programmed button.
To place a call by dialing a System Speed Dial code:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
2
Dial a System Speed Dial code (#60 through #89 or #900 through #999).
Speakerphone
#60-#89
#900-#999
To place a call using a button programmed for a specific System Speed Dial
code:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset,
2
Touch the System Speed Dial button for the particular code.
3
If the special character STOP is included in a system speed dial number, after
you hear the second dial tone, dial the System Speed Dial code again to
continue the dialing.
Speakerphone
Eastern
Office #72
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-153
Test
DESCRIPTION
When you need to test the lights and the ringing on your voice terminal, or if you
need to verify that your voice terminal has been installed correctly, you can use
the Test/Program (T/P) switch on the left side of your voice terminal.
CONSIDERATIONS
If your system administrator has administered the Program Mode Lock feature
for your voice terminal, you cannot use the T/P switch for changing programmed
features at the voice terminal. However, you can still use the T/P switch for
testing voice terminal lights and ringing.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To test the lights and ringing on your voice terminal:
Slide the T/P switch to T. On some voice terminal models you must hold the
switch in that position until you are finished testing your voice terminal.
1
The red and green lights next to your voice terminal buttons flash alternately, and your voice
terminal rings.
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
2
If your voice terminal does not respond when you slide the Test/Program switch
to T, check Section 7, “Troubleshooting the System,” for possible causes and
recommended action.
T
5-154 MERLIN Plus System Features
P
T
P
Toll Prefix Setting
DESCRIPTION
In most telephone systems people must dial a toll prefix (a 1 or a 0) before they
dial an area code and telephone number. When the MERLIN Plus system is
installed, it is set for dialing a toll prefix. If people in your system don’t need to
dial a toll prefix, the system administrator must set the system for dialing the
area code only.
CONSIDERATIONS
None
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information. To administer the system so people can dial an area code and
telephone number without a toll prefix:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *37.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
P
Administer
37
To change the system setting so that people must dial a toll prefix before an
area code and a telephone number:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *36.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
Administer
P
Administer
36
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Ask your administrator whether you need to dial a toll prefix
(a 1 or a 0) before you dial an area code and a telephone number.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-155
Tones
DESCRIPTION
Your MERLIN Plus system and your voice terminal provide the following tones
to inform you of the progress of a call you are placing or are about to place.
There are also tones that let you know you are in administration or programming
mode and a tone to tell you that your voice terminal is working satisfactorily.
Sound
Feedback
Meaning of the Feedback
Dial tone
Steady tone
You can begin dialing when you
are ready.
Busy tone
A slow pulsed tone
The line is busy.
Voice signal
tone
A beep
You can announce the call through
the other person’s voice terminal
speaker.
Dialing
feedback
For Touch-Tone lines a series of
tones
You have dialed another digit of
the telephone number.
For rotary lines a series of rotary
pulses
Ringing tone
A ringing sound
The call is ringing at the other
person’s phone.
Testing
feedback
A steady ringing sound
Your MERLIN Plus system has
been installed correctly.
Sound
Feedback
Meaning of the Feedback
Programming
reminder
Your voice terminal rings every
5 seconds to remind you that you
can’t place or receive calls.
You are in programming mode and
cannot place or receive calls.
Error/Deny tone
One beep
You have made an error in
administration and should try the
step again.
Confirmation
tone
Two beeps
The administration feature has
been entered into the system.
Hold Reminder
One beep every minute
You have a call on hold.
5-156 MERLIN Plus System Features
The MERLIN Plus system also provides you with the following ringing sounds
or voice announcements so that you know immediately what kind of call you are
receiving.
If you hear this type of ring or
announcement
You are receiving this kind of call
One short and one long ring
Transferred Call
A beep followed by a voice announcement
through your voice terminal speaker
Intercom Call with Voice Announcement
A beep followed by a voice announcement
through your voice terminal before you
receive a transferred call
Transferred Call with Voice Announcement
A beep
Manual Signaling
One long beep
Ringing Intercom Call
One long ring
Outside Call
CONSIDERATIONS
You can program your voice terminal with a ringing pattern that is different from
the ringing sound of nearby voice terminals. See “Personalized Ringing.”
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
By listening to the tones that the system or your voice terminal gives you, you
can use your MERLIN Plus system more efficiently.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-157
Touch-Tone Enable
NOTE:
This feature is for rotary lines only.
DESCRIPTION
If you have telephone lines that carry rotary signals, use the Touch-Tone Enable
feature to switch to Touch-Tone signals midway through a dialing sequence.
This lets you take advantage of bank-by-phone, credit card authorization,
computer access, and alternate long distance services.
CONSIDERATIONS
When you hang up your handset after using this feature on a call, your system
returns to rotary signals.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program a Touch-Tone Enable button for your voice terminal:
1
Label the button Touch-Tone Enable.
2
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
3
Touch the button you want to program.
4
Dial *76.
5
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
TouchTone Enbl.
76
HOW TO USE
To switch from rotary pulse to Touch-Tone signals as you dial a number:
1
Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset.
2
Dial the first part of the number.
3
Touch Touch-Tone Enable.
4
Dial the remaining numbers.
Speakerphone
TouchTone Enbl.
no.
5-158 MERLIN Plus System Features
no.
Touch-Tone or Rotary Setting
DESCRIPTION
When the MERLIN Plus system is installed, it is set to generate Touch-Tone
signals. If any of the system’s lines are rotary, the administrator must reset the
system to rotary dialing by entering a code at the administrator/attendant
console.
CONSIDERATIONS
If your system has any rotary lines, you should select the rotary setting for the
system then program a Touch-Tone Enable button which can be activated when
you are using your Touch-Tone lines. (See “Touch-Tone Enable”.)
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To set your system for rotary dialing:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *39.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
Administer
P
Administer
39
If you need to reset the system for Touch-Tone dialing:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *38.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Administer
Administer
38
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
If you have telephone lines that carry rotary signals, you can switch to
Touch-Tone signals midway through a dialing sequence by using the
Touch-Tone Enable feature. (See “Touch-Tone Enable.”)
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-159
Transfer
DESCRIPTION
You can use your voice terminal Transfer button to transfer outside calls to
someone else in your MERLIN Plus system.
There are three ways to transfer calls:
●
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
Option A—Simple Transfer You can ask the person to whom you are
transferring the call if he or she wants to accept the call.
Option B—One-Touch Transfer If you have an Auto Intercom button for
the person to whom you want to transfer a call, you can transfer a call with
one touch.
Option C—Direct Transfer You can transfer a call directly by dialing the
intercom number.
If no one answers the transferred call, the call returns to the sender after a
specified number of rings set by the system administrator. The administrator
may also choose to set the system not to return calls. (See “Transfer Return
Interval.”)
If the person to whom you are transferring the call has activated the
Voice Announcement Disable feature or if the person is using the intercom line
at his or her voice terminal, you cannot announce the call.
You cannot transfer a conference call.
Option A, Simple Transfer, can be used only when the person receiving the
transferred call has the line button on his or her voice terminal.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
If you want to program an Auto Intercom button for a voice terminal to which
you often transfer calls, see “Auto Intercom.”
HOW TO USE
To screen a call using Option A, Simple Transfer:
1
Touch Hold.
2
Touch Intercom and dial the intercom number of the person to whom you
are transferring the call.
or
Touch the person’s Auto Intercom button.
5-160 MERLIN Plus System Features
3
Announce the call and ask if it will reaccepted.
No?
a
Touch the held call’s line button.
b
Advise the caller.
c
Hang up.
Hold
Susan 15
555-1234
Pause
Yes?
a
Advise the person to touch the appropriate line button.
b
Hang Up.
To transfer a call using Option B, One-Touch Transfer:
1
With the call in progress, touch the Auto Intercom button of the person to
whom you want to transfer the call.
2
When you hear a beep, you can announce the call, if appropriate.
3
Hang up:
John 12
To transfer a call using Option C, Direct Transfer:
1
Touch Transfer.
2
Dial the intercom number of the person to whom you are transferring the call.
3
Hang up.
Transfer
Icom no.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-161
Transfer Return Interval
DESCRIPTION
When someone in the MERLIN Plus system transfers a call and it is not
answered, the call returns to the sender. When the system is first installed, it is
set to return calls after four rings. The system administrator can change that
setting so that calls ring as many as nine times before they return to the person
who has transferred it. The administrator may also choose to set the system not
to return transferred calls at all.
CONSIDERATIONS
If you are using the Direct Extension Dialing (DXD) feature with your
MERLIN Plus system, you may want to consider setting a Transfer Return
Interval. For more information, see “Direct Extension Dialing” in this section.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
To administer the Transfer Return Interval for your system:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *2 plus the number of rings (up to nine) you want before a call returns.
For example:
*20 programs the system not to return transferred calls
*21 programs the system to transfer calls after one ring.
*29 programs the system to transfer calls after nine rings.
NOTE:
3
If anyone in your MERLIN Plus system will be using an answering
machine for back-up coverage of calls to their telephones, set the
Transfer Return Interval to six or more rings.
Touch Administer:
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
T
P
T
P
Administer
Administer
20- 29
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Ask your system administrator what Transfer Return Interval is set for your
system.
5-162 MERLIN Plus System Features
Voice Announcement Enable/Disable
DESCRIPTION
Ordinarily, people can use the MERLIN Plus system intercom feature to
announce calls through your voice terminal speaker. However, if you do not
want a voice announcement to interrupt your work, you can use the Voice
Announcement Disable feature to have intercom calls ring at your voice terminal
instead.
CONSIDERATIONS
If someone in the MERLIN plus system has the Voice Announcement Disable
feature programmed for his or her voice terminal, he or she cannot hear a
Group Page announcement.
If you use the Voice Announcement Disable feature on a voice terminal with
HFAI, you deactivate the HFAI feature. However, the Voice Announcement
Disable feature does not affect voice terminals with connected hands-free units
and with the Auto Answer-All feature activated.
You must program Voice Announcement Disable on your telephone if you want
an answering machine to answer your intercom calls when you are not available.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
To program the voice announcement option you prefer for your voice terminal:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P.
The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that
you cannot place or receive calls.
2
Touch Intercom.
3
Dial one of the following codes to indicate that you want voice
announcements allowed or prevented at your voice terminal:
>
If you want voice announcements allowed, dial *38.
The green light next to the Intercom button goes on.
>
If you want voice announcements prevented, dial *39.
The green !ight next to the Intercom button goes off.
4
Slide the T/P switch to the center position.
T
T
P
P
Intercom
38 or 39
HOW TO USE
None
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-163
Voice Terminal Templates
DESCRIPTION
During administration, it may be useful to use the four voice terminal templates
already designed for typical business uses, rather than program each voice
terminal individually. The four templates are:
●
●
●
●
CONSIDERATIONS
The Clear Template: This template is used for erasing previous voice
terminal features so that new features can be assigned. This template does not
remove line assignments.
The Dialer Template: This template is for personnel who do not require
special features, and who aren’t likely to make toll calls.
The Feature Template: This template is designed for personnel, such as
managers and owners, who need unrestricted phone use along with several
additional features offered by the MERLIN Plus system.
The Receptionist/Secretary Template: This template is intended for
receptionists, secretaries, and backup call handlers, including the
system attendant.
Both the Receptionist/Secretary template and the Features template require a
22-button or larger voice terminal.
Features, such as Voice Announcement Enable/Disable and Personalized Ring,
previously administered to a voice terminal still apply even though they do not
appear on the templates.
Unless Program Mode Lock is on, an individual can choose to reprogram
different features over the features provided on the template.
ADMINISTRATION
To administer one of the four templates onto a voice terminal:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial *10 followed by the option number of the template:
1
2
3
4
5-164 MERLIN Plus System Features
=
=
=
=
Clear template
Dialer template
Feature template
Receptionist/Secretary template
3
Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the target
voice terminal.
The console beeps twice after each voice terminal is administered a template.
NOTE:
4
Label the target voice terminal with the lines and features provided
by the assigned template.
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
Continue to administer the templates to voice terminals, or leave
administration mode.
T
P
Auto
Intercom
Administer
101- 104
T
P
Administer
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Refer to Section 3 “Administration” under “Voice Terminal Templates” for
further information.
MERLIN Plus System Features
5-165
Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features
The table below lists the preassigned and programmable features available from
your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal. Those features that can also be
accessed by using a dial code are identified with a “ †.” Each feature is listed by
function, followed by a brief description. For more information, read the
individual feature descriptions in this section.
Description
Feature Name
Preassigned or
Programmable
Programming Code
PLACING CALLS
Line Request
Request the use of a busy line
Preassigned
Line Select
Select a line other than the line the
system automatically selects for you
Preassigned
Touch-Tone Enable
Change from rotary to Touch-Tone
signals during a dialing sequence
Programmable
Dial *76
Auto Answer-All
Have optional equipment such as a
modem, answering machine, or
facsimile machine turn on when a call
comes in
Programmable
Dial *75
Recall
Disconnect a call without hanging up
Preassigned
Ringing Line Preference
Lift the handset and instantly be
connected to the ringing line
Preassigned
Voice Terminal and
System Tones
Know by the ring, or by an
announcement, the kind of call that is
coming in
Preassigned
Call Pickup
Pick up a ringing call at another voice
terminal
Programmable†
Conference
Have a telephone conference with
several people at one time
Preassigned
Drop
Disconnect a person from a conference
call
Preassigned
Hands-Free Answer on
Intercom (HFAI)
Answer intercom calls without lifting
handset (on voice terminal with an
HFAI button)
Preassigned
Hold Retrieve
Return to a call on hold (for people
with button-he operation)
Programmable†
Transfer
Transfer a call to another voice
terminal
Preassigned
Exclusive Hold
Place a call on hold so that it can only
be picked up by the same voice
terminal. Requires a button with lights.
Programmable
ANSWERING CALLS
CALL HANDLING
† You can also access this feature by using a dial code
5-166
Quick Reference Guide to MERLiN Plus Features
Dial *85 (or dial *85 + an intercom
number)
Dial *95*
Dial *77
Description
Feature Name
Preassigned or
Programmable
Programming Code
CALL-HANDLING REPORTS
Account Number Entry
Enter an account number on a Call
Report (SMDR) by dialing the number
or a System Speed Dial code
Programmable
Dial *82
Account Number Entry
with one touch
Enter an account number on a
Call Report
Programmable
Dial *88 + an account number
(up to 16 digits)
or
Dial *95 + a System Speed Dial code
(60 through 89 or 900 through 999)
Dial an intercom number with one touch
Programmable
Dial *91 + an intercom number
QUICK DIALING
Auto Intercom
A button with lights is recommended
Last Number Dial
Dial with one touch the number that you
last dialed
Programmable†
Dial *73
Outside Auto Dial
Dial an outside number with one touch
Programmable
Dial *90 + an outside telephone
number, PBX, Centrex, or Custom
Calling feature code (up to 16 digits)
Personal Speed Dial
Dial a number quickly by dialing a code
(Does not require a button)
Programmable
Dial a Personal Speed Dial code
(BIS-10: #01 through #24, BIS-22:
#01 -#12) + one of the following codes:
*90 + an outside number, or a PBX,
Centrex, or Custom Calling feature
code,
or
*88 + an account number
Busy Buster
Automatically redial the most recently
dialled number up to ten times at
60-second intervals
Programmable
Dial *31
Saved Number Dial
Save a number and dial it later
Programmable†
Dial *74
System Speed Dial
Dial a number quickly by dialing an
administered code
Programmable
Dial *95 + a System Speed Dial code
(60-89 and 900-999)
Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features
5-167
Feature Name
Description
Preassigned or
Programmable
Programming Code
PAGING
Group Page
Page a group of people through their
voice terminal speakers
Programmable†
Dial *91 + one of the following codes:
70 for all voice terminals
71 for Group 1
72 for Group 2
Loudspeaker Page
Page someone through a loudspeaker
system connected to the page jack on the
Memory Module
Programmable†
Dial *91 +6
Prevent calls from ringing while you are
busy
Programmable
Dial *71
Programmable
Dial *72
Choose the order of the lines you will
get when you pick up the handset
Programmable
Dial **, then touch the line buttons in
the preferred ringing order
Have a line ring immediately even
though it is programmed to ring after a
delay or not at all
Programmable
Dial *78
PRIVACY
Do Not Disturb
Requires a button with lights
Privacy
Prevent others from accidentally joining
your calls
Requires a button with lights
LINE OPTIONS
Automatic Line Selection
RINGING OPTIONS
Ring Override
Requires a button with lights
Personalized Ringing
Choose a ringing sound you like for your
voice terminal
Programmable
No programming code necessary;
for programming information,
see Section 5, “Reference”
Ringing Options
Have lines ring immediately, ring after a
delay, or not ring at all
Programmable
Dial *35 for no ring
Dial *36 for delayed ring
Dial *37 for immediate ring
Voice Announcement
Disable
Have intercom calls ring at your voice
terminal
Programmable
Dial *38 to enable voice
announcements
Dial *39 to disable voice
announcements
5-168 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features
Description
Feature Name
Preassigned or
Programmable
Programming Code
INTEROFFICE COMMUNICATION
Manual Signaling
Signal someone within your MERLIN
Plus system
Programmable
Dial *6 + an intercom number
Message
Know when the attendant has taken a
message for you
Preassigned
The attendant touches Send Message +
an intercom number
Send Message
Turn on the message light at someone
else’s voice terminal (attendant console
only)
Preassigned
Touch Send Message + an intercom
number
AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ACCESS
Call Forwarding/Direct
Extension Dialing
Have your calls forwarded when you are
at a different location
Programmable
Dial *83
Remote Line Access
Gain access to a company line even
though you are at another location
Programmable
Dial *84
System Answer
Have your calls answered automatically
and placed on hold
Programmable
Dial *58
Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features
5-169
Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features
Do This
Procedure
Using the CF/DXD Button
Using the RLA button
Repeatedly touch the CF/DXD button until the red and green light next
to the button show the ASA mode you want the system to be in.
Red and green light off = the system is in the normal mode (calls
coming into the system are handled normally)
Green light on = the system is in DXD mode
Red light on = the system is in CF mode
Touch the RLA button until the lights show the ASA mode you want the
system to be in.
Green light on = the system is in the RLA mode
Green light off = the system is in normal mode
Gaining access to a line in the RLA outgoing line
group from a remote location (with the system in
the RLA mode)
Gaining access to an RLA line group from a
remote location (with the system in the CF or
DXD mode)
Using the SA button
1
With the system in RLA mode (the green light next to the RLA
button is on), dial the telephone number of a line in the RLA
incoming line group.
When the call is answered, the Voice Synthesis Processor (VSP)
begins prompting you through the procedure.
2
Respond appropriately to the VSP prompts until you hear normal
call-progress tones, such as ringing or the busy signal.
3
Complete your call.
1
Depending on whether the system is in the CF or DXD mode, dial
the telephone number of a line in either the CF or DXD incoming
line group.
When the call is answered, the VSP gives the appropriate message.
2
As soon as the message ends, immediately dial the 3-character
code, *#*.
The VSP begins prompting you through the RLA procedure.
3
Respond appropriately to the VSP prompts until you hear normal
call-progress, such as ringing or a busy signal.
4
Complete your call.
Touch the SA button on either the attendant console or the alternate
attendant console.
Green light on = SA is on
Green light off = SA is off
5-170 Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features
Quick Reference Guide to Programming Codes
Feature
Other Numbers/Buttons
Programming Codes
*6
an intercom number
Manual Signaling
*31
Busy Buster
*35
Ringing Options, no ring
*36
Ringing Options, delayed ring
*37
Ringing Options, immediate ring
*38
Voice Announcement Enable
*39
Voice Announcement Disable
*58
System Answer
*70
Auto Answer Intercom
*71
Do Not Disturb
*72
Privacy
*73
Last Number Dial
*74
Saved Number Dial
*75
Auto Answer-All
*76
Touch-Tone Enable
*77
Exclusive Hold
*78
Ring Override
*82
Account Number Entry
*83
Call Forwarding/Direct Extension Dialing
*84
Remote Line Access
*85
an intercom number
Call Pickup
Call Pickup with One Touch
*88
an account number
Account Number Entry with One Touch
*90
a telephone number
Outside Auto Dial
*91
an intercom number
70 = All voice terminals
71 = Group 1
72 = Group 2
Auto Intercom
Group Page
6
Loudspeaker Page
a 2 or 3-character System Speed Dial
code (60-89, 900-999)
System Speed Dial (programmed on a button)
*95
*95*
Hold Retrieve
Quick Reference Guide to Programming Codes
5-171
Section 6: Accessory Equipment
Accessory Equipment
Once you have set up your MERLIN Plus system, you may decide to purchase
additional hardware such as a headset that the system attendant can use for
easier call-handling or a basic telephone that is connected to the MERLIN Plus
system and can be used off-premises. The information included in this section
will help you decide what optional equipment you want to add to your system
and how to use these accessories.
The information in the entry for each accessory is divided into six parts:
●
Description
The description of the accessory tells what it does and its advantages
for the user.
●
Drawings and Diagrams
Drawings of the accessory and its parts are included for each piece of
equipment, along with any applicable diagrams showing how the equipment
is connected to other MERLIN Plus system accessories.
●
Considerations
Considerations include any qualifications the user should know about the
hardware, ways in which the equipment can or cannot be used, and other
hardware or features it can or cannot be used with.
●
Administration
If applicable, administration procedures are given for setting options at the
administrator/attendant console so that people in the MERLIN Plus system
can use the accessory equipment.
●
Programming
If applicable, programming procedures are given for customizing the voice
terminal so that people in the MERLIN Plus system can use the accessory
equipment.
●
How to Use
If applicable, procedures describe how to use the equipment or
voice terminal.
Accessory Equipment
6-1
Answering Machines
DESCRIPTION
Answering machines can be used as back-up “voice mailboxes” with any
telephone in your MERLIN Plus system. MERLIN Plus is compatible with
many of the most widely used answering machines, including AT&T models
1321 and 1323. Consult the user manual supplied with your answering machine
for specific information on installing your answering machine and using its
features.
CONSIDERATIONS
Answering machine operation requires the following considerations:
●
A General Purpose Adapter (GPA) is required to connect an answering
machine to a MERLIN Plus system telephone. (See the section on General
Purpose Adapters in this manual and your GPA Customer Instruction Booklet
for installation instructions.) The GPA connects to the “Other” jack on the
telephone set. The five-button telephone set does not provide an “Other”
jack, and therefore will not support an answering machine. If the “Other” jack
is already in use for another purpose (e.g., a modem), an answering machine
cannot also be used.
●
A station with an answering machine must have an “Auto Answer” button
programmed. When the Auto Answer feature is activated (green LED is lit),
calls that ring at the station will also ring at the answering machine. When
the feature is not active, calls will not ring at the answering machine.
●
Your MERLIN Plus telephone can only handle one call at a time. If you are
talking on the telephone and a second call comes through, there will be a
single, abbreviated ring and the associated line button will flash, but the
answering machine will not pick up that call. You may put the first caller on
hold while you answer the second call, or you may allow the second call to
be returned to the receptionist, MERLIN Attendant or transferring party.
●
Most answering machine features are available to work with MERLIN Plus,
but the following features may not operate inexactly the same manner:
—
Call Screening
Most answering machines have a “call screening” feature that allows you
to listen over a speaker when a caller is leaving a message. This feature
operates slightly differently when your answering machine is connected
to a telephone in the MERLIN Plus system. The General Purpose
Adapter (GPA) that serves as the interface between the MERLIN Plus
system and the answering machine masks the signal used by the
answering machine to sense when the receiver has been lifted. If you lift
the receiver of your MERLIN Plus telephone to answer a “screened” call
while your answering machine is still active, you will be able to talk to
the caller, but the answering machine will continue to record the
conversation. If you cannot stop the answering machine by pressing the
“Stop” button, you should warn the caller that the call is being recorded.
6-2 Accessory Equipment
—
Toll Saver
Most answering machines allow you to determine whether or not you
have messages by dialing your telephone number from an outside
telephone and counting the number of rings. The answering machine will
take longer (usually four rings) to answer the first call than to answer
subsequent calls (usually two rings). This feature works with
MERLIN Plus even though you may not be able to hear the ring under all
conditions. If you call on personal lines that bypass the
MERLIN Attendant and the receptionist, you will hear the ring. If your
call is transferred to your telephone by the MERLIN Attendant, the
receptionist, or another telephone, you will be on hold until your
answering machine answers, and you will not hear the ring. Even if you
are on hold and cannot hear the ring, you can use the fact that one ring
cycle takes 6 seconds to determine the number of rings. For example, if
your answering machine answers toll saver calls after four rings, 15 to 21
seconds (2-1/2 to 3-1/2 ring cycles) is longer than the answering machine
will take to answer if you have messages, yet shorter than it will take to
answer if there are no messages. (If your answering machine uses a
different number of rings for the toll saver feature, adjust the time
accordingly.)
ADMINISTRATION
The MERLIN Plus system normally has every line appearing on, and ringing at,
all telephones. A maximum of one telephone with an answering machine should
ring for each line. If a line rings on more than one telephone that has an
answering machine, more than one answering machine may answer the call.
Calls that come in on common lines should be handled by a receptionist or the
MERLIN Attendant, and transferred to the individual telephone requested
by the caller.
MERLIN Plus returns calls to the receptionist, the MERLIN Attendant or the
caller’s telephone if no answer is received within the number of rings specified
by the Transfer Return Interval. The Transfer Return Interval must be set to be
longer than any answering machine on the system will need to answer a call. In
most cases, it is sufficient to administer the Transfer Return Interval to six rings.
PROGRAMMING
MERLIN Plus normally provides voice announcement for intercom calls.
This feature will not activate answering machines. If intercom calls are to be
answered by machine, the the Voice Announcement feature must be disabled so
that intercom calls will ring. See “Voice Announcement Enable/Disable” in
Section 5.
HOW TO USE
To use an answering machine for back-up call handling on your MERLIN Plus
telephone, activate the Auto Answer feature when you leave the office and
deactivate the feature when you return to the office.
Accessory Equipment
6-3
Basic Telephones
Basic Touch-Tone telephones can provide regular phone service and can use
many of the features of your communication system using dial codes and
switchhook flashes. The table below shows the telephones that are compatible
with the MERLIN Plus system and the possible connections:
DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
CONSIDERATIONS
Compatible Telephones
Connect To
Industry standard rotary
AUX port
BTMI
Industry standard Touch-Tone
AUX port
BTMI
GPA
Touch-Tone with MC/RCL (3178-SYS)
AUX port
BTMI
GPA
Speakerphone 420 (3102-420)
AUX port
BTMI
GPA
Touch-Tone with MC/RCL (3178-SYS) models do not have a message
waiting indicator.
You can also use accessories with your MERLIN Plus system that work similarly
to basic telephones. These accessories include auto-dial modems, facsimile
machines, credit phones, answering telephones, manual dial modems, auto
dialers, and answering machines. The following devices support these
accessories.
●
●
●
Basic Telephone and Modem Interface (BTMI) —The BTMI is intended
for on-premises telephones and accessories. You can connect to your
MERLIN Plus system such accessories as auto-dial modems, facsimile
machines, credit phones, and answering telephones. You do not need to use
a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal with these accessories.
General Purpose Adapter (GPA) —The GPA is intended for accessory
equipment that you can connect to your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal
such as manual dial modems, auto dialers, answering machines, and cordless
telephones.
Auxiliary Jack (AUX jack) —The AUX jack on the MERLIN Plus system
control unit is primarily intended to let you share Line A and/or E with the
MERLIN Plus system. You can connect such devices as data devices, a
facsimile machine, or an answering machine to the AUX jack.
Once you have assigned lines to a basic telephone, be sure to provide the person
using the telephone with a list of the codes for the lines he or she has access to.
6-4 Accessory Equipment
Basic telephones are able to receive ringing intercom calls, but not intercom
calls with voice announcement. Therefore, you must program the
Voice Announcement Disable feature for the telephone.
In order to program Voice Announcement Disable, Ringing Options, or an
Automatic Line Selection sequence for the basic telephone, the system
administrator can use the Centralized Programming feature on the
administrator/attendant console.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
1
Assign lines to the basic telephone:
a
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
b
Dial the intercom number or touch the Auto Intercom button for the basic
telephone that you are administering.
A green light comes on next to the Auto Intercom button. Green lights also come on next
to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the telephone.
c
Touch each line button so that the green light next to it shows the line
assignment you prefer.
Green light on = the line is assigned to the telephone
Green light off = the line is not assigned to the telephone
2
To restrict the type of calls that the basic telephone can place:
a
Touch Restrict until the green light next to it shows the code for the call
restrictions you want the telephone to have:
Steady green light = Unrestricted (all calls permitted)
Flashing green light = Toll restricted (local and intercom calls)
Green light off = Outward restricted (intercom calls)
b
When you are finished administering the basic telephone, touch
Administer.
The console beeps twice.
c
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center
position.
3
Then connect a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal directly to the control
unit voice terminal jack to which you plan to connect the BTMI. (You can
also program the basic telephone by using the Centralized Programming
feature on the administration/attendant console. For more information on this
feature, see “Centralized Programming.”)
4
Program this substitute telephone for Voice Announcement Disable:
a
Slide the T/P switch to P.
b
Touch the Intercom button until the green light next to it goes off.
Accessory Equipment
6-5
5
6
7
If you want to change the order in which the system selects available lines for
this telephone, assign an Automatic Line Selection sequence.
a
While in programming mode, dial **.
b
Touch the line buttons in the order you want them to be selected.
c
When you are finished programming the basic telephone, slide the
T/P switch to the center position.
If you want the basic telephone not to ring on specified lines, use the Ringing
Options feature. While in programming mode, touch the line for which you
want to program a ringing option:
a
If you don’t want the phone to ring, dial *35.
b
If you want the phone to ring immediately when a call comes in, dial *37.
Disconnect the substitute voice terminal and connect the BTMI to the same
voice terminal jack. Then connect the basic telephone to the BTMI.
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
A person using a basic telephone must dial the codes shown in Figure 6-1 to
access the lines the system administrator assigns to the intercom number for the
telephone.
FIGURE 6-1 Basic telephone codes for accessing lines.
❑
❑
884
❑
❑
❑
❑
6-6 Accessory Equipment
883
882
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
881
❑
❑
❑
❑
880
❑
❑
889
888
887
886
Conference
Transfer
Drop
Hold
Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2
DESCRIPTION
The Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 (BTMI 2) allows you to connect
most types of telephone and data devices to your MERLIN Plus system,
including auto-dial modems, facsimile machines, credit phones, and the
MERLIN Attendant. See Figures 6-2 and 6-3.
FIGURE 6-2 The Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2.
VOICE
LINE
TEL DEVICE
DATA
TRANS
MODE
TIMER
FIGURE 6-3 A basic telephone connected to a BTMI 2.
MERLIN Plus
control unit
Line jack
4-Pair
modular cord
Tel. device
jack
2-Pair
modular cord
Accessory Equipment
6-7
CONSIDERATIONS
The BTMI 2 works with Touch-Tone and rotary telephones.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
If you do not want the basic telephone to ring on every line, you can specify
which lines ring when a call comes in using Ringing Options and programming
the lines for immediate or no ring. See “Ringing Options” in this section.
You can also specify the order of lines for the phone by programming an
Automatic Line Selection sequence. Be sure to program Automatic Line
Selection only for those lines to be used by the basic telephone.
See “Automatic Line Selection” in this section.
Basic telephones are able to receive ringing intercom calls, but not intercom
calls with voice announcement. Therefore, you must program the Voice
Announcement Disable feature for the telephone. See “Voice Announcement
Disable” in this section.
In order to program Voice Announcement Disable, Ringing Options, or an
Automatic Line Selection sequence for the basic telephone, you can use either
the Centralized Programming feature on the administrator/attendant console or
program a substitute MERLIN Plus system voice terminal plugged into the voice
terminal jack designated for the BTMI 2. See “Centralized Programming”
in this section.
For more information on assigning lines and features for a basic telephone, see
“Basic Telephones.”
HOW TO USE
See the “User’s Guide for Off-Premises and Basic Telephones,” included with
the BTMI 2, for instructions on how to operate a telephone connected to a
BTMI 2.
A person using a basic, telephone must dial 3-character codes to access the lines
the system administrator assigns to the intercom number for the telephone.
For a list of these codes, see “Basic Telephones.”
6-8 Accessory Equipment
Data Collector and Printer
The MERLIN Plus system Data Collector uses information from the Call Report
and System Feature Report features and transmits the material from the
MERLIN Plus system to a printer or to a PC with a standard RS232-C,
1200 baud, serial interface. You can connect the data collector to an available
voice terminal jack on the control unit.
DESCRIPTION
FIGURE 6-4 A data collector connected to the MERLIN Plus system control unit and printer.
Busy Buster (BB) jack
Automatic
System Access
(ASA) jack
Jack 19
(System
default for the
Data Collector)
450F
Adapter
Wire manager
slots
Printer
Data Collector
(Back view)
DATA
COLLECTOR
READY
C.U. PRINTER
POWER
Accessory Equipment
6-9
CONSIDERATIONS
An AT&T 475/476 or 572/573 printer or its equivalent is recommended to work
with the MERLIN Plus system data collector.
The MERLIN Plus system is set to have the data collector and the printer
connected to voice terminal jack 19, but the administrator can connect the data
collector and the printer to any other voice terminal jack in the system, except
jack 10. See Figure 6-4.
NOTE:
If you are using the same printer and data collector for both the System
Feature Report and the Call Report features and change the voice
terminal jack assignment, you must administer the new jack assignment
for both features.
The data collector can hold up to one full page of printout, 60 lines of 80
characters each. The collector disregards any material over the one page limit.
For proper operation of the printer with the MERLIN Plus system data collector,
the printer options must be set correctly. The options and the method of
selecting them varies with different printers. Consult the Customer Information
Bulletin (CIB) that is provided with the data collector for the correct option
settings for your AT&T 475/476 or 572/573 printer.
ADMINISTRATION
Refer to the CIB and System Feature Report for Administration procedures.
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
None
6-10 Accessory Equipment
Doorphone Controller
DESCRIPTION
A Doorphone Controller (DAC-1Z) can be connected to your MERLIN Plus
system to allow employees to answer calls made from a business entrance.
The controller is connected directly to a CO line port on the MERLIN PLUS
control unit. Callers using the doorhone can press a button at the building
entrance to ring a telephone in your MERLIN Plus system. An auxiliary alert
device (such as a doorbell, chime, or tone generator) can be connected to the
Doorphone Controller so that it will ring when the doorphone button is pushed.
An optional electric strikeplate release can be obtained for door operation to
permit the caller to unlock the door by entering a preset code on the doorphone
keypad. The electric strikeplate can also provide an alarm that sounds when the
door is opened by unauthorized means or is not closed within a certain
amount of time.
FIGURE 6-5 A Doorphone Controller connected to the MERLIN Plus system
control unit.
Doorphone
Controller
Model No.
Serial No.
MERLIN Plus
Control Unit
To C.O.
(for use If
dedicated line
is unavailable)
CO
Line
port
Station
port
Station
port
Accessory Equipment 6-11
You must have a licensed locksmith install any locks or electric strikeplates used
for doorphone operation.
CONSIDERATIONS
Although the Doorphone Controller can be configured to connect to either a
Central Office (CO) port or a station port, it is recommended that only the CO
port connection be used. The CO port to which the Door Phone Controller is
connected can be dedicated to the Door Phone Controller, or shared by a CO line
and the Door Phone Controller.
ADMINISTRATION
The CO port to which the Doorphone Controller is connected must be
administered to appear on all telephones that are to answer the door. If the
Doorphone Controller shares the port with a CO line, that line must appear on all
telephones that are to access the CO line, as well as on any telephones that are to
answer the door. (See “Customized Line Assignment.”)
PROGRAMMING
Refer to the MERLIN™ Doorphone Owner’s Manual for programming
information.
HOW TO USE
Dedicated Line
●
When the doorbell rings, pickup your telephone. You will be able to talk to
whomever is calling from the door. You can also open the door by dialing the
door open code or activating a switch. You disconnect by hanging
up the phone.
Shared Line Port
●
6-12 Accessory Equipment
When the Doorphone Controller shares a port with a CO line, the
Doorphone Controller may be set so that when you pickup the telephone,
you are connected to either the doorphone or an outside line first. If the
phone is set to connect to the outside line first, you must flash the switchhook
(or press Recall) to connect to the door. If the phone is set to connect to the
doorphone first, you must dial 9 to access an outside line. In either case, the
door may be opened by dialing the door open code. The connection to the
Doorphone Controller is ended by hanging up the phone.
General Purpose Adapter (GPA)
DESCRIPTION
With the General Purpose Adapter (GPA) you can connect to your voice
terminal’s Touch-Tone (not rotary) equipment such as manual dial modems,
auto dialers, answering machines, and telephone extensions (including cordless
telephones). See Figure 6-5.
FIGURE 6-6 A modem, PC and a voice terminal connected to a GPA (back view).
JOIN
BASIC
AUTO
TEL. EQUIP.
V.T.
GENERAL PURPOSE ADAPTER
Modular cord
Modular cord
Data device
Modem
Basic telephone or other Touch-Tone device
Voice terminal
CONSIDERATIONS
If you set the GPA to the Auto (automatic setting), you must program an
Auto Answer-All button for your voice terminal: (See “Auto-Answer-All.”)
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
Accessory Equipment
6-13
HOW TO USE
You can select the switch position, labeled Join, Basic, or Auto on the adapter,
required for operating the telephone or data equipment. When you have made
the appropriate selection for your needs, slide the three-position option switch to
the selected mode of operation. For the Joined Call Operation option, see the
information that comes with the GPA.
Originating a Call
●
Use the Basic Operation switch position if you only originate calls with your
telephone or data device. You may also answer incoming calls using your
telephone or data device. However, incoming calls ring only at your voice
terminal, not at the telephone or data device.
Using an Automatic Answering Device
●
6-14 Accessory Equipment
Use the Automatic Operation switch position for using automatic answering
devices. Before operating these devices, program an Auto Answer-All
feature button so you can set the devices to go on automatically when you
receive ringing calls.
Headset and Headset Adapter
DESCRIPTION
A Headset connected to your voice terminal by way of the Headset Adapter
allows you to handle calls more easily. See Figure 6-6.
FIGURE 6-7 A headset connected to the headset adapter.
Line
Other
CONSIDERATIONS
A headset cannot be used with a 5-button or a lo-button HFAI voice terminal.
The cord on the headset is plugged into the headset adapter, and the voice
terminal and the adapter are connected by way of a modular cord which comes
with the adapter. The headset adapter plugs into the jack labeled “Other.”
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To place a call using your headset:
1
Touch On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
The green Iight next to the button goes on.
2
Dial the outside number.
To answer a call:
1
Touch On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
Accessory Equipment
6-15
To mute the microphone:
1
Hold down On/Quiet on the headset adapter.
To hang Up:
1
Touch Off on the headset adapter.
The green light next to On/Quiet goes off..
6-16 Accessory Equipment
Loudspeaker Paging System
DESCRIPTION
If you have a compatible loudspeaker paging system, you can connect it to the
MERLIN Plus system either through the page jack on the control unit or through
a CO (outside) line jack on a line module as shown in Figures 6-7 and 6-8.
YOU can then page people, make announcements, and provide background music
(if available) throughout the building.
FIGURE 6-8 Loudspeaker Paging System connected to the Page Jack on the
MERLIN Plus system control unit.
MERLIN Plus
control unit
❑
❑
Power light
Warning light
Loudspeaker
paging system
Accessory Equipment
6-17
FIGURE 6-9 Loudspeaker Paging System connected to a CO Line on a Line
Module.
MERLIN Plus
control unit
❑
❑
❑
Loudspeaker
paging system
CONSIDERATIONS
Considerations for the Page Jack connection:
The loudness of the loudspeaker paging system is controlled by the loudspeaker
paging system only.
To cent.ml the loudness of the background music throughout the building, or to
turn off the background music, the system administrator can dial a code at the
administrator/attendant console for the preferred volume. Background music
volume can also be controlled at the music source. The following are the jack
pin-out specifications for the loudspeaker paging system. Pin numbers from left
to right ( 1 through 8) are:
6-18 Accessory Equipment
●
4,5 for voice
●
3,6 for contact closure
●
1,2,7,8 are unused
Considerations for CO line connection:
If the paging unit is connected to a CO port but is administered as a paging port,
it is treated differently than a CO line, and has the following restrictions:
●
●
An auxiliary jack cannot be used as a paging port.
Conferencing to this paging port or adding this port to a conference call is
prohibited.
●
Transferring of the paging port is prohibited.
●
Bridging onto the paging port is prohibited.
●
No Call Reports can be generated for this line.
●
●
●
No Call Restrictions apply, therefore, even outward restricted voice terminals
could use this line for toll calls.
The volume is controlled by the loudspeaker paging system only.
Unlike the page jack connection, the CO connection provides no signal to
alert you when the loudspeaker paging system has been activated.
If you want to save available feature buttons for other features, use the dial code
instead of programming a Loudspeaker Page button.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
Administration for the Page Jack connection:
To set the volume of background music, or to turn the music off, dial one of the
following codes:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer
> Dial *16 to turn off the background music.
> Dial *17 to set the volume to low.
> Dial *18 to set the volume to medium.
> Dial *19 to set the volume to high.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
Accessory Equipment
6-19
Administration procedures for CO line connection:
1
Slide the T/P switch to P and touch Administer.
2
Dial *91
3
Touch the button for the line you want to be the paging port.
Green light on = line added to paging port
Green light off = line removed from paging port
4
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
5
PROGRAMMING
HOW TO USE
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
Refer to “Loudspeaker Page” earlier in this section.
Using the Loudspeaker Paging System connected to the Page Jack:
To use the Loudspeaker Page button:
1
Touch Loudspeaker Page.
2
When you hear the beep, lift your handset and make your announcement.
To use this feature dialing a code:
1
Touch Intercom.
2
Lift your handset.
3
Dial 6.
4
When you hear the beep, make your announcement.
The loudspeaker will turn off automatically when you hang up.
Using the Loudspeaker Paging System connected to a CO Iine:
6-20 Accessory Equipment
1
Touch the loudspeaker page’s line button.
2
Follow the instructions provided with your loudspeaker page system.
3
If your loudspeaker page system provides a warning tone (beep), wait for the
tone before making your announcement.
Music-on-Hold (MOH) and Background Music
DESCRIPTION
When you have Music-on-Hold, you can provide background music for callers
whom you have placed on hold.
The Music-on-Hold (MOH) Jack is an RCA-type phonograph jack, into which
you can plug an audio system. It is on the front of the control unit behind the top
cover under the red warning and the green power lights as seen in Figure 6-9.
NOTE:
Users of equipment that rebroadcasts copyrighted music or other
material may be required to obtain a copyright license from a third party
such as ASCAP or BMI.
FIGURE 6-10 An Audio System connected to the Music-on-Hold Jack (MOH) on
the MERLIN Pius system control unit.
RCA-type phone
jack to MOH
jack
MERLIN Plus
control unit
❑
❑
❑
Music-on-Hold
(MOH) jack
Audio system
CONSIDERATIONS
To control the loudness of the Music-on-Hold and the background music for the
building, the system administrator can dial a code at the administrator/attendant
voice terminal for the preferred volume. The administrator can also turn off the
Music-on-Hold and background music by entering a code at the
administrator/attendant console.
The system is factory-set for medium music volume. The music volume can also
be controlled at the music source.
The Music-on-Hold feature is designed to accept 8-ohm impedance input,
matching the output of a variety of audio sources.
Accessory Equipment
6-21
You should use the Music-on-Hold feature with DXD so that callers can hear
music when they are placed on hold. See “Direct Extension Dialing” in this
section.
You can also use the Music-on-Hold feature with System Answer, so that callers
hear a special prerecorded message or music while they are waiting.
ADMINISTRATION
If your responsibilities do not include system administration, skip this
information.
From the administrator/attendant console, you can set the volume for
Music-on-Hold or turn it off by dialing one of the four settings listed below:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer.
> Dial *12 to turn off Music-on-Hold.
> Dial *13 to set the volume to low.
> Dial *14 to set the volume to medium.
> Dial *15 to set the volume to high.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
If you want to set the volume on the background music for the building or turn
the music off, dial one of the following codes:
1
Enter administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to P and touching
Administer.
2
Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer:
> Dial *16 to turn off the background music.
> Dial *17 to set the volume to low.
> Dial *18 to set the volume to medium.
> Dial *19 to set the volume to high.
3
Touch Administer.
The console beeps twice.
4
Leave administration mode by sliding the T/P switch to the center position.
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
Operate your audio system according to the directions that came with the
equipment.
6-22 Accessory Equipment
Supplemental Alert Adapter (SAA)
You can connect Extra Alert Devices, such as a bell, hom, strobe, or chime, to
your system so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be
alerted when a call rings. See Figure 6-10. When YOU activate the Supplemental
Alert Adapter (SAA) and a voice terminal rings, the adapter automatically
activates the connected extra alert device, which gives a visual or audible signal
that a call has come in.
DESCRIPTION
FIGURE 6-11 An extra alert bell and a voice terminal connected to the SAA (back view).
SAA
ON
V.T.
Modular voice
terminal cord
C.U.
OFF
ALERTER
7-Foot
Extra aIert
modular cord modular cord
Extra alert
switch
Modular
wall jack
Voice terminal
Extra alert
strobe
Extra alert
bell
ON
(1)
P
H
O
N
E
OFF ON
(2)
25-Foot modular cords
CONSIDERATIONS
An Extra Alert Switch allows you to turn an extra alert device on and off and
alternately select between two different connected alerting devices, such as a
strobe during business hours and a bell off-hours. You may also alternate
between two extra alert devices installed in different locations.
In addition, an extra alert switch allows you to use two extra alert devices
simultaneously. However, you may need a voice terminal power supply when
you have more than one extra alert device connect to the SAA. The extra alert
switch is compatible with MERLIN Plus extra alert devices (-48 V).
If you want the SAA to automatically turn on the extra alert devices connected to
the extra alert switch, plug the extra alert switch into the Alerter jack of the SAA.
Accessory Equipment
6-23
If you want to use extra-alerting devices simultaneously, you need to plug the
modular cord for each device into a Line Bridging Adapter which you can
connect to either position (1) or position (2) on the bottom of the extra alert
switch.
For more information, contact your equipment dealer.
ADMINISTRATION
None
PROGRAMMING
None
HOW TO USE
To setup your SAA:
1
Unplug the appropriate voice terminal from its modular wall jack, and plug it
into the jack labeled V.T. on your SAA.
2
Plug one end of the modular cord into the jack labeled C.U. on the SAA and
the other end into the voice terminal’s modular wall jack.
3
Plug the modular cord from the extra alert device into the jack labeled
Alerter on the SAA.
To have the extra alert device turn on when a call rings at the appropriate
voice terminal, turn the SAA to the On position.
If you want to use more than one extra alert device alternately:
1
Turn the extra alert switch’s knob to the appropriate On position labeled
(1) or (2). For example, if you connect a bell to position (1) and a strobe to
position (2), turn the control switch to position (1) to operate the bell and to
position (2) to operate the strobe.
If you want to use more than one extra alert device simultaneously:
1
6-24 Accessory Equipment
Turn the extra alert switch knob to the appropriate On position labeled
(1) or (2). For example, if you connect a bell and a strobe to a line bridging
adapter and the adapter to position (1) on the SAA, turn the control switch to
this position.
Section 7: Troubleshooting the System
Troubleshooting Procedures
As with any piece of equipment, there are times when some parts of your
MERLIN Plus Communication System may not be working properly.
Rather than call someone immediately, you can often determine the cause of the
problem yourself. Simply follow the step-by-step procedures outlined in this
section. Then, with the problem identified, you can either correct the problem
yourself or know from the tables who can help you correct it. If you’re having
trouble with your MERLIN Plus system, locate the symptom on the next few
pages and perform the recommended action to isolate and correct the problem.
The symptoms are listed on the contents page of this section.
If you are unable to identify a problem, perform the System Test found on the
last page of this section before calling your equipment supplier for assistance.
SYMPTOM: CAN’T PLACE
OUTSIDE CALLS.
Possible Cause 1: Faulty accessory connected to voice terminal.
Do This
Disconnect the accessory
from the malfunctioning
voice terminal.
If
Then
The trouble no longer occurs
Do not reconnect the faulty
accessory. Contact your
equipment supplier to
replace it.
The trouble still occurs
Reconnect accessory and go
to Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: System incorrectly set to Touch-Tone or rotary (pulse)
service.
Do This
Check the instructions in
Section 3, “Administering
the System,” to determine
whether your system is set
for Touch-Tone or rotary
(pulse) service.
Then
If
The system is set to TouchTone and you have rotary
(pulse) service
Set the system to rotary
(pulse). Doing so may not
solve this particular problem,
but will allow you to move
on to Possible Cause 3.
The system is set to rotary
and you have Touch-Tone
service
Set the system to TouchTone.
The system is set correctly
Go to Possible Cause 3.
(continued)
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-1
Possible Cause 3: Call Restriction feature activated on malfunctioning voice
terminal.
Do This
Refer to Section 5,
“Reference,” to learn how to
administer the call
Restriction feature.
If
Then
The feature is activated on
the malfunctioning voice
terminals
Deactivate the feature
following the instructions in
Section 5, “Reference.”
Feature is not activated
Go to Possible Cause 4.
Possible Cause 4: Outside Auto Dial, Saved Number
Redial or Last Number Redial are programmed or used incorrectly.
Do This
See Section 5, “Reference” to
make sure these features are
programmed correctly and
the MERLIN Plus System
User’s Guide to be sure the
features are being used
correctly.
If
Then
Any of these features are
programmed incorrectly
Program each feature
correctly and determine
whether this action solves the
problem.
Each feature is programmed
correctly and the trouble still
occurs
Go to Possible Cause 5.
Possible Cause 5: Faulty MERLIN system components.
Do This
Try to place an outside call
and an intercom call from
several voice terminals.
If
Then
The trouble appears only on
intercom calls or the trouble
appears only on one voice
terminal
The trouble is caused by a
component in your system.
Go to the troubleshooting
procedure for the symptom,
“Trouble with voice terminal
lights, speaker, and ringing.”
The trouble appears only on
outside calls from all voice
terminals, or the trouble
appears on only some voice
terminals
Go to Possible Cause 6.
(continued)
7-2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Possible Cause 6: Faulty telephone company wiring.
Do This
At the control unit location,
find the network interface
associated with the outside
line from which you cannot
make a call. Unplug the
line cord from the network
interface and, in its place,
plug in a basic Touch-Tone
or rotary telephone. (Do not
use a MERLIN system voice
terminal.) Try to place an
outside call from the
telephone.
If
Then
The trouble appears on the
basic telephone and the
network interface uses a line
adapter
Go to Possible Cause 7.
The trouble appears on the
basic telephone, and the
network interface does not
have a line adapter
Your outside line is faulty.
Report the trouble to your
local telephone company
representative.
Possible Cause 7: Faulty network interface line adapter.
Do This
Replace the net work
interface line adapter with
another one. Plug the basic
telephone into each of the
jacks. and try to place an
outside call.
If
Then
The trouble still appears on
the basic telephone
Your outside lines are faulty.
Report the trouble to your
local telephone company
representative.
The trouble does not appear
on the basic telephone
The old line adapter is faulty.
Replace it with a new line
adapter.
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-3
I
SYMPTOM: A VOICE
TERMINAL DOESN’T RING.
Possible Cause 1: Volume control is set too low.
Do This
Slide the volume control to a
high setting.
If
The voice terminal still
doesn't ring
Then
Go to Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: Voice terminal is administered not to ring.
Do This
Refer to Section 3,
“Administering the System,”
to learn how to administer
ringing options.
If
Then
The voice terminal is
programmed not to ring
Change the ringing option by
following the instructions in
Section 3, “Administering
the System.”
The voice terminal is
programmed to ring
Go to Possible Cause 3.
Possible Cause 3: Do Not Disturb feature is activated.
Do This
Refer to Section 5,
“Reference,” to see if the
Do Not Disturb feature is
activated.
7-4 Troubleshooting Procedures
If
Then
The feature is activated
Deactivate the feature
following the instructions in
Section 5, “Reference,” or
see the “DO Not Disturb”
entry in the MERLIN Plus
System User's Guide.
The feature is not activated
Refer to the troubleshooting
procedure for the symptom,
‘Trouble with voice terminal
lights, speakers, and ringing.”
SYMPTOM: TROUBLE
WITH VOICE TERMINAL
LIGHTS, SPEAKER, AND
RINGING.
Possible Cause 1: Cable connection, power supply, or voice terminal.
Do This
Slide the T/P switch on the
side of the voice terminal to
the T position and hold it
there.
If
Then
All the red and green lights
flash alternately and a tone
sounds continually
The voice terminal is
working properly.
Go to Possible Cause 3.
Some red and green lights
flash continually and/or a
tone sounds at irregular
intervals
The trouble is caused by
either the voice terminal or
the cable connection.
Go to Possible Cause 2.
None of the lights turn on
and a tone sounds
continually or irregularly
The trouble is either the
control unit, the voice
terminal, or the cable
connection. Go to Possible
Cause 2.
The lights are dim
The trouble is a faulty
control unit or power supply.
Contact your equipment
supplier for assistance.
The speaker is locked on
The voice terminal T/P
switch is set to P with
Program Mode Lock active.
Deactivate Program Mode
Lock then set the T/P switch
to the center position.
Possible Cause 2: Faulty voice terminal.
Do This
Unplug the modular voice
terminal cord from the
malfunctioning voice
terminal. Plug the cord into
a working voice terminal.
Slide its T/P switch to the
T position and hold it there.
Then
If
The same trouble appears on
the working voice terminal
The trouble is either in the
control unit or the cables.
Plug the malfunctioning
voice terminal into its
original jack and go to
Possible Cause 3.
The trouble does not appear
on the working voice
terminal
The malfunctioning voice
terminal is faulty. Contact
your equipment supplier for
assistance.
(continued)
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-5
Possible Cause 3: Cable connections.
Do This
Step 1.
Go to the control unit and
locate the intercom jack for
the malfunctioning voice
terminal and an intercom
jack for a working voice
terminal. Unplug both from
the control unit and replug
each into the other’s jack.
See if the trouble now occurs
on the working voice
terminal.
Step 2.
Test each cable in the wiring
run to the malfunctioning
voice terminal by following
this procedure:
If
The trouble occurs on the
previously working voice
terminal
The problem is caused by
your control unit. Call your
equipment supplier for
assistance.
The trouble no longer occurs
on the working voice
terminal
The trouble is caused by a
cable (there may be more
than one) in the wiring run to
the malfunctioning voice
terminal. However, check
the previous two causes for
this symptom first. If the
problem persists, go on to
Step 2 of this cause.
The trouble still occurs
Check the connection; if the
connections are correct and
secure, remove the second
cable in the wiring run and
replace it with another cable
that is known to work
properly. If the problem still
occurs, replace the third
cable in the run and so on
until all the cable in the run
has been replaced. If the
problem still persists, call
your local equipment
supplier for assistance.
The trouble no longer occurs
The cable was the source of
the problem; discard the
malfunctioning cable.
a. Connect the wiring run to
a functioning voice terminal.
b. Replace the first cable in
the wiring run with one
known to be working.
SYMPTOM: A VOICE
TERMINAL RINGS
CONSTANTLY.
Possible Cause: Voice terminal T/P switch isn’t in the center position.
Do This
Check T/P switch position.
7-6 Troubleshooting Procedures
Then
If
Then
It is set at either T or P
Slide it to the center position
The T/P switch is in the
center position
Your voice terminal is faulty.
Unplug it from the modular
jack and try another voice
terminal in its place.
SYMPTOM:
A VOICE TERMINAL
SPONTANEOUSLY
PLACES CALLS.
Possible Cause: Voice terminal is connected to the port that is administered for
Busy Buster (BB).
Do This
Check the control unit to see
if the voice terminal is
plugged into jack 18
(BB default) or the
administered BB port.
SYMPTOM: ALL VOICE
TERMINAL LIGHTS ARE
OUT WITH NO DIAL TONE.
If
Then
Move the voice terminal to
another port
The voice terminal should no
longer spontaneously place
calls.
You need that jack for the
voice terminal
Administer BB to a different
jack.
Possible Cause 1: Control unit is not receiving power.
Do This
Set the control unit power
switch to Off and then back
to On. Doing so resets the
control unit.
If
Then
The green power light on the
control unit is on and the
trouble remains
Call your equipment supplier
for assistance.
The green power light is on
and the trouble is gone
The problem was corrected
when you reset the control
unit.
The green power light is off
Go to Possible Cause 2.
The red warning light on the
control unit is on
Go to Possible Cause 4.
Possible Cause 2: Switch-controlled power outlet.
Do This
Make sure the control unit is
not plugged into an outlet
controlled by a wall switch.
If
Then
The control unit is not
plugged into a switchcontrolled outlet
Go to Possible Cause 3.
If the control unit is plugged
into a switch-controlled
outlet, turn on the switch
See if you can plug the
control unit into an outlet
that is not controlled by a
switch.
(continued)
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-7
Possible Cause 3: Faulty power outlet.
Do This
Test the outlet by plugging
in an appliance such as a
lamp or a radio.
If
Then
The appliance doesn't work
The outlet is faulty.
The appliance works
Go to Possible Cause 4.
Possible Cause 4: A module is loose.
Do This
Set the control unit power
switch to Off.
NOTE:
You will damage the
modules if you don’ t turn the
power off.
If
All modules are secure and
the red warning light
goes off
You’ve solved the problem.
All modules are secure and
the red warning light
remains on
Contact your equipment
supplier. When calling your
supplier, identify your
system as the MERLIN Plus
R2 system.
Remove the top cover and
then remove and replace
each module, making sure
each is securely seated in its
slot. Replace the top cover
and fasten its screw. Set the
power switch back to On.
SYMPTOM: PROBLEM
WITH CALLS ON HOLD.
Then
Possible Cause 1: Call was inadvertently placed on exclusive hold.
Do This
At the voice terminal that put
the call on hold, touch the
button of the held call.
If
Then
The trouble no longer
appears.
The call was placed on
Exclusive Hold.
The trouble still appears.
Have another system voice
terminal pick up the held
call.
Your voice terminal is faulty,
contact your equipment
supplier.
7-8 Troubleshooting Procedures
Possible Cause 2: The Hold Disconnect Interval setting is different than the
local telephone company’s central office.
Do This
Refer to “Hold Disconnect
Interval” in Section 5,
“Reference” for instructions
to change the setting to
450 milliseconds (long) or
50 milliseconds (short) for
each incoming line.
SYMPTOM:
UNSUCCESSFUL
ATTEMPTS TO USE BUSY
BUSTER.
If
Then
The Hold Disconnect
Interval is set to 450
milliseconds (long) and
callers are no longer
disconnected when placed
on hold
You’ve solved the problem.
The Hold Disconnect
Interval is set to 50
milliseconds (short) and the
light indicating a held call no
longer flashes after the caller
hangs up
You’ve solved the problem.
The light continues to flash
after a caller has hung up
Contact your equipment
supplier for assistance.
Possible Cause 1: Busy Buster is not connected to the port that is
administered for it.
Do This
Check the location of the BB
cord and compare its jack
number with the jack number
that was administered
for BB.
Then
If
Move the BB cord to the
administered jack or
administer the jack
assignment to the current
cord location.
The cord is plugged into a
jack other than the one
administered for BB
Possible Cause 2: Returning Busy Buster call is not picked up quickly.
Do This
If
Then
Answer returning Busy
Buster calls promptly y when
the voice terminal alerts you,
so that the other party doesn’t
get confused by the silence
and hang up
You are interrupted by other
calls while waiting for a
Busy Buster call
Activate the Do Not Disturb
feature so that only transfer
return calls, which include
Busy Buster calls, will ring at
your voice terminal.
Possible Cause 3: The Busy Buster number is in the same local exchange as the
number you're calling from.
Do This
Place the call again.
If
The number is busy.
Then
Activate Busy Buster again.
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-9
SYMPTOM: PROGRAMMED
VOICE TERMINAL
FEATURE DOESN’T WORK.
Possible Cause 1: Feature is programmed or is being used incorrectly.
Do This
If
Then
Step 1.
Review the programming
instructions in Section 5,
“Reference,” to make sure
the feature is programmed
correctly, and the user
instructions for the feature in
the MERLIN Plus System
User’s Guide to make sure it
is being used correctly.
The feature is programmed
correctly and the feature still
doesn't work
Try the feature again. If the
problem persists, go to
Possible Cause 2.
Step 2.
Turn on the Call Forwarding
or Remote Line Access
feature
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Step 3.
Step 3.
Assign a CF destination
number
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Step 4.
Step 4.
Assign lines to the incoming
line group list and/or the
outgoing line group list
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Step 5.
Step 5.
Remove the extra lines from
either the incoming or
outgoing line group list
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Step 6.
Step 6.
Use the procedure, listed
under “Custom Line
Assignments” to remove
“ghost lines” created by lines
that do not have equipment
connected to them
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Step 7.
Step 7.
Unplug the voice terminal
from the designated
Automatic System Access
(ASA) jack and plug the
ASA cord into the jack
instead
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Possible Cause 2.
(continued)
7-10 Troubleshooting Procedures
Possible Cause 2: Control unit or voice terminal may be defective.
Do This
Step 1.
Program the feature on a
second voice terminal and try
to use the feature.
Step 2.
Replace the first voice
terminal with a voice
terminal known to be
working correct] y.
SYMPTOM: VOICE
TERMINAL LIGHTS FLASH
WHEN AN AUTOMATIC
SYSTEM ACCESS
FEATURE IS ACTIVATED.
If
Then
The feature works correctly
The trouble is either the
voice terminal on which the
feature did not work or the
control unit. To determine
which, go to Step 2.
The feature still doesn't work
The problem is in the control
unit. Contact your
equipment supplier for
assistance.
The trouble remains
The problem is in the control
unit. Contact your
equipment supplier for
assistance.
The trouble no longer occurs
The first voice terminal is
defective. Replace it.
Possible Cause 1: No lines are assigned to the ASA incoming or
outgoing line group.
Do This
Refer to Section 5,
“Reference” for instructions
for administering incoming
or outgoing lines for the
ASA feature you want.
Then
If
The feature works
Press the feature button twice
to stop the flashing light.
The feature still doesn't work
Go to Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: Only one line is assigned to the incoming and outgoing group
and it’s the same line for both.
Do This
Incoming and outgoing lines
cannot be the same line. See
Section 5 “Reference’ for
instructions for
administering two
separate lines.
If
Then
The feature works
Press the feature button twice
to stop the flashing light.
The feature still doesn’t work
Go to Possible Cause 3.
(continued)
Troubleshooting Procedures
7-11
Possible Cause 3: A voice terminal is plugged into the ASA jack.
Do This
Move the voice terminal or
administer a new jack
assignment for the ASA
features.
If
Then
The feature works
Press the feature button twice
to stop the flashing light.
The feature still doesn’t
work.
Go to Possible Cause 4.
Possible Cause 4: The ASA jack isn't administered.
Do This
Refer to Section 5,
“Reference” for instructions
for administering the ASA
jack.
7-12
Troubleshooting Procedures
If
Then
The feature works
Press the feature button twice
to stop the flashing light.
The feature still doesn’t work
Contact your equipment
supplier.
System Test
If you are experiencing a problem other than those described in the previous
tests, try the following procedure before calling your equipment supplier.
SYMPTOM: SYSTEM NOT
WORKING; TROUBLE NOT
DESCRIBED IN ABOVE
PROCEDURES.
Possible Cause 1: The control unit may need to be reset.
If
Do This
Remove the front cover (see
the MERLIN Plus Release 2
Installation Manual). Set the
control unit power switch to
Off and then back to On.
Replace the front cover.
The trouble remains
Then
Go to Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: A module may be loose.
WARNING:
Failure to comply with the following instructions may result in a
risk of shock or damage to the equipment.
If
Do This
Remove the front and top
cover (see the MERLIN Pius
Release 2 lnstallation
Manual). Set the control
unit power switch to Off.
The trouble remains
Then
Contact your equipment
supplier for assistance. When
calling your supplier,
identify your system as
MERLIN Plus R2 system.
Unplug all line cords and
pull out each module and
reinsert it so that it is
securely seated in its slot.
Replace the top cover and
fasten its screw. Reconnect
the line cords. Set the power
switch to On. Replace the
front cover.
In the Event of a Power Failure
●
●
●
The system administrator does not need to readminister the system after each
power failure.
The memory module has a four-day battery backup.
The batteries are five-year life batteries and are not customer replaceable.
Contact your equipment supplier when the system requires a replacement
battery.
In the Event of a Liquid Spill or Leak onto the Control Unit
1
Turn off and unplug the control unit.
2
Contact an AT&T service technician immediately.
System Test
7-13
Installation
Insert your MERLIN Plus Release 2 Installation Manual
here for future reference.
Installation
8-1
Index
10-Button,
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom voice terminal, 1-7, 5-78
description of, 1-9
with headset, 6-15
voice terminal, 1-7
description of, 1-9
34-Button Deluxe voice terminal, 1-7
description of, 1-10
34-Button (SP-34),
description of, 1-10
with speakerphone, 1-7
34-Button (SP-34D),
description of, 1-10
with speakerphone and display, 1-7
34-Button voice terminal, 1-7
description of, 1-10
5-Button voice terminal, 1-7
description of, 1-9
with Button-Free line operation, 5-28
with copy, 5-54
with headset, 6-15
with send message, 5-132
A
abbreviated ringing, 5-2
accessory equipment, 6-1 — 6-24
accessory, faulty, 7-1
account numbers, assigning System Speed Dial codes to, 2-23, 3-41
account number entry, 5-3 — 5-5, 5-167, 5-171
assign System Speed Dial codes to, 3-50
button, description of, 5-3
maximum number of characters available, 5-3
with Call Report, 5-43
with One Touch, 5-171
with System Speed Dial, 5-150
adapter,
See General Purpose Adapter, 6-14
administering the system,
description of, 2-1
with customized line assignments, 5-56
administration, 3-2 — 3-9
definition of, 3-1
initial, 3-1
ongoing, 3-1
administration mode,
entering, 3-8
procedure, 3-37
leaving, 3-9
administrator/attendant console, 2-1, 3-2
with centralized programming, 5-50
with System Feature Report, 5-142
alerter jack, 6-23
Allowed List Form, 5-6
allowed lists, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20 — 2-21, 5-6 — 5-8
add an entry, 3-39, 3-48
add to a voice terminal, 3-48
administering, 3-33
assign to a voice terminal, 3-39, 5-8
assigning, 2-21
capacity, 3-33
clearing all entries, 5-7
creating, 2-21
entry form, 2-31
kinds of entries on, 5-6
maximum number of entries on, 5-6
naming, 2-21
number of, 3-33, 5-6
remove an entry, 3-39
remove from a voice terminal, 3-48
removing an entry, 5-7
setting up, 5-6
using with dial codes, 3-6
Alternate Attendant, 5-9 — 5-10
Alternate Attendant console.
See attendant console, 4-9
answering machine, 5-11, 6-2
See also Auto Answer-All, 5-166
with Auto Answer-All, 5-12
with auxiliary lines, 5-22
with General Purpose Adapter, 6-13
area code only,
administration of, 3-11
on System Configuration Form, 2-2
setting the system for, 3-49
dialing, 3-37
ASA features, administering jack assignment, 3-14
ASA jack with Direct Extension Dialing, 5-59
assign Button-Free line operation, 2-14
assign codes,
to account numbers, 3-36
to telephone numbers, 3-36
assign privacy to line A or E, 3-49
assigning lines, 3-48
to a voice terminal, 5-57
to buttons, order of, 3-25
to the system, 3-24
attendant, assign an alternate to handle ASA calls, 3-45
attendant console,
alternate, using, 4-9
Auto Intercom buttons, 4-6
BIS-22 voice terminal used for, 4-1
BIS-34 voice terminal used for, 4-1
BIS-34D voice terminal used for, 4-1
description of, 4-1 — 4-3
ringing options, 4-8
speakerphone tips, 4-10
using, 4-1 — 4-10
Group Page, 4-6, 4-7
Night Service, 4-8
send message, 4-7
headset, 4-9
auto access cord, 5-21
with Direct Extension Dialing, 5-59
Auto Answer intercom, 5-13 — 5-14, 5-171
Auto Answer-All, 5-11 — 5-12, 5-166, 5-171
turns on answering machine, 5-166
turns on facsimile machine, 5-166
turns on modem, 5-166
with General Purpose Adapter, 6-13, 6-14
Auto Intercom, 5-15 — 5-16, 5-97, 5-103, 5-167, 5-171
using, 4-6
with Speaker, 5-134
Auto Intercom button,
and manual signaling button, 5-97
with transfer, 5-160
need for, 4-1
Automatic Call Restriction Reset, 5-17
Index
I-1
Automatic Line Selection, 5-18 — 5-19, 5-88, 5-168
sequence, 2-14, 3-25
with Button-Free line operation, 5-28
with basic telephone, 6-6
with copy, 5-54
Automatic System Access, 5-20, 5-21, 5-142
Call Forwarding, 5-91, 5-101
Direct Extension Dialing, 5-91
on System Configuration Form, 2-6
Remote Line Access, 5-91
System Answer, 5-91
using with dial codes, 3-6
auxiliary jack, 5-22, 6-4
auxiliary lines, 5-22 — 5-23
using basic telephones, 5-22
using facsimile machines, 5-22
using modems, 5-22
with Privacy (on lines A and E), 5-114
B
Background Music, 3-13, 5-95, 6-19, 6-21 — 6-22
set volume, 3-13, 3-48, 3-42, 6-22
turn off, 3-48
basic administration 3-10 — 3-23
basic telephone, 6-4 — 6-6, 6-8
and Modem Interface, 6-4
arid Modem Interface 2, 6-7 — 6-8
with auxiliary lines, 5-22
BIS speakerphone, using, 4-10
BIS voice terminal, 5-15
BIS-10 voice terminal, 1-7
description of, 1-8
limited use as attendant console, 4-1
not recommended as console, 3-7
BIS-22 voice terminal, 1-7
labels for, 3-8
as administrator/attendant console, 3-5
as attendant console, 4-1, 4-3
administration restrictions, 3-3
administration with, 3-3
description of, 1-8
using with Send Message, 5-132
with Message, 5-99
BIS-22D voice terminal with display, description of, 1-8
BIS-34 voice terminal, 1-7, 3-3
labels for, 3-8
with Night Service, 4-8, 5-101
description of, 1-8, 1-9
as attendant console, 3-4, 4-1, 4-2
with display, 1-7, 3-3, 5-66
bridging, 5-24
Busy Buster, 5-25 — 5-27, 5-89, 5-103, 5-167, 5-171
administering jack assignment, 3-15
designating a voice terminal jack for, 3-44
jack, 5-25
set control unit jack for, 3-48
unable to use, 7-9
jack 19 reserved for, 2-6
busy tone, 5-156
button functions change for administration, 3-3
button label sheets for-the administrator/attendant console, 3-7
Button-Free feature, with copy, 5-54
I-2 Index
Button-Free line operation, 2-14, 3-38, 5-28, 5-30
cannot be bridged, 5-24, 5-28
cannot use conference with, 5-28
reassigning lines, 3-48
setting immediate ring on a line, 3-48
setting no ring on a line, 3-48
with conference, 5-52
with hold retrieve, 5-85
C
Call Forwarding, 5-31 — 5-38
See also CF/DXD.
after-hours use, 4-8
Call Forwarding/Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer, 5-39
Call Pickup, 5-40 — 5-42, 5-101, 5-166, 5-171
button, 4-8, 5-101
using a Call Pickup button, 5-40
using a dial code for, 5-40
using a One-Touch Call Pickup button, 5-40
with customized line assignments, 5-56
with One Touch, 5-171
Call Report, 2-23 — 2-24, 3-12, 5-43 — 5-47, 5-167, 6-9
account number entry, 5-43
administering jack assignment, 3-15
control unit jack assignment, 5-46
designating jack, 3-43
general method of entering an account number, 5-3
maximum number of characters available for
account number entry, 5-3
minimum call duration, 3-12, 5-46
not printing a number, 3-41
printout of, 5-43
quick method of entering an account number, 5-3
report call duration, 5-44
report outgoing and incoming calls, 5-44
report outgoing calls only, 5-44
set control unit jack, 3-50
set minimum call duration, 3-43, 3-50
set type of calls printed, 3-50
setting calls reported option, 3-43
setting date, 3-42, 3-50, 5-45
setting time, 3-42, 3-50, 5-45
settings on System Feature Report, 5-142
System Speed Dial codes with, 5-44
type of calls documented, 5-47
voice terminal jack 19 reserved for, 2-7
with account number entry, 5-3 — 5-5
with System Speed Dial, 5-152
call restriction, 3-39, 5-6, 5-48 — 5-49, 7-2
automatic reset, 5-17
outward call restriction, 5-48
reset, 5-48
toll call restriction, 5-48
and Allowed Lists Forms, 5-8
assigning to voice terminals, 3-33
Call Restriction Assignment Form, 2-31 — 2-33
Call Restriction Forms, 2-1, 2-18 — 2-22
call restriction,
use of, 2-18
with copy, 5-54
calls, handling at attendant console, 4-4 — 4-10
calls on hold, problem with, 7-8
calls, rransferring, 4-4 — 4-6
cancel the call, with speaker, 5-135
central office, 2-5
centralized programming, 3-44, 5-50 — 5-51, 5-115, 6-5
for Program Mode Lock, 5-117
using administrator/attendant console, 5-50
Centrex, 5-136
with recall, 5-120
CF/DXD Button, using, 5-170
CF/RLA Disconnect Timer intcrval, to set, 3-46, 3-49
clear template, 5-164
description of, 3-19
example, 3-19
conference, 5-52 — 5-53, 5-166
confirmation tone, 3-9, 5-156
control unit, 3-2
function of, 1-7
jack assignment for the System Feature Report, 5-145
copy, 5-54 — 5-55
call restrictions, 3-40
for Program Mode Lock, 5-117
from large to small voice terminal, 5-54
line assignments, 3-40
programmed features, 3-40
with 5-button voice terminal. 5-54
with customized line assignments, 5-56
cordless telephone, 5-11
with General Purpose Adapter, 6-13
custom calling,
features, 5-136
services, 5-120
customized line assignment, 2-11, 3-25 — 3-32, 5-56 — 5-57
D
Data Collector, 5-46, 5-142, 6-9 — 6-10
capacity, 6-10
jack assigned to, 3-43
needed for printer, 2-7
with Call Report, 5-43
date, setting for System Feature Report, 5-144
delayed ring, 5-107
See ringing options, 5-128
dial code, 3-6, 5-115
chart, 3-6, 3-7, 5-64, 5-75, 5-118
with send message, 5-133
dial tone, 5-156
dialer template, 5-164
description of, 3-20
example, 3-20
dialing feedback,
rotary lines, 5-156
Touch-Tone lines, 5-156
dictation machines, with auxiliary lines, 5-22
Direct Extension Dialing, 5-58 — 5-62
Disallowed List, 2-18, 5-63, 5-65
assign to voice terminals, 3-33
Entry Form, 2-31
using with dial codes, 3-6
disconnect a line from a conference call. See Drop, 5-52
display unit, 5-66 — 5-69
Do Not Disturb, 4-6, 5-15, 5-70 — 5-71, 5-97, 5-168, 5-171, 7-4
drop, 5-72, 5-137, 5-166
drop button, using with conference, 5-52
drop,
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
using with conference, 5-52
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
E
emergency numbers, 2-20
error signal, 3-9
error/deny tone, 5-156
Exclusive Hold, 5-171, 7-8
See Hold-Exclusive, 5-80, 5-83
extra alert device, 4-8, 6-23 — 6-24
extra alert switch. 6-23
F
facsimile machine, 5-11, 5-114, 6-4, 6-7
See also Auto Answer-All, 5-166
with Auto Answer-All, 5-12
with auxiliary lines, 5-22
feature template, 5-164
description of, 3-21
example, 3-21
Form,
Allowed Lists Entry, 2-31
Call Restrictions Assignment, 2-33
Disallowed List Entry, 2-31
Line Assignments, 2-1, 2-9 — 2-14, 2-29
System Configuration, 2-1, 2-27
description of, 2-2 — 2-8
System Speed Dial, 2-1, 2-35, 2-23 — 2-24
Call Restrictions, 2-1, 2-18 — 2-22
G
General Purpose Adapter, 5-11, 6-4, 6-13 — 6-14
ghost lines, 3-10, 5-56
group listening, 5-73, 5-134
with speaker, 5-134, 5-135
Group Page, 2-8, 5-74 — 5-77, 5-168, 5-171
assign voice terminals to, 3-50
using, 4-6 — 4-7
with dial codes, 3-6
Index
I-3
H
Hands-Free Answer on Intercom, 5-78 — 5-79, 5-166
with Auto Answer-Intercom, 5-13
headset, 6-1, 6-15 — 6-16
using, 4-9
headset adapter, 4-9, 6-15 — 6-16
HFAI
button light, 5-91
using, 5-14
voice terminal, 5-15
HFAI/Mic button light, 5-91
Hold, 5-80, 5-136
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
Hold Disconnect Interval, 5-81 — 5-82
administering, 3-14
Hold Retrieve, 5-85 — 5-86, 5-166, 5-171
Hold-Exclusive, 5-83 — 5-84
I
immediate ring, 5-101, 5-107
See Ringing Options, 5-128
individual Voice Terminal Reports, printout, 5-146
intercom, 5-87
numbers, 2-5
numbers 11 through 29, 2-7
button, location of, 3-25
call with Voice Announcement, 5-87, 5-157
preference, 5-88
ringing, 5-87
Intercom 10, 2-5
attendant’s location, 2-5
system administration point, 2-5
J
Jack,
10, reserved for attendant console, 4-1
19, 5-21
designating for Call Report, 3-43
L
Last Number Dial, 5-89 — 5-90, 5-103, 5-167, 5-171
with Saved Number Dial, 5-130
Last Number Redial, 7-2
lights, 5-91 — 5-92
line A, make private, 3-38
line assignments, 3-24, 3-32
customized, 3-38
for ASA Features, 2-14
for voice terminals, 2-9
Line Assignments Form, 2-1, 2-9, 2-14, 2-29
Line Bridging Adapter, 6-24
line,
buttons, with customized line assignments, 3-24
E, make private, 3-38
operation, button-free, 3-38
line request, 5-93, 5-166
I-4 Index
line ringing options, 2-14
immediate ring, 2-14
no ring, 2-14
line select, 5-94, 5-166
lines A and E,
assigning privacy to, 3-49
auxiliary jack bridged to, 5-22
local exchange codes, 2-20
local telephone company, source of outside lines, 2-4
long distance,
area codes, 2-20
dialing, 3-11
on System Configuration Form, 2-2
loudspeaker page, 5-95, 5-96, 5-168, 6-17, 6-20
M
manual signaling, 5-15, 5-97 — 5-98, 5-157, 5-169, 5-171
button, with Auto Intercom, 5-15
MERLIN Plus system features, 5-165
message, 5-99, 5-169
button light, 5-91
message light, 4-1, 4-7, 5-99
used with send message, 5-132, 5-169
Microphone button light, 5-91
minimum call duration, setting, 3-43
modem, 5-11, 5-114, 6-4, 6-7
See also Auto Answer-All, 5-166
with Auto Answer-All, 5-12
and computers, with auxiliary lines, 5-22
with General Purpose Adapter, 6-13
Monitor-on-Hold, 5-100, 5-134
with Speaker, 5-134, 5-135
Music-on-Hold 3-13, 6-21, 6-22
jack, 6-21
setting volume, 3-13, 3-42, 3-48, 6-21
turn off, 3-48
N
network interface, 7-3
Night Service, 4-8, 5-101 — 5-102
no ring, 5-107
See ringing options, 5-128
O
One-Touch Call Pickup.
See Call Pickup, 5-42
One-Touch dialing, 5-103
Auto Intercom, 5-103
Busy Buster, 5-103
Last Number Dial, 5-103
Outside Auto Dial, 5-103
Saved Number Dial, 5-103
System Speed Dial, 5-103
One-Touch Transfer, 4-4
on-hook dialing, 5-104, 5-134
with speaker, 5-134
original line assignments, 2-9, 2-13, 3-24
keeping, 3-24
on 10-button voice terminals, 2-9
on 22-button voice terminals, 2-9
on 34-button voice terminals, 2-9
outgoing calls, controlling, 2-18
Outside AUtO Dial, 5-103, 5-105 — 5-106, 5-167, 5-171, 7-2
button, 5-105
with Saved Number Dial, 5-130
maximum number of characters, 5-105
with speaker, 5-134
with special characters, 5-136
outside call, 5-157
can't place, 7-1 — 7-3
line request, 5-93
line select, 5-94
outside line jacks, description of, 2-4
outside telephone lines, 2-4
appear on buttons, 2-9
number of administered, 3-10
Outward Call Restriction, 5-6, 5-48
assigning, 3-34
P
Page-All group, 2-8, 3-17
paging group, 2-8
assigning, 3-41
removing, 3-41
administration of, 3-17
paging group 1, 2-8
administration of, 3-17
paging group 2, 2-8
administration of, 3-17
paging jack, 5-95
pin-out specifications, 6-18
password.
See System Speed Dial Codes, 5-6
creation of, 5-123
using with RLA mode, 5-121
System Speed Dial Codes, 2-20
pause, 5-136
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
in System Speed Dial Codes, 2-23
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
PBX, 5-136
with recall, 5-120
personal lines, 5-56, 5-107 — 5-108
Personal Speed Dial, 5-109 — 5-111, 5-167
code, 5-3
maximum number of characters, 5-109
description of, 5-3
with special characters, 5-136
personalized ringing, 5-112, 5-157, 5-168
with copy, 5-54
planning forms, need for, 3-2
planning the system, 2-1 — 2-24
printer, 5-46, 5-142, 6-9 — 6-10
jack assigned to, 3-43
needed for reports, 2-7
with Call Report, 5-43
printout cancellation for System Feature Report, 5-147
privacy, 5-113, 5-168, 5-171
on lines A and E, 5-114
private,
line A, 3-38
line E, 3-38
program, definition of, 3-1
Program Mode Lock, 3-23, 5-117 — 5-119, 5-154
programmable feature button above transfer button, 3-25
programming erased. See system reset, 5-148
programming the voice terminal, 5-115 — 5-116
Q
Quick Reference Guide,
Administration Codes, 3-48, 6-24
ASA Features, 5-170
Programming Codes, 5-171
System Administration, 3-37 — 3-47
suggested use, 3-1
Voice Terminal Features, 5-166
R
recall, 5-120, 5-137, 5-166
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
in System Speed Dial Codes, 2-23
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
Receptionist/Secretary Temppate, 5-164
description of, 3-22
example, 3-22
reference, 6-24
Remote Line Access, 5-121 — 5-125
See also RLA, 5-121
reset the system, 3-47, 3-51
for Touch-Tone dialing, 5-159
restriction override, 2-19, 3-36, 3-51, 5-6, 5-150
assigning System Speed Dial Code with, 3-41
marking on System Speed Dial Forms, 2-24
retrieve,
See Hold Retrieve, 5-85
ring override, 4-8, 5-101, 5-126, 5-168, 5-171
button, 5-126
ringing,
intercom call, 5-157
line preference, 5-127
options, 4-8, 5-107, 5-128 — 5-129, 5-168, 5-171, 6-5
delayed ring, 4-8, 5-128
immediate ring, 4-8, 5-128
no ring, 4-8, 5-128
with auxiliary lines, 5-22
with basic telephone, 6-6
with copy, 5-54
ringing tone, 5-156
rings, designate the number of before a call will be answered
by ASA features, 3-46
RLA Button, using, 5-170
rotary dialing, 3-37
setting the system for, 3-49
system incorrectly set to, 7-1
rotary signals, 5-136
administration of, 3-10
need to administrate, 2-2
with Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
with Touch-Tone Enable, 5-158
rotary telephones with BTMI 2, 6-8
Index
I-5
S
Saved Number Dial, 5-89, 5-103, 5-130 — 5-131, 5-167, 5-171
button, 5-130
Saved Number Redial, 7-2
Screen calls, 4-5 — 4-6, 5-107
Send Message, 4-7, 5-99, 5-132 — 5-133, 5-169
dial code chart, 5-133
dial code, using, 4-7
serial interface for data collector, 6-9
setting date.
See Call Report, 5-45
setting time.
See Call Report, 5-45
setting volume for background music, 6-22
SMDR.
See Call Report, 2-23, 5-3
speaker, 5-73, 5-134, 5-135
with Monitor-on-Hold, 5-100
with On-Hook Dialing, 5-104
on voice terminals, 2-7
speakerphone button light, 5-91
special characters in dialing sequences, 5-105, 5-109, 5-136, 5-137
Drop, 5-137
Hold, 5-136
Pause, 5-136
Recall, 5-137
stop, 5-137
Switchhook flash, 5-137
Touch-Tone Enable, 5-137
Transfer, 5-137
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
speed dial.
See System Speed Dial, 5-3
speed dial codes, 2-18
Station Message Detail Recording.
See Call Report, 5-43
Stop character, with Busy Buster, 5-25
stop, 5-136
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
in System Speed Dial Codes, 2-23
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
Supplemental Alert Adapter, 4-8, 5-101, 6-23, 6-24
switchhook flash, 5-136, 6-4
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
in System Speed Dial Codes, 2-23
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with Recall, 5-120
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
with Conference, 5-52, 5-72
System Administration Report, printout, 5-146
System Administrator, 1-4
System Answer, 5-138, 5-141
activating, 4-9
with copy, 5-54
System Answer Button,
using, 5-170
system components, description of, 3-2
I-6 Index
System Configuration Form, 2-1, 2-27
description of, 2-2 — 2-8
use for basic administration, 3-10
using reformation from, 2-9
System Feature Report, 5-142, 5-147, 6-9
abort and cancel, 3-43
administering jack assignment, 3-16
administrator/attendant console with, 5-142
Call Report settings on, 5-142
cancel a report in progress, 3-49
cancel all report requests, 3-49
control unit jack assignment for, 5-145
individual phone reports, 3-43
individual voice terminal reports, 3-49
system and individual voice terminal reports, 3-49
whole system reports, 3-49
printout, 3-43
printout cancellation, 5-147
set control unit jack, 3-50
setting date, 5-144
setting time, 5-144
system administration report, 3-43
System Speed Dial numbers on, 5-142
Transfer Return Interval on, 5-142
using with dial codes, 3-6
voice terminal Allowed List assignments on, 5-142
voice terminal jack 19 reserved for, 2-7
system, planning the, 2-1 — 2-24
system processing flowchart, 2-22
system reset, 5-148 — 5-149
system,
setting for area code only, 3-49
setting for rotary dialing, 3-49
setting for toll prefix, 3-49
setting for Touch-Tone dialing, 3-49
System Speed Dial, 5-103, 5-150 — 5-153, 5-167, 5-171
account number entry, 5-150
code, 5-3, 5-4, 5-150
assigned to telephone numbers, 3-36
assigning, 2-23, 3-41
assigning to account numbers for account number entry, 3-50
assigning to outside telephone numbers, 3-50
assigning to private outside telephone numbers, 3-50
assigning with Restriction Override to outside
telephone numbers, 3-51
assigning with Restriction Override to private outside
telephone numbers, 3-51
maximum number of digits, 5-150
printed on Call Report, 5-44
with Restriction Override, 2-20, 5-6
with account number entry, 5-5
description of, 5-3
numbers on System Feature Report, 5-142
option, administering, 3-36
with account number entry, 5-3 — 5-5
with Call Report, 5-44
with Restriction Override, 5-150, 5-152
with special characters, 5-136
System Speed Dial Form, 2-1, 2-23 — 2-24, 2-35, 3-36, 5-4
system test, 7-1
troubleshooting procedure, 7-13
systemwide options, 3-33
T
telecommunication devices for the deaf, with auxiliary lines, 5-22
telephone number,
privacy with Call Report, 5-44
to forward calls to, change, 3-46
to forward calls to, enter, 3-46
assigning System Speed Dial codes to, 2-23
telephones.
See voice terminals, 5-1
testing the voice terminal, 5-154
Test/Program switch, 5-115, 5-154
explanation of, 3-3
locked, 5-117
time, setting for System Feature Report, 5-144
Toll Call Restriction, 5-6, 5-48
assigning, 3-34
toll prefix,
on System Configuration Form, 2-2
setting, 3-49, 5-155
system factory set for, 3-11
dialing, 3-37
tones, 5-156, 5-157
Touch-Tone dialing, 3-37
setting the system for, 3-49, 5-159
Touch-Tone Enable, 5-158, 5-166, 5-171
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
in System Speed Dial Codes, 2-23
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
Touch-Tone equipment with General Purpose Adapter, 6-13
Touch-Tone lines, 1-3
Touch-Tone or rotary setting, 5-159
Touch-Tone service, system incorrectly set to, 7-1
Touch-Tone signals, 5-136
system set for, 2-2
signals with Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
Touch-Tone telephones with BTMI 2, 6-8
Touch-Tones, system factory set for, 3-10
T/P switch, 7-5, 7-6
to enter administration mode, 3-8
transfer, 5-137, 5-160, 5-161, 5-166
button, 5-160
in Personal Speed Dial, 5-109
with Outside Auto Dial, 5-105
with System Speed Dial, 5-151
Transfer Return Interval, 3-11, 5-160, 5-162
administration of, 3-11
on System Configuration Form, 2-3
on System Feature Report, 5-142
setting, 3-41
with Direct Extension Dialing, 5-59
transferred call, 4-4 — 4-6, 5-157
with voice announcement, 5-157
troubleshooting procedures, 7-1, 7-12
v
voice announcement, 5-15
Disable, 4-5, 5-15, 5-160, 5-168, 5-171, 6-5
and transferred calls, 4-4
on HFAI voice terminal, 5-163
with basic telephone, 6-5
with Group Page, 5-74
with hands-free units, 5-163
Enable, 5-171
Enable/Disable, 5-87, 5-163
with copy, 5-54
voice signal tone, 5-156
Voice Synthesis Processor, 4-8, 5-21, 5-101
with Direct Extension Dialing, 5-58
voice terminal,
Allowed List assignments on System Feature Report, 5-142
assigning lines to, 5-57
definition of, 2-5
doesn’t ring, 7-4
jack, 2-5
jack 19 for Busy Buster, 2-6
jack assignments, administering, 3-14
lights,
are out with no dial tone (begin), 7-8
flash when an ASA feature is activated, 7-11
trouble with, 7-5, 7-6
programmed feature doesn’t work, 7-10
ringing, trouble with, 7-5 — 7-6
rings constantly. 7-6
speaker,
trouble with, 7-5 — 7-6
with group listening, 5-73
spontaneously places calls, 7-7
templates, 3-18 — 3-22, 5-164 — 5-165
tones, 5-166
description of, 1-7, 1-11, 5-1
outward call restricted, 2-20
restricted, 2-18
toll restricted, 2-19
unrestricted, 2-19
setting for Music-on-Hold, 6-21
Index
I-7
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising